# Official Journal L 323/2011

| | ISSN 1977-0677
  doi:10.3000/19770677.L_2011.323.eng |
| --- | --- |
| Official Journal
  of the European Union | L 323 |
| | |
| English edition | Legislation | Volume 546 December 2011 |

ISSN 1977-0677

doi:10.3000/19770677.L_2011.323.eng

Official Journal

of the European Union

L 323

English edition

Legislation

Volume 546 December 2011

---

| Contents | | II   Non-legislative acts | page |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| | | ACTS ADOPTED BY BODIES CREATED BY INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS |
| | * | Regulation No 3 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of retro-reflecting devices for power-driven vehicles and their trailers | 1 |
| | * | Regulation No 28 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of audible warning devices and of motor vehicles with regard to their audible signals | 33 |
| | * | Regulation No 48 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices | 46 |

Contents

II   Non-legislative acts

page

ACTS ADOPTED BY BODIES CREATED BY INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS

*

Regulation No 3 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of retro-reflecting devices for power-driven vehicles and their trailers

1

*

Regulation No 28 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of audible warning devices and of motor vehicles with regard to their audible signals

33

*

Regulation No 48 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices

46

| EN | Acts whose titles are printed in light type are those relating to day-to-day management of agricultural matters, and are generally valid for a limited period.
  The titles of all other Acts are printed in bold type and preceded by an asterisk. |
| --- | --- |

EN

Acts whose titles are printed in light type are those relating to day-to-day management of agricultural matters, and are generally valid for a limited period.

The titles of all other Acts are printed in bold type and preceded by an asterisk.

---

II Non-legislative acts

ACTS ADOPTED BY BODIES CREATED BY INTERNATIONAL AGREEMENTS

| 6.12.2011 | EN | Official Journal of the European Union | L 323/1 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

6.12.2011

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 323/1

---

Only the original UN/ECE texts have legal effect under international public law. The status and date of entry into force of this Regulation should be checked in the latest version of the UN/ECE status document TRANS/WP.29/343, available at:

http://www.unece.org/trans/main/wp29/wp29wgs/wp29gen/wp29fdocstts.html

Regulation No 3 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of retro-reflecting devices for power-driven vehicles and their trailers

Incorporating all valid text up to:

Supplement 12 to the 02 series of amendments — Date of entry into force: 23 June 2011

CONTENTS

REGULATION

| 1. | Scope |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Definitions |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Application for approval |
| --- | --- |

3.

| 4. | Markings |
| --- | --- |

4.

| 5. | Approval |
| --- | --- |

5.

| 6. | General specifications |
| --- | --- |

6.

| 7. | Special specifications (tests) |
| --- | --- |

7.

| 8. | Conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

8.

| 9. | Penalties for non-conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

9.

| 10. | Production definitely discontinued |
| --- | --- |

10.

| 11. | Names and addresses of technical services responsible for conducting approval tests, and of administrative departments |
| --- | --- |

11.

| 12. | Transitional provisions |
| --- | --- |

12.

ANNEXES

| Annex 1 — | Retro-reflecting devices, symbols, units |
| --- | --- |

Annex 1 —

| Annex 2 — | Communication concerning the approval (or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued) of a type of retro-reflecting device pursuant to Regulation No 3 |
| --- | --- |

Annex 2 —

| Annex 3 — | Examples of approval marks |
| --- | --- |

Annex 3 —

| Annex 4 — | Test procedure — Class IA and Class IIIA |
| --- | --- |

Annex 4 —

| Annex 5 — | Specifications of shape and dimensions |
| --- | --- |

Annex 5 —

| Appendix — | Retro-reflectors for trailers — Classes IIIA and IIIB |
| --- | --- |

Appendix —

| Annex 6 — | Colorimetric specifications |
| --- | --- |

Annex 6 —

| Annex 7 — | Photometric specifications |
| --- | --- |

Annex 7 —

| Annex 8 — | Resistance to external agents |
| --- | --- |

Annex 8 —

| Annex 9 — | Stability in time of optical properties of retro-reflecting devices |
| --- | --- |

Annex 9 —

| Annex 10 — | Resistance to heat |
| --- | --- |

Annex 10 —

| Annex 11 — | Colour-fastness |
| --- | --- |

Annex 11 —

| Annex 12 — | Chronological order of tests |
| --- | --- |

Annex 12 —

| Annex 13 — | Resistance to impact — Class IVA |
| --- | --- |

Annex 13 —

| Annex 14 — | Test procedure — Class IVA |
| --- | --- |

Annex 14 —

| Annex 15 — | Chronological order of tests for Class IVA |
| --- | --- |

Annex 15 —

| Annex 16 — | Test procedure for Classes IB and IIIB devices |
| --- | --- |

Annex 16 —

| Annex 17 — | Minimum requirements for conformity of production control procedures |
| --- | --- |

Annex 17 —

| Annex 18 — | Minimum requirements for sampling by an inspector |
| --- | --- |

Annex 18 —

1.   SCOPE

This Regulation applies to retro-reflecting devices (1) for vehicles of categories L, M, N, O, and T (2).

1

2

2.   DEFINITIONS (3)

3

For the purpose of this Regulation,

| 2.1. | The definitions given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

The definitions given in Regulation No 48 and its series of amendments in force at the time of application for type approval shall apply to this Regulation.

| 2.2. | ‘Retro-reflection’ means the reflection in which light is reflected in directions close to the direction from which it came. This property is maintained over wide variations of the illumination angle. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

‘Retro-reflection’ means the reflection in which light is reflected in directions close to the direction from which it came. This property is maintained over wide variations of the illumination angle.

| 2.3. | ‘Retro-reflecting optical unit’ means a combination of optical components producing retro-reflection. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

‘Retro-reflecting optical unit’ means a combination of optical components producing retro-reflection.

| 2.4. | ‘Retro-reflecting device’ (1) means an assembly ready for use and comprising one or more retro-reflecting optical units. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

‘Retro-reflecting device’ (1) means an assembly ready for use and comprising one or more retro-reflecting optical units.

1

| 2.5. | ‘Angle of divergence’ means the angle between the straight lines connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the receiver and to the centre of the source of illumination. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

‘Angle of divergence’ means the angle between the straight lines connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the receiver and to the centre of the source of illumination.

| 2.6. | ‘Illumination angle’ means the angle between the axis of reference and the straight line connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the source of illumination. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

‘Illumination angle’ means the angle between the axis of reference and the straight line connecting the centre of reference to the centre of the source of illumination.

| 2.7. | ‘Angle of rotation’ means the angle through which the retro-reflecting device is rotated about its axis of reference starting from one given position. |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

‘Angle of rotation’ means the angle through which the retro-reflecting device is rotated about its axis of reference starting from one given position.

| 2.8. | ‘Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device’ means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the visible area of the illuminating surface, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver. |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

‘Angular diameter of the retro-reflecting device’ means the angle subtended by the greatest dimension of the visible area of the illuminating surface, either at the centre of the source of illumination or at the centre of the receiver.

| 2.9. | ‘Illumination of the retro-reflecting device’ is the abbreviated expression used conventionally to designate the illumination measured in a plane perpendicular to the incident rays and passing through the centre of reference. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

‘Illumination of the retro-reflecting device’ is the abbreviated expression used conventionally to designate the illumination measured in a plane perpendicular to the incident rays and passing through the centre of reference.

| 2.10. | ‘Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)’ means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation. |
| --- | --- |

2.10.

‘Coefficient of luminous intensity (CIL)’ means the quotient of the luminous intensity reflected in the direction considered, divided by the illumination of the retro-reflecting device for given angles of illumination, divergence and rotation.

| 2.11. | The symbols and units used in this Regulation are given in Annex 1 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.11.

The symbols and units used in this Regulation are given in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

| 2.12. | A type of ‘retro-reflecting device’ is defined by the models and descriptive literature submitted with the application for approval. Retro-reflecting devices can be considered as belonging to the same type if they have one or more ‘retro-reflecting optical units’ which are identical with those of the standard model, or if not identical are symmetrical and suitable for mounting one on the left and one on the right side of the vehicle, and if their other parts differ from those of the standard model only in ways not affecting the properties to which this Regulation applies. |
| --- | --- |

2.12.

A type of ‘retro-reflecting device’ is defined by the models and descriptive literature submitted with the application for approval. Retro-reflecting devices can be considered as belonging to the same type if they have one or more ‘retro-reflecting optical units’ which are identical with those of the standard model, or if not identical are symmetrical and suitable for mounting one on the left and one on the right side of the vehicle, and if their other parts differ from those of the standard model only in ways not affecting the properties to which this Regulation applies.

| 2.13. | Retro-reflecting devices are divided into three classes according to their photometric characteristics: Class IA or IB, Class IIIA or IIIB, and Class IVA. |
| --- | --- |

2.13.

Retro-reflecting devices are divided into three classes according to their photometric characteristics: Class IA or IB, Class IIIA or IIIB, and Class IVA.

| 2.14. | Retro-reflecting devices of Class IB and IIIB are devices combined with other signal lamps which are not watertight according to Annex 8, paragraph 1.1, and which are integrated into the body of a vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

2.14.

Retro-reflecting devices of Class IB and IIIB are devices combined with other signal lamps which are not watertight according to Annex 8, paragraph 1.1, and which are integrated into the body of a vehicle.

| 2.15. | ‘Colour of the reflected light of the device’ The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraph 2.30 of Regulation No 48. |
| --- | --- |

2.15.

‘Colour of the reflected light of the device’ The definitions of the colour of the reflected light are given in paragraph 2.30 of Regulation No 48.

3.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL

| 3.1. | The application for approval shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or mark, or if necessary by his duly accredited representative.
  At the choice of the applicant, it will specify that the device may be installed on a vehicle with different inclinations of the reference axis in respect to the vehicle reference planes and to the ground or, in the case of Class IA, IB and IVA retro-reflectors, rotate around its reference axis; these different conditions of installation shall be indicated in the communication form. It shall be accompanied by:






  3.1.1. | drawings, in triplicate, in sufficient detail to permit identification of the type, showing geometrically the position(s) in which the retro-reflecting device may be fitted to the vehicle, and in case of class IB or IIIB-retro-reflectors details of installation. The drawings must show the position intended for the approval number and class indicator in relation to the circle of the approval mark; |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.1.

The application for approval shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or mark, or if necessary by his duly accredited representative.

At the choice of the applicant, it will specify that the device may be installed on a vehicle with different inclinations of the reference axis in respect to the vehicle reference planes and to the ground or, in the case of Class IA, IB and IVA retro-reflectors, rotate around its reference axis; these different conditions of installation shall be indicated in the communication form. It shall be accompanied by:

3.1.1.

drawings, in triplicate, in sufficient detail to permit identification of the type, showing geometrically the position(s) in which the retro-reflecting device may be fitted to the vehicle, and in case of class IB or IIIB-retro-reflectors details of installation. The drawings must show the position intended for the approval number and class indicator in relation to the circle of the approval mark;

| 3.1.2. | a brief description giving the technical specifications of the materials of which the retro-reflecting optical unit is made; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

a brief description giving the technical specifications of the materials of which the retro-reflecting optical unit is made;

| 3.1.3. | samples of the retro-reflecting device of a colour specified by the manufacturer and, if necessary, the means of fixation; the number of samples to be submitted is specified in Annex 4 to this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

3.1.3.

samples of the retro-reflecting device of a colour specified by the manufacturer and, if necessary, the means of fixation; the number of samples to be submitted is specified in Annex 4 to this Regulation;

| 3.1.4. | if necessary, two samples in other colour(s) for simultaneous or subsequent extension of the approval to devices in other colour(s); |
| --- | --- |

3.1.4.

if necessary, two samples in other colour(s) for simultaneous or subsequent extension of the approval to devices in other colour(s);

| 3.1.5. | in the case of devices of Class IVA: samples of the retro-reflecting device and, if necessary, the means of fixation; the number of samples to be submitted is specified in Annex 14 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.5.

in the case of devices of Class IVA: samples of the retro-reflecting device and, if necessary, the means of fixation; the number of samples to be submitted is specified in Annex 14 to this Regulation.

4.   MARKINGS

| 4.1. | Every retro-reflecting device submitted for approval must bear:






  4.1.1. | the trade name or mark of the applicant; |
| --- | --- | --- |

4.1.

Every retro-reflecting device submitted for approval must bear:

4.1.1.

the trade name or mark of the applicant;

| 4.1.2. | the word ‘TOP’ inscribed horizontally on the highest part of the illuminating surface, if such an indication is necessary to determine without ambiguity the angle or angles of rotation prescribed by the manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.2.

the word ‘TOP’ inscribed horizontally on the highest part of the illuminating surface, if such an indication is necessary to determine without ambiguity the angle or angles of rotation prescribed by the manufacturer.

| 4.2. | A space of sufficient size to accommodate the approval mark shall be provided on every device. This space shall be shown on the drawings referred to in paragraph 3.1.1 above. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

A space of sufficient size to accommodate the approval mark shall be provided on every device. This space shall be shown on the drawings referred to in paragraph 3.1.1 above.

| 4.3. | The markings must be applied on the illuminating surface, or on one of the illuminating surfaces, of the retro-reflecting device and must be visible from the outside when the retro-reflecting device is fitted on the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.

The markings must be applied on the illuminating surface, or on one of the illuminating surfaces, of the retro-reflecting device and must be visible from the outside when the retro-reflecting device is fitted on the vehicle.

| 4.4. | The markings must be clearly legible and be indelible. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.

The markings must be clearly legible and be indelible.

5.   APPROVAL

| 5.1. | If all the samples submitted meet the requirements of this Regulation, approval shall be granted. |
| --- | --- |

5.1.

If all the samples submitted meet the requirements of this Regulation, approval shall be granted.

| 5.2. | If the approval granted in respect of a retro-reflecting device is extended to other such devices differing only in colour, the two samples in any other colour submitted in conformity with paragraph 3.1.4 of this Regulation shall be required to meet only the colorimetric specifications, the other tests no longer being required. Paragraph 5.2 is not applicable to devices of Class IVA. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.

If the approval granted in respect of a retro-reflecting device is extended to other such devices differing only in colour, the two samples in any other colour submitted in conformity with paragraph 3.1.4 of this Regulation shall be required to meet only the colorimetric specifications, the other tests no longer being required. Paragraph 5.2 is not applicable to devices of Class IVA.

| 5.3. | An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 02, corresponding to the 02 series of amendments which entered into force on 1 July 1985) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party shall not assign the same number to another type of retro-reflecting device covered by this Regulation except in the case of an extension of the approval to a device differing only in colour. |
| --- | --- |

5.3.

An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 02, corresponding to the 02 series of amendments which entered into force on 1 July 1985) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party shall not assign the same number to another type of retro-reflecting device covered by this Regulation except in the case of an extension of the approval to a device differing only in colour.

| 5.4. | Notice of approval or of extension or refusal of approval of a type of retro-reflecting device pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the Agreement which apply this Regulation, by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 2 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.

Notice of approval or of extension or refusal of approval of a type of retro-reflecting device pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the Agreement which apply this Regulation, by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 2 to this Regulation.

| 5.5. | There shall be affixed to every retro-reflecting device conforming to a type approved under this Regulation, in the space referred to in paragraph 4.2 above and in addition to the markings prescribed in paragraph 4.1.






  5.5.1. | an international approval mark consisting of:






  5.5.1.1. | a circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (4); |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

5.5.

There shall be affixed to every retro-reflecting device conforming to a type approved under this Regulation, in the space referred to in paragraph 4.2 above and in addition to the markings prescribed in paragraph 4.1.

5.5.1.

an international approval mark consisting of:

5.5.1.1.

a circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (4);

4

| 5.5.1.2. | an approval number; |
| --- | --- |

5.5.1.2.

an approval number;

| 5.5.1.3. | a group of symbols IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB or IVA showing the class of the approved retro-reflecting device. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.1.3.

a group of symbols IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB or IVA showing the class of the approved retro-reflecting device.

| 5.6. | When two or more lamps are part of the same unit of grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps (including a retro-reflector), approval is granted only if each of these lamps satisfies the requirements of this Regulation or of another Regulation. Lamps not satisfying any one of those Regulations shall not be part of such a unit of grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps.






  5.6.1. | Where grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps comply with the requirements of several Regulations, a single international approval mark may be applied, consisting of a circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted the approval, an approval number and, if necessary, the required arrow. This approval mark may be placed anywhere on the grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps provided that:






  5.6.1.1. | it is visible after their installation; |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

5.6.

When two or more lamps are part of the same unit of grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps (including a retro-reflector), approval is granted only if each of these lamps satisfies the requirements of this Regulation or of another Regulation. Lamps not satisfying any one of those Regulations shall not be part of such a unit of grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps.

5.6.1.

Where grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps comply with the requirements of several Regulations, a single international approval mark may be applied, consisting of a circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted the approval, an approval number and, if necessary, the required arrow. This approval mark may be placed anywhere on the grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps provided that:

5.6.1.1.

it is visible after their installation;

| 5.6.1.2. | no part of the grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps that transmits light can be removed without at the same time removing the approval mark. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.1.2.

no part of the grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps that transmits light can be removed without at the same time removing the approval mark.

| 5.6.2. | The identification symbol for each lamp appropriate to each Regulation under which approval has been granted, together with the corresponding series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval, shall be marked:






  5.6.2.1. | either on the appropriate light-emitting surface; |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.6.2.

The identification symbol for each lamp appropriate to each Regulation under which approval has been granted, together with the corresponding series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval, shall be marked:

5.6.2.1.

either on the appropriate light-emitting surface;

| 5.6.2.2. | or in a group, in such a way that each lamp of the grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps may be clearly identified (see the possible examples shown in Annex 3). |
| --- | --- |

5.6.2.2.

or in a group, in such a way that each lamp of the grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps may be clearly identified (see the possible examples shown in Annex 3).

| 5.6.3. | The size of the components of a single approval mark shall not be less than the minimum size required for the smallest of the individual marks by a Regulation under which approval has been granted. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.3.

The size of the components of a single approval mark shall not be less than the minimum size required for the smallest of the individual marks by a Regulation under which approval has been granted.

| 5.6.4. | An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. The same Contracting Party may not assign the same number to another type of grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps covered by this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

5.6.4.

An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. The same Contracting Party may not assign the same number to another type of grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps covered by this Regulation.

| 5.7. | The approval mark must be clearly legible and indelible. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.

The approval mark must be clearly legible and indelible.

| 5.8. | Annex 3 to this Regulation gives examples of arrangements of approval marks for a single lamp (Figure 1) and for grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps (Figure 2) with all the additional symbols referred to above. |
| --- | --- |

5.8.

Annex 3 to this Regulation gives examples of arrangements of approval marks for a single lamp (Figure 1) and for grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps (Figure 2) with all the additional symbols referred to above.

6.   GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

| 6.1. | Retro-reflecting devices must be so constructed that they function satisfactorily and will continue to do so in normal use. In addition, they must not have any defect in design or manufacture that is detrimental to their efficient operation or to their maintenance in good condition. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.

Retro-reflecting devices must be so constructed that they function satisfactorily and will continue to do so in normal use. In addition, they must not have any defect in design or manufacture that is detrimental to their efficient operation or to their maintenance in good condition.

| 6.2. | The components of retro-reflecting devices must not be capable of being easily dismantled. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.

The components of retro-reflecting devices must not be capable of being easily dismantled.

| 6.3. | Retro-reflecting optical units may not be replaceable. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.

Retro-reflecting optical units may not be replaceable.

| 6.4. | The outer surface of retro-reflecting devices must be easy to clean. Hence it must not be a rough surface; any protuberances it may exhibit must not prevent easy cleaning. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.

The outer surface of retro-reflecting devices must be easy to clean. Hence it must not be a rough surface; any protuberances it may exhibit must not prevent easy cleaning.

| 6.5. | For devices of Class IVA their means of fixation shall be such that they allow a stable and durable connection between the device and the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

6.5.

For devices of Class IVA their means of fixation shall be such that they allow a stable and durable connection between the device and the vehicle.

| 6.6. | There shall be no access to the inner surface of the retro-reflectors when in normal use. |
| --- | --- |

6.6.

There shall be no access to the inner surface of the retro-reflectors when in normal use.

7.   SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS (TESTS)

| 7.1. | Retro-reflecting devices must also satisfy the conditions as to dimensions and shape, and the colorimetric, photometric, physical and mechanical requirements set forth in Annexes 5 to 11 and 13 to this Regulation. The test procedures are described in Annex 4 (Class IA, IIIA), Annex 14 (Class IVA) and Annex 16 (Class IB, IIIB). |
| --- | --- |

7.1.

Retro-reflecting devices must also satisfy the conditions as to dimensions and shape, and the colorimetric, photometric, physical and mechanical requirements set forth in Annexes 5 to 11 and 13 to this Regulation. The test procedures are described in Annex 4 (Class IA, IIIA), Annex 14 (Class IVA) and Annex 16 (Class IB, IIIB).

| 7.2. | Depending on the nature of the materials of which the retro-reflecting devices and, in particular, their optical units, are made, the competent authorities may authorise laboratories to omit certain unnecessary tests, subject to the express reservation that such omission must be mentioned under ‘Remarks’ on the form notifying approval. |
| --- | --- |

7.2.

Depending on the nature of the materials of which the retro-reflecting devices and, in particular, their optical units, are made, the competent authorities may authorise laboratories to omit certain unnecessary tests, subject to the express reservation that such omission must be mentioned under ‘Remarks’ on the form notifying approval.

8.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2), with the following requirements:

| 8.1. | Retro-reflectors approved under this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set forth in paragraphs 6 and 7 above. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.

Retro-reflectors approved under this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set forth in paragraphs 6 and 7 above.

| 8.2. | The minimum requirements for conformity of production control procedures set forth in Annex 17 to this Regulation shall be complied with. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.

The minimum requirements for conformity of production control procedures set forth in Annex 17 to this Regulation shall be complied with.

| 8.3. | The minimum requirements for sampling by an inspector set forth in Annex 18 to this Regulation shall be complied with. |
| --- | --- |

8.3.

The minimum requirements for sampling by an inspector set forth in Annex 18 to this Regulation shall be complied with.

| 8.4. | The authority which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every 2 years. |
| --- | --- |

8.4.

The authority which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every 2 years.

9.   PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

| 9.1. | The approval granted for a type of retro-reflecting device may be withdrawn if the requirements are not complied with or if a retro-reflecting device bearing the approval mark does not conform to the type approved. |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

The approval granted for a type of retro-reflecting device may be withdrawn if the requirements are not complied with or if a retro-reflecting device bearing the approval mark does not conform to the type approved.

| 9.2. | If a Contracting Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 2 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

If a Contracting Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 2 to this Regulation.

10.   PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

If the holder of the approval completely ceases to manufacture a type of retro-reflecting device approved in accordance with this Regulation, he shall so inform the authority which granted the approval. Upon receiving the relevant communication, that authority shall inform thereof the other Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 2 to this Regulation.

11.   NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF TECHNICAL SERVICES RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDUCTING APPROVAL TESTS, AND OF ADMINISTRATIVE DEPARTMENTS

The Contracting Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval, issued in other countries, are to be sent.

12.   TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS

The Contracting Parties applying this Regulation:

| 12.1. | shall continue to recognise approvals issued for the former Classes I, II and III in respect of the fitting of retro-reflecting devices intended as replacement for vehicles in use; |
| --- | --- |

12.1.

shall continue to recognise approvals issued for the former Classes I, II and III in respect of the fitting of retro-reflecting devices intended as replacement for vehicles in use;

| 12.2. | may issue approvals for Classes I and II on the basis of the original Regulation (document E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Add.2 of 23 September 1964) provided that the devices are intended as replacements for fitting to vehicles in use and that it would not be technically feasible for the devices in question to satisfy the photometric requirements for Class IA; |
| --- | --- |

12.2.

may issue approvals for Classes I and II on the basis of the original Regulation (document E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Add.2 of 23 September 1964) provided that the devices are intended as replacements for fitting to vehicles in use and that it would not be technically feasible for the devices in question to satisfy the photometric requirements for Class IA;

| 12.3. | may prohibit the fitting of retro-reflecting devices which do not meet the requirements of this Regulation:






  12.3.1. | on vehicles for which type approval or individual approval was issued on or after 20 March 1984; |
| --- | --- | --- |

12.3.

may prohibit the fitting of retro-reflecting devices which do not meet the requirements of this Regulation:

12.3.1.

on vehicles for which type approval or individual approval was issued on or after 20 March 1984;

| 12.3.2. | on vehicles first brought into use on or after 20 March 1985. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.2.

on vehicles first brought into use on or after 20 March 1985.

---

(1)  Also called ‘retro-reflector(s)’.

1

(2)  As defined in Annex 7 to the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2 as last amended by Amend.4).

2

(3)  The definitions of the technical terms (excluding the ones in Regulation No 48) are those adopted by the International Commission on Illumination (CIE).

3

(4)  1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 5 for Sweden, 6 for Belgium, 7 for Hungary, 8 for the Czech Republic, 9 for Spain, 10 for Serbia, 11 for the United Kingdom, 12 for Austria, 13 for Luxembourg, 14 for Switzerland, 15 (vacant), 16 for Norway, 17 for Finland, 18 for Denmark, 19 for Romania, 20 for Poland, 21 for Portugal, 22 for the Russian Federation, 23 for Greece, 24 for Ireland, 25 for Croatia, 26 for Slovenia, 27 for Slovakia, 28 for Belarus, 29 for Estonia, 30 (vacant), 31 for Bosnia and Herzegovina, 32 for Latvia, 33 (vacant), 34 for Bulgaria, 35 (vacant), 36 for Lithuania, 37 for Turkey, 38 (vacant), 39 for Azerbaijan, 40 for The former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, 41 (vacant), 42 for the European Community (Approvals are granted by its Member States using their respective ECE symbol), 43 for Japan, 44 (vacant), 45 for Australia, 46 for Ukraine, 47 for South Africa, 48 for New Zealand, 49 for Cyprus, 50 for Malta, 51 for the Republic of Korea, 52 for Malaysia, 53 for Thailand, 54 and 55 (vacant) and 56 for Montenegro. Subsequent numbers shall be assigned to other countries in the chronological order in which they ratify or accede to the Agreement Concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions, and the numbers thus assigned shall be communicated by the Secretary-General of the United Nations to the Contracting Parties to the Agreement.

4

---

ANNEX 1

RETRO-REFLECTING DEVICES

Symbols and units

| A | = | Area of the illuminating surface of the retro-reflecting device (cm2) |
| --- | --- | --- |
| C | = | Centre of reference |
| NC | = | Axis of reference |
| Rr | = | Receiver, observer or measuring device |
| Cr | = | Centre of receiver |
| Ør | = | Diameter of receiver Rr if circular (cm) |
| Se | = | Source of illumination |
| Cs | = | Centre of source of illumination |
| Øs | = | Diameter of source of illumination (cm) |
| De | = | Distance from centre Cs to centre C (m) |
| D'e | = | Distance from centre Cr to centre C (m) |

A

=

Area of the illuminating surface of the retro-reflecting device (cm2)

C

=

Centre of reference

NC

=

Axis of reference

Rr

=

Receiver, observer or measuring device

Cr

=

Centre of receiver

Ør

=

Diameter of receiver Rr if circular (cm)

Se

=

Source of illumination

Cs

=

Centre of source of illumination

Øs

=

Diameter of source of illumination (cm)

De

=

Distance from centre Cs to centre C (m)

D'e

=

Distance from centre Cr to centre C (m)

| Note: | In general, De and D'e are very nearly the same and under normal conditions of observation it may be assumed that De = D'e. |
| --- | --- |

Note:

| D | = | Observation distance from and from beyond which the illuminating surface appears to be continuous |
| --- | --- | --- |
| α | = | Angle of divergence |
| β | = | Illumination angle. With respect to the line CsC which is always considered to be horizontal, this angle is prefixed by the signs – (left), + (right), + (up) or – (down), according to the position of the source Se in relation to the axis NC, as seen when looking towards the retro-reflecting device. For any direction defined by two angles, vertical and horizontal, the vertical angle is always given first. |
| γ | = | Angular diameter of the measuring device Rr as seen from point C |
| δ | = | Angular diameter of the source Se as seen from point C |
| ε | = | Angle of rotation. This angle is positive when the rotation is clockwise as seen when looking towards the illuminating surface. If the retro-reflecting device is marked ‘TOP’, the position thus indicated is taken as the origin. |
| E | = | Illumination of the retro-reflecting device (lux) |
| CIL | = | Coefficient of luminous intensity (millicandelas/lux)
  Angles are expressed in degrees and minutes. |

D

=

Observation distance from and from beyond which the illuminating surface appears to be continuous

α

=

Angle of divergence

β

=

Illumination angle. With respect to the line CsC which is always considered to be horizontal, this angle is prefixed by the signs – (left), + (right), + (up) or – (down), according to the position of the source Se in relation to the axis NC, as seen when looking towards the retro-reflecting device. For any direction defined by two angles, vertical and horizontal, the vertical angle is always given first.

γ

=

Angular diameter of the measuring device Rr as seen from point C

δ

=

Angular diameter of the source Se as seen from point C

ε

=

Angle of rotation. This angle is positive when the rotation is clockwise as seen when looking towards the illuminating surface. If the retro-reflecting device is marked ‘TOP’, the position thus indicated is taken as the origin.

E

=

Illumination of the retro-reflecting device (lux)

CIL

=

Coefficient of luminous intensity (millicandelas/lux)

Angles are expressed in degrees and minutes.

RETRO-REFLECTORS

Symbols

Image 1

---

ANNEX 2

COMMUNICATION

(Maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

Image 2

issued by:

Name of administration

concerning (2):

APPROVAL GRANTED,

APPROVAL EXTENDED,

APPROVAL REFUSED,

APPROVAL WITHDRAWN,

PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

of a type of retro-reflecting device pursuant to Regulation No 3.

Approval No: ...

Extension No: ...

1. Trade name or mark of the device: ...

2. Manufacturer's name for the type of device: ...

3. Manufacturer's name and address: ...

4. If applicable, name and address of the manufacturer's representative: ...

5. Submitted for approval on: ...

6. Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests: ...

7. Date of test report: ...

8. Number of test report: ...

9. Concise description: ...

In isolation/part of an assembly of devices (2)

Colour of light emitted: white/red/amber (2)

Installation as an integral part of a lamp which is integrated into the body of a vehicle: yes/no (2)

Geometric conditions of installation and relating variations, if any: ...

10. Position of the approval mark: ...

11. Reason(s) for extension (if applicable): ...

12. Approval granted/refused/extended/withdrawn (2)

13. Place: ...

14. Date: ...

15. Signature: ...

16. The following documents, bearing the approval number shown above, are available on request: ...

(1) Distinguishing number of the country which has granted/extended/refused/withdrawn approval (see approval provisions in the Regulation).

(2) Strike out what does not apply.

---

ANNEX 3

EXAMPLES OF APPROVAL MARKS

Figure 1

(Marking for single lamps)

MODEL A

Image 3

MODEL B

Image 4

MODEL C

Image 5

| Note: | The above approval number must be placed close to, but in any position in relation to, the circle surrounding the letter ‘E’. The digits constituting the approval number must face the same way as the ‘E’. The group of symbols indicating the class must be diametrically opposite the approval number. The competent authorities shall avoid using approval numbers IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB and IVA which might be confused with the class symbols IA, IB, IIIA, IIIB and IVA.
  These sketches show various possible arrangements and are given as examples only.
  The above approval mark affixed to a retro-reflecting device shows that the type of device concerned has been approved in the Netherlands (E4) under approval number 02216. The approval number shows that approval was granted in accordance with the requirements of the Regulation as modified by the 02 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

Note:

These sketches show various possible arrangements and are given as examples only.

The above approval mark affixed to a retro-reflecting device shows that the type of device concerned has been approved in the Netherlands (E4) under approval number 02216. The approval number shows that approval was granted in accordance with the requirements of the Regulation as modified by the 02 series of amendments.

Figure 2

(Simplified marking for grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps)

MODEL D

Image 6

MODEL E

Image 7

MODEL F

Image 8

| Note: | The three examples of approval marks, models D, E and F, represent three possible variants of the marking of a lighting device when two or more lamps are part of the same unit of grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps. This approval mark shows that the device was approved in the Netherlands (E4) under approval number 3333 and comprising: | A retro-reflector of Class IA approved in accordance with the 02 series of amendments to Regulation No 3; |
| --- | --- | --- |

Note:

A retro-reflector of Class IA approved in accordance with the 02 series of amendments to Regulation No 3;

| | A rear direction indicator of category 2a approved in accordance with Regulation No 6 in its original form; |
| --- | --- |

A rear direction indicator of category 2a approved in accordance with Regulation No 6 in its original form;

| | A red rear position lamp (R) approved in accordance with the 01 series of amendments to Regulation No 7; |
| --- | --- |

A red rear position lamp (R) approved in accordance with the 01 series of amendments to Regulation No 7;

| | A rear fog lamp (F) approved in accordance with Regulation No 38 in its original form; |
| --- | --- |

A rear fog lamp (F) approved in accordance with Regulation No 38 in its original form;

| | A reversing lamp (AR) approved in accordance with Regulation No 23 in its original form; |
| --- | --- |

A reversing lamp (AR) approved in accordance with Regulation No 23 in its original form;

| | A stop lamp with two levels of illumination (S2) approved in accordance with the 01 series of amendments to Regulation No 7. |
| --- | --- |

A stop lamp with two levels of illumination (S2) approved in accordance with the 01 series of amendments to Regulation No 7.

---

ANNEX 4

TEST PROCEDURE — CLASS IA AND CLASS IIIA

| 1. | The applicant shall submit for approval 10 samples which shall be tested in the chronological order indicated in Annex 12. |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | After verification of the general specifications (paragraph 6 of the Regulation) and the specifications of shape and dimensions (Annex 5), the 10 samples shall be subjected to the heat resistance test described in Annex 10 to this Regulation and at least 1 hour after this test examined as to their colorimetric characteristics and CIL (Annex 7) for an angle of divergence of 20’ and an illumination angle V = H = 0° or if necessary, in the position defined in Annex 7, paragraphs 4 and 4.1. The two retro-reflecting devices giving the minimum and maximum values shall then be fully tested as shown in Annex 7. These two samples shall be kept by the laboratories for any further checks which may be found necessary. The other eight samples shall be divided into four groups of two:







  First group | : | The two samples shall be subjected successively to the water penetration test (Annex 8, paragraph 1.1) and then, if this test is satisfactory, to the tests for resistance to fuels and lubricants (Annex 8, paragraphs 3 and 4). |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Second group | : | The two samples shall, if necessary, be subjected to the corrosion test (Annex 8, paragraph 2), and then to the abrasive-strength test of the rear face of the retro-reflecting device (Annex 8, paragraph 5). |
| Third group | : | The two samples shall be subjected to the test for stability in time of the optical properties of retro-reflecting device (Annex 9). |
| Fourth group | : | The two samples shall be subjected to the colour-fastness test (Annex 11). |

2.

First group

:

The two samples shall be subjected successively to the water penetration test (Annex 8, paragraph 1.1) and then, if this test is satisfactory, to the tests for resistance to fuels and lubricants (Annex 8, paragraphs 3 and 4).

Second group

:

The two samples shall, if necessary, be subjected to the corrosion test (Annex 8, paragraph 2), and then to the abrasive-strength test of the rear face of the retro-reflecting device (Annex 8, paragraph 5).

Third group

:

The two samples shall be subjected to the test for stability in time of the optical properties of retro-reflecting device (Annex 9).

Fourth group

:

The two samples shall be subjected to the colour-fastness test (Annex 11).

| 3. | After undergoing the tests referred to in the above paragraph, the retro-reflecting devices in each group must have:






  3.1. | A colour which satisfies the conditions laid down in Annex 6. This shall be verified by a qualitative method and, in case of doubt, confirmed by a quantitative method. |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.

3.1.

A colour which satisfies the conditions laid down in Annex 6. This shall be verified by a qualitative method and, in case of doubt, confirmed by a quantitative method.

| 3.2. | a CIL which satisfies the conditions laid down in Annex 7. The verification shall be performed only for an angle of divergence of 20’ and an illumination angle of V = H = 0° or, if necessary, in the position specified in Annex 7, paragraphs 4 and 4.1. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

a CIL which satisfies the conditions laid down in Annex 7. The verification shall be performed only for an angle of divergence of 20’ and an illumination angle of V = H = 0° or, if necessary, in the position specified in Annex 7, paragraphs 4 and 4.1.

---

ANNEX 5

SPECIFICATIONS OF SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS

1.   SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF RETRO-REFLECTING DEVICES IN CLASS IA OR IB

| 1.1. | The shape of the illuminating surfaces must be simple, and not easily confused at normal observation distances, with a letter, a digit or a triangle. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

| 1.2. | The preceding paragraph notwithstanding, a shape resembling the letters or digits of simple form O, I, U or 8 is permissible. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

2.   SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF RETRO-REFLECTING DEVICES IN CLASSES IIIA AND IIIB (see Appendix to this Annex)

| 2.1. | The illuminating surfaces of retro-reflecting devices in Classes IIIA and IIIB must have the shape or an equilateral triangle. If the word ‘TOP’ is inscribed in one corner, the apex of that corner must be directed upwards. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

| 2.2. | The illuminating surface may or may not have at its centre a triangular, non-retro-reflecting area, with sides parallel to those of the outer triangle. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

| 2.3. | The illuminating surface may or may not be continuous. In any case, the shortest distance between two adjacent retro-reflecting optical units must not exceed 15 mm. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.

| 2.4. | The illuminating surface of a retro-reflecting device shall be considered to be continuous if the edges of the illuminating surfaces of adjacent separate optical units are parallel and if the said optical units are evenly distributed over the whole solid surface of the triangle. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

| 2.5. | If the illuminated surface is not continuous, the number of separate retro-reflecting optical units including the corner units shall not be less than four on each side of the triangle. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

| 2.5.1. | The separate retro-reflecting optical units shall not be replaceable unless they consist of approved retro-reflecting devices in Class IA. |
| --- | --- |

2.5.1.

| 2.6. | The outside edges of the illuminating surfaces of triangular retro-reflecting devices in Classes IIIA and IIIB shall be between 150 and 200 mm long. In the case of devices of hollow-triangle type, the width of the sides, measured at right angles to the latter, shall be equal to at least 20 per cent of the effective length between the extremities of the illuminating surface. |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

3.   SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS OF RETRO-REFLECTING DEVICES IN CLASS IVA

| 3.1. | The shape of the light emitting surfaces must be simple and not easily confused at normal observation distances with a letter, a digit or a triangle. However, a shape resembling the letters and digits of simple form, O, I, U and 8 is permissible. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

| 3.2. | The light emitting surface of the retro-reflecting device must be at least 25 cm2. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.

4.   Compliance with the above specifications shall be verified by visual inspection.

Appendix

Retro-reflectors for trailers — Classes IIIA and IIIB

Image 9

Note: These sketches are for illustration purposes only.

---

ANNEX 6

COLORIMETRIC SPECIFICATIONS

| 1. | These specifications shall apply only to clear, red or amber retro-reflecting devices.






  1.1. | Retro-reflecting devices may consist of a combined retro-reflecting optical unit and filter, which must be so designed that they cannot be separated under normal conditions of use. |
| --- | --- | --- |

1.

1.1.

Retro-reflecting devices may consist of a combined retro-reflecting optical unit and filter, which must be so designed that they cannot be separated under normal conditions of use.

| 1.2. | The colouring of retro-reflecting optical units and filters by means of paint or varnish is not permitted. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

The colouring of retro-reflecting optical units and filters by means of paint or varnish is not permitted.

| 2. | When the retro-reflecting device is illuminated by CIE standard illuminant A, with an angle of divergence of 1/3 degrees and an illumination angle of V = H = 0 degrees, or, if this produces a colourless surface reflection, an angle V = ± 5 degrees, H = 0 degrees, the trichromatic coordinates of the reflected luminous flux must be within the limits according to paragraph 2.30 of Regulation No 48. |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Clear retro-reflecting devices must not produce a selective reflection, that is to say, the trichromatic coordinates ‘x’ and ‘y’ of the standard illuminant ‘A’ used to illuminate the retro-reflecting device must not undergo a change of more than 0,01 after reflection by the retro-reflecting device. |
| --- | --- |

3.

---

ANNEX 7

PHOTOMETRIC SPECIFICATIONS

1.   When applying for approval, the applicant shall specify one or more or a range of axis of reference, corresponding to the illumination angle V = H = 0° in the table of coefficients of luminous intensity (CIL).

In the case where more than one or a range of different axis of reference are specified by the manufacturer, the photometric measurements shall be repeated making reference each time to a different axis of reference or to the extreme axis of reference of the range specified by the manufacturer.

2.   For photometric measurements, only the illuminating surface defined by the planes contiguous to the outermost parts of the optical system of the retro-reflecting device as indicated by the manufacturer and contained within a circle of 200 mm diameter for Class IA or IB shall be considered, and the illuminating surface itself shall be limited to 100 cm2 though the surfaces of the retro-reflecting optical units need not necessarily attain this area. The manufacturer shall specify the perimeter of the area to be used. In the case of Class IIIA, Class IIIB and Class IVA, the whole of the illuminating surfaces shall be considered without limitation as to size.

3.   CIL values

3.1.   Class IA, Class IB, Class IIIA and Class IIIB

| 3.1.1. | The CIL values for red retro-reflecting devices must be at least equal to those in the table below, expressed in millicandelas per lux, for the angles of divergence and illumination shown.










  (in degrees) |
| --- | --- |
| Class | Angle of divergence
  α | Illumination angles |
| Vertical V | 0 | ± 10 | ± 5 |
| Horizontal H | 0 | 0 | ± 20 |
| IA, IB | 20′ | | 300 | 200 | 100 |
| 1°30′ | | 5 | 2,8 | 2,5 |
| IIIA, IIIB | 20′ | | 450 | 200 | 150 |
| 1°30′ | | 12 | 8 | 8 |

3.1.1.

(in degrees)

Class

Angle of divergence

α

Illumination angles

Vertical V

0

± 10

± 5

Horizontal H

0

0

± 20

IA, IB

20′

300

200

100

1°30′

5

2,8

2,5

IIIA, IIIB

20′

450

200

150

1°30′

12

8

8

CIL values lower than those shown in the last two columns of the above table are not permissible within the solid angle having the reference centre as its apex and bounded by the planes intersecting along the following lines:

| (V = ± 10°, H = 0°) | (V = ± 5°, H = ± 20°). |
| --- | --- |

(V = ± 10°, H = 0°)

(V = ± 5°, H = ± 20°).

| 3.1.2. | CIL values for amber retro-reflecting devices in Class IA or IB must be at least equal to those in the table of paragraph 3.1.1 above multiplied by the coefficient 2,5. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.2.

| 3.1.3. | CIL values for colourless retro-reflecting devices in Class IA or IB must be at least equal to those in the table of paragraph 3.1.1 above multiplied by the coefficient 4. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.3.

3.2.   For devices of Class IVA the CIL values must be at least equal to those in the table below, expressed in millicandelas per lux, for the angles of divergence and illumination shown.

| (in degrees) |
| --- |
| Colour | Angle of divergence
  α | Illumination angles |
| Vertical V | 0 | ± 10 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| Horizontal H | 0 | 0 | ± 20 | ± 30 | ± 40 | ± 50 |
| White | 20′ | | 1 800 | 1 200 | 610 | 540 | 470 | 400 |
| 1°30′ | | 34 | 24 | 15 | 15 | 15 | 15 |
| Amber | 20′ | | 1 125 | 750 | 380 | 335 | 290 | 250 |
| 1°30′ | | 21 | 15 | 10 | 10 | 10 | 10 |
| Red | 20′ | | 450 | 300 | 150 | 135 | 115 | 100 |
| 1°30′ | | 9 | 6 | 4 | 4 | 4 | 4 |

(in degrees)

Colour

Angle of divergence

α

Illumination angles

Vertical V

0

± 10

0

0

0

0

Horizontal H

0

0

± 20

± 30

± 40

± 50

White

20′

1 800

1 200

610

540

470

400

1°30′

34

24

15

15

15

15

Amber

20′

1 125

750

380

335

290

250

1°30′

21

15

10

10

10

10

Red

20′

450

300

150

135

115

100

1°30′

9

6

4

4

4

4

4.   When the CIL of a retro-reflecting device is measured for an angle β of V = H = 0°, it shall be ascertained whether any mirror effect is produced by slightly turning the device. If there is any such effect, a reading shall be taken with an angle β of V = ± 5°, H = 0°. The position adopted shall be that corresponding to the minimum CIL for one of these positions.

4.1.   With an illumination angle β of V = H = 0°, or the angle specified in paragraph 4 above, and an angle of divergence of 20′, retro-reflecting devices which are not marked ‘TOP’ shall be rotated about their axes of reference to the position of minimum CIL, which must conform to the value specified in paragraph 3 above. When the CIL is measured for the other angles of illumination and divergence, the retro-reflecting device shall be placed in the position corresponding to this value of ε. If the specified values are not attained, the device may be rotated about its axis of reference ± 5° from that position.

4.2.   With an illumination angle β of V = H = 0°, or the angle specified in paragraph 4 above, and an angle of divergence of 20′, retro-reflecting devices marked ‘TOP’ shall be rotated about their axes ± 5°. The CIL must not fall below the prescribed value in any position assumed by the device during this rotation.

4.3.   If for the direction V = H = 0°, and for ε = 0° the CIL exceeds the specified value by 50 per cent or more, all measurements for all angles of illumination and divergence shall be made for ε = 0°.

---

ANNEX 8

RESISTANCE TO EXTERNAL AGENTS

1.   RESISTANCE TO WATER AND DIRT PENETRATION

1.1.   Water submersion test

1.1.1.   Retro-reflecting devices whether part of a lamp or not, shall be stripped of all removable parts and immersed for 10 minutes in water at a temperature of 50 ± 5 °C, the highest point of the upper part of the illuminating surface being 20 mm below the surface of the water. This test shall be repeated after turning the retro-reflecting device through 180°, so that the illuminating surface is at the bottom and the rear face is covered by about 20 mm of water. These optical units shall then be immediately immersed in the same conditions in water at a temperature of 25 ± 5 °C.

1.1.2.   No water shall penetrate to the reflecting surface of the retro-reflecting optical unit. If visual inspection clearly reveals the presence of water, the device shall not be considered to have passed the test.

1.1.3.   If visual inspection does not reveal the presence of water or in case of doubt, the CIL shall be measured by the method described in Annex 4, paragraph 3.2, or Annex 14, paragraph 4.2, the retro-reflecting device being first lightly shaken to remove excess water from the outside.

1.2.   Alternative test procedure for Classes IB and IIIB devices

As an alternative, at the request of the manufacturer, the following test (moisture and dust test) shall be applied instead of the submersion-test specified in paragraph 1.1 above.

1.2.1.   Moisture test

The test evaluates the ability of the sample device to resist moisture penetration from a water spray and determines the drainage capability of those devices with drain holes or other exposed openings in the device.

1.2.1.1.   Water spray test equipment

A water spray cabinet with the following characteristics shall be used:

1.2.1.1.1.   Cabinet

The cabinet shall be equipped with a nozzle(s) which provides a solid cone water spray of sufficient angle to completely cover the sample device. The centreline of the nozzle(s) shall be directed downward at an angle of 45° ± 5° to the vertical axis of a rotating test platform.

1.2.1.1.2.   Rotating test platform

The rotating test platform shall have a minimum diameter of 140 mm and rotate about a vertical axis in the centre of the cabinet.

1.2.1.1.3.   Precipitation rate

The precipitation rate of the water spray at the device shall be 2,5 (+ 1,6/– 0) mm/min as measured with a vertical cylindrical collector centred on the vertical axis of the rotating test platform. The height of the collector shall be 100 mm and the inside diameter shall be a minimum of 140 mm.

1.2.1.2.   Water spray test procedure

A sample device mounted on a test fixture, with initial CIL measured and recorded shall be subjected to a water spray as follows:

1.2.1.2.1.   Device openings

All drain holes and other openings shall remain open. Drain wicks, when used, shall be tested in the device.

1.2.1.2.2.   Rotational speed

The device shall be rotated about its vertical axis at a rate of 4,0 ± 0,5 min–1.

1.2.1.2.3.   If the retro-reflector is reciprocally incorporated or grouped with signalling or lighting functions, these functions shall be operated at design voltage according to a cycle of 5 min ON (in flashing mode, where appropriate), 55 min OFF.

1.2.1.2.4.   Test duration

The water spray test shall last 12 h (12 cycles of 5/55 min).

1.2.1.2.5.   Drain period

The rotation and the water spray shall be turned OFF and the device allowed to drain for 1 h with the cabinet door closed.

1.2.1.2.6.   Sample evaluation

Upon completion of the drain period. The interior of the device shall be observed for moisture accumulation. No standing pool of water shall be allowed to be formed, or which can be formed by tapping or tilting the device. The CIL shall be measured according to the method specified in Annex 4 paragraph 3.2 after having dried the exterior of the device with a dry cotton cloth.

1.2.2.   Dust exposure test

This test evaluates the ability of the sample device to resist dust penetration which could significantly affect the photometric output of the retro-reflector.

1.2.2.1.   Dust exposure test equipment

The following equipment shall be used to test for dust exposure:

1.2.2.1.1.   Dust exposure test chamber

The interior of the test chamber shall be cubical in shape in size 0,9 to 1,5 m per side. The bottom may be ‘hopper shaped’ to aid in collecting the dust. The internal chamber volume, not including a ‘hopper shaped’ bottom shall be 2 m3 maximum and shall be charged with 3 to 5 kg of the test dust. The chamber shall have the capability of agitating the test dust by means of compressed air or blower fans in such a way that the dust is diffused throughout the chamber.

1.2.2.1.2.   The dust

The test dust used shall be fine powdered cement in accordance with standard ASTM C 150-84 (1).

1.2.2.2.   Dust exposure test procedure

A sample device, mounted on a test fixture, with the initial CIL measured and recorded, shall be exposed to dust as follows:

1.2.2.2.1.   Device openings

All drain holes and other openings shall remain open. Drain wicks, when used, shall be tested in the device.

1.2.2.2.2.   Dust exposure

The mounted device shall be placed in the dust chamber no closer than 150 mm from a wall. Devices with a length exceeding 600 mm shall be horizontally centred in the test chamber. The test dust shall be agitated as completely as possible by compressed air or blower(s) at intervals of 15 min for a period of 2 to 15 s for the duration of 5 hours. The dust shall be allowed to settle between the agitation periods.

1.2.2.2.3.   Measured sample evaluation

Upon completion of the dust exposure test, the exterior of the device shall be cleaned and dried with a dry cotton cloth and the CIL measured according to the method specified in Annex 4, paragraph 3.2.

2.   RESISTANCE TO CORROSION

2.1.   Retro-reflecting devices must be so designed that they retain the prescribed photometric and colorimetric characteristics despite the humidity and corrosive influences to which they are normally exposed. The resistance of the front surface to tarnishing and of the protection of the rear face to deterioration shall be checked, particularly when an essential metal component seems liable to be attacked.

2.2.   The retro-reflecting device, or the lamp if the device is combined with a light, shall be stripped of all removable parts and subjected to the action of a saline mist for a period of 50 hours, comprising two periods of exposure of 24 hours each, separated by an interval of 2 hours during which the sample is allowed to dry.

2.3.   The saline mist shall be produced by atomising, at a temperature of 35 ± 2 °C, a saline solution obtained by dissolving 20 ± 2 parts by weight of sodium chloride in 80 parts of distilled water containing not more than 0,02 per cent of impurities.

2.4.   Immediately after completion of the test, the sample must not show signs of excessive corrosion liable to impair the efficiency of the device.

3.   RESISTANCE TO FUELS

The outer surface of the retro-reflecting device and, in particular, of the illuminating surface, shall be lightly wiped with a cotton cloth soaked in a mixture of 70 vol. per cent of n-heptane and 30 vol. per cent of toluol. After about 5 minutes, the surface shall be inspected visually. It must not show any apparent surface changes, except that slight surface cracks will not be objected to.

4.   RESISTANCE TO LUBRICATING OILS

The outer surface of the retro-reflecting device and, in particular, the illuminating surface, shall be lightly wiped with a cotton cloth soaked in a detergent lubricating oil. After about 5 minutes, the surface shall be cleaned. The CIL shall then be measured (Annex 4, paragraph 3.2 or Annex 14, paragraph 4.2).

5.   RESISTANCE OF THE ACCESSIBLE REAR FACE OF MIRROR-BACKED RETRO-REFLECTING DEVICES

5.1.   After having brushed the rear face of the retro-reflecting device with a hard nylon brush, a cotton cloth soaked in the mixture, defined in paragraph 3 shall be applied to the said rear face for 1 minute. The cotton cloth is then removed and the retro-reflecting device left to dry.

5.2.   As soon as evaporation is completed, an abrasion test shall be made by brushing the rear face with the same nylon brush as before.

5.3.   The CIL shall then be measured (Annex 4, paragraph 3.2 or Annex 14, paragraph 4.2) after the whole surface of the mirror-backed rear face has been covered with Indian ink.

---

(1)  American Society for Testing and Materials.

---

ANNEX 9

STABILITY IN TIME OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES
   (1)
  OF RETRO-REFLECTING DEVICES

| 1. | The authority which granted approval shall have the right to check the stability in time of the optical properties of a type of retro-reflecting device in service. |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | The competent authorities of countries other than the country in which approval was granted may carry out similar checks in their territory. If a type of retro-reflector in use exhibits a systematic defect, the said authorities shall transmit any components removed for examination to the authority which granted approval, with a request for its opinion. |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | In the absence of other criteria, the concept of ‘systematic defect’ of a type of retro-reflector in use shall be interpreted in conformity with the intention of paragraph 6.1 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.

---

(1)  Despite the importance of tests to check the stability in time of the optical properties of retro-reflecting devices, it is in the present state of the art not yet possible to assess this stability by laboratory tests of limited duration.

---

ANNEX 10

RESISTANCE TO HEAT

| 1. | The retro-reflecting device shall be kept for 48 consecutive hours in a dry atmosphere at a temperature of 65 ± 2 °C. |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | After this test, no cracking or appreciable distortion of the retro-reflecting device and, in particular, of its optical component must be visible. |
| --- | --- |

2.

---

ANNEX 11

COLOUR-FASTNESS
   (1)

| 1. | The authority which granted approval shall have the right to check the colour-fastness of a type of retro-reflecting device in service. |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | The competent authorities of countries other than the country in which approval was granted may carry out similar checks in their territory. If a type of retro-reflector in use exhibits a systematic defect, the said authorities shall transmit any components removed for examination to the authority which granted approval, with a request for its opinion. |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | In the absence of other criteria, the concept ‘systematic defect’ of a type of retro-reflector in use shall be interpreted in conformity with the intention of paragraph 9.1 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.

---

(1)  Despite the importance of tests to check the colour-fastness of retro-reflecting devices, it is in the present state of the art not yet possible to assess colour-fastness by laboratory tests of limited duration.

---

ANNEX 12

CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER OF TESTS

| Number of Annex | Number of paragraph | Tests | Samples |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| a | b | c | d | e | f | g | h | i | j |
| — | 6 (1) | General specifications: visual inspection | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| 5 | — | Shapes and dimensions: visual inspection | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| 10 | — | Heat: | 48 h at 65 ± 2 °C | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| Visual inspection for distortion | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| 6 | — | Colorimetry: visual inspection | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt | | x | | | | | | | | |
| 7 | — | Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0° | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| 7 | 3 | Complete photometry | | | x | x | | | | | | |
| 8 | 1 | Water: | 10 min in normal position | | | | | | | x | x | | |
| 10 min in inverted position | x | x |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 4 | 3.1 | Colorimetry: visual inspection | | | | | | | x | x | | |
| Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt | x | x |
| 4 | 3.2 | Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0° | | | | | | | x | x | | |
| 8 | 3 | Motor fuels: | 5 min | | | | | | | x | x | | |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 8 | 4 | Oils: | 5 min | | | | | | | x | x | | |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 4 | 3.1 | Colorimetry: visual inspection | | | | | | | | | | |
| Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt | x | x |
| 4 | 3.2 | Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0° | | | | | | | x | x | | |
| 8 | 2 | Corrosion: | 24 hours | | | | | x | x | | | | |
| 2 hours interval | x | x |
| 24 hours | x | x |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 8 | 5 | Rear face: | 1 min | | | | | x | x | | | | |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 4 | 3.1 | Colorimetry: visual inspection | | | | | x | x | | | | |
| Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt | x | x |
| 4 | 3.2 | Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0° | | | | | x | x | | | | |
| 9 | — | Stability in time | | | | | | | | | | |
| 4 | 3.1 | Colorimetry: | Visual inspection or trichromatic coordinates | | | | | | | | | | |
| 4 | 3.2 | Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0° | | | | | | | | | | |
| 11 | — | Colour-fastness | | | | | | | | | | |
| 4 | 3.1 | Colorimetry: | Visual inspection or trichromatic coordinates | | | | | | | | | | |
| 4 | 3.2 | Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0° | | | | | | | | | | |
| 4 | 2 | Deposit of samples with administration | | | x | x | | | | | | |

Number of Annex

Number of paragraph

Tests

Samples

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

—

6 (1)

General specifications: visual inspection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

5

—

Shapes and dimensions: visual inspection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

10

—

Heat:

48 h at 65 ± 2 °C

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Visual inspection for distortion

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

6

—

Colorimetry: visual inspection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt

x

7

—

Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0°

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

7

3

Complete photometry

x

x

8

1

Water:

10 min in normal position

x

x

10 min in inverted position

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

4

3.1

Colorimetry: visual inspection

x

x

Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt

x

x

4

3.2

Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0°

x

x

8

3

Motor fuels:

5 min

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

8

4

Oils:

5 min

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

4

3.1

Colorimetry: visual inspection

Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt

x

x

4

3.2

Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0°

x

x

8

2

Corrosion:

24 hours

x

x

2 hours interval

x

x

24 hours

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

8

5

Rear face:

1 min

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

4

3.1

Colorimetry: visual inspection

x

x

Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt

x

x

4

3.2

Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0°

x

x

9

—

Stability in time

4

3.1

Colorimetry:

Visual inspection or trichromatic coordinates

4

3.2

Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0°

11

—

Colour-fastness

4

3.1

Colorimetry:

Visual inspection or trichromatic coordinates

4

3.2

Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0°

4

2

Deposit of samples with administration

x

x

---

(1)  of the Regulation.

---

ANNEX 13

RESISTANCE TO IMPACT — CLASS IVA

| 1. | The retro-reflecting device shall be mounted in a manner similar to the way in which it is mounted on the vehicle, but with the lens faced horizontal and directed upwards. |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Drop a 13 mm diameter polished solid steel ball, once, vertically onto the central part of the lens from a height of 0,76 m. The ball may be guided but not restricted in free fall. |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | When a retro-reflecting device is tested at room temperature with this method, the lens shall not crack. |
| --- | --- |

3.

---

ANNEX 14

TEST PROCEDURE — CLASS IVA

| 1. | The applicant shall submit for approval 10 samples which shall be tested in the chronological order indicated in Annex 15. |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | After verification of the specifications in paragraphs 6.1 to 6.5 and the specifications of shape and dimensions (Annex 5), the 10 samples shall be subjected to the heat resistance test (Annex 10) and 1 hour minimum after this test examined as to their colorimetric characteristics and CIL (Annex 7) for an angle of divergence of 20’ and an illumination angle V = H = 0° or, if necessary, in the positions defined in Annex 7. The two retro-reflecting devices giving the minimum and maximum values shall then be fully tested as shown in Annex 7. These two samples shall be kept by the laboratories for any further checks which may be found necessary. |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Four samples out of the remaining eight samples shall be selected at random and divided into two groups of two in each group.







  First group | : | The two samples shall be subjected successively to the water-penetration resistance test (Annex 8, paragraph 1) and then, if this test is satisfactory, to the tests for resistance to fuels and lubricating oils (Annex 8, paragraphs 3 and 4). |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Second group | : | The two samples shall, if relevant, be subjected to the corrosion test (Annex 8, paragraph 2), and then to the abrasive-strength test of the rear face of the retro-reflecting device (Annex 8, paragraph 5). These two samples shall also be subjected to the impact test (Annex 13). |

3.

First group

:

The two samples shall be subjected successively to the water-penetration resistance test (Annex 8, paragraph 1) and then, if this test is satisfactory, to the tests for resistance to fuels and lubricating oils (Annex 8, paragraphs 3 and 4).

Second group

:

The two samples shall, if relevant, be subjected to the corrosion test (Annex 8, paragraph 2), and then to the abrasive-strength test of the rear face of the retro-reflecting device (Annex 8, paragraph 5). These two samples shall also be subjected to the impact test (Annex 13).

| 4. | After undergoing the tests referred to in the above paragraph, the retro-reflecting devices in each group must have:






  4.1. | A colour which satisfies the conditions laid down in Annex 6. This shall be verified by a qualitative method and, in case of doubt, confirmed by a quantitative method; |
| --- | --- | --- |

4.

4.1.

A colour which satisfies the conditions laid down in Annex 6. This shall be verified by a qualitative method and, in case of doubt, confirmed by a quantitative method;

| 4.2. | A CIL which satisfies the conditions laid down in Annex 7. Verification shall be performed only for an angle of divergence of 20’ and an illumination angle of V = H = 0° or, if necessary, in the positions specified in Annex 7. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

A CIL which satisfies the conditions laid down in Annex 7. Verification shall be performed only for an angle of divergence of 20’ and an illumination angle of V = H = 0° or, if necessary, in the positions specified in Annex 7.

| 5. | The four remaining samples can be utilised, if necessary, for any other purpose. |
| --- | --- |

5.

---

ANNEX 15

CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER OF TESTS FOR CLASS IVA

| Number of Annex | Number of paragraph | Tests | Samples |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| a | b | c | d | e | f | g | h | i | j |
| — | 6 (1) | General specifications: visual inspection | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| 5 | — | Shape and dimensions: visual inspection | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| 10 | — | Heat: | 48 h at 65 ± 20 °C | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| Visual inspection for distortion | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| 6 | — | Colorimetry: visual inspection | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt | | x | | | | | | | | |
| 7 | — | Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0° | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x | x |
| 7 | — | Complete photometry | x | x | | | | | | | | |
| 8 | 1 | Water: | 10 min in normal position | | | x | x | | | | | | |
| 10 min in inverted position | x | x |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 8 | 3 | Motor fuels: | 5 min | | | x | x | | | | | | |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 8 | 4 | Oils: | 5 min | | | x | x | | | | | | |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 6 | — | Colorimetry: visual inspection | | | x | x | | | | | | |
| Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt | x | x |
| 7 | — | Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0° | | | x | x | | | | | | |
| 8 | 2 | Corrosion: | 24 hours | | | | | x | x | | | | |
| 2 hours’ interval | x | x |
| 24 hours | x | x |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 8 | 5 | Rear face: | 1 min | | | | | x | x | | | | |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 13 | — | Impact | | | | | | x | x | | | | |
| visual inspection | x | x |
| 6 | — | Colorimetry: visual inspection | | | | | x | x | | | | |
| Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt | x | x |
| 7 | — | Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0° | | | | | x | x | | | | |
| 14 | 2 | Deposit of samples with administration | x | x | | | | | | | | |

Number of Annex

Number of paragraph

Tests

Samples

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

—

6 (1)

General specifications: visual inspection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

5

—

Shape and dimensions: visual inspection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

10

—

Heat:

48 h at 65 ± 20 °C

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Visual inspection for distortion

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

6

—

Colorimetry: visual inspection

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt

x

7

—

Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0°

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

7

—

Complete photometry

x

x

8

1

Water:

10 min in normal position

x

x

10 min in inverted position

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

8

3

Motor fuels:

5 min

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

8

4

Oils:

5 min

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

6

—

Colorimetry: visual inspection

x

x

Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt

x

x

7

—

Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0°

x

x

8

2

Corrosion:

24 hours

x

x

2 hours’ interval

x

x

24 hours

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

8

5

Rear face:

1 min

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

13

—

Impact

x

x

visual inspection

x

x

6

—

Colorimetry: visual inspection

x

x

Trichromatic coordinates in case of doubt

x

x

7

—

Photometry: limited to 20′ and V = H = 0°

x

x

14

2

Deposit of samples with administration

x

x

---

(1)  of the Regulation.

---

ANNEX 16

TEST PROCEDURE FOR CLASSES IB AND IIIB DEVICES

Retro-reflecting devices of Classes IB and IIIB shall be tested according to the test procedures specified in Annex 4, following the chronological order of tests given in Annex 12, with the exception of the test according to Annex 8, paragraph 1, which for Classes IB and IIIB devices may be replaced by the test specified in Annex 8, paragraph 1.2.

---

ANNEX 17

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION CONTROL PROCEDURES

1.   GENERAL

1.1.   The conformity requirements shall be considered satisfied from a mechanical and geometric standpoint, if the differences do not exceed inevitable manufacturing deviations within the requirements of this Regulation.

1.2.   With respect to photometric performances, the conformity of mass-produced retro-reflectors shall not be contested if, when testing photometric performances of any retro-reflector chosen at random no measured value deviates unfavourably by more than 20 per cent from the minimum values prescribed in this Regulation.

1.3.   The chromaticity coordinates shall be complied with.

2.   MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR VERIFICATION OF CONFORMITY BY THE MANUFACTURER

For each type of retro-reflector the holder of the approval mark shall carry out at least the following tests, at appropriate intervals. The tests shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of this Regulation.

If any sampling shows non-conformity with regard to the type of test concerned, further samples shall be taken and tested. The manufacturer shall take steps to ensure the conformity of the production concerned.

2.1.   Nature of tests

Tests of conformity in this Regulation shall cover the photometric and colorimetric characteristics and the resistance to penetration of water.

2.2.   Methods used in tests

| 2.2.1. | Tests shall generally be carried out in accordance with the methods set out in this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.

| 2.2.2. | In any test of conformity carried out by the manufacturer, equivalent methods may be used with the consent of the competent authority responsible for approval tests. The manufacturer is responsible for proving that the applied methods are equivalent to those laid down in this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.

| 2.2.3. | The application of paragraphs 2.2.1 and 2.2.2 requires regular calibration of test apparatus and its correlation with measurements made by a competent authority. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.3.

| 2.2.4. | In all cases the reference methods shall be those of this Regulation, particularly for the purpose of administrative verification and sampling. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.4.

2.3.   Nature of sampling

Samples of retro-reflectors shall be selected at random from the production of a uniform batch. A uniform batch means a set of retro-reflectors of the same type, defined according to the production methods of the manufacturer.

The assessment shall in general cover series production from individual factories. However, a manufacturer may group together records concerning the same type from several factories, provided these operate under the same quality system and quality management.

2.4.   Measured and recorded photometric characteristics

The sampled retro-reflector shall be subjected to photometric measurements at the points and the chromaticity coordinates provided for in the Regulation.

2.5.   Criteria governing acceptability

The manufacturer is responsible for carrying out a statistical study of the test results and for defining, in agreement with the competent authority, criteria governing the acceptability of his products in order to meet the specifications laid down for the verification of conformity of products in paragraph 8.1 of this Regulation.

The criteria governing the acceptability shall be such that, with a confidence level of 95 per cent, the minimum probability of passing a spot check in accordance with Annex 18 (first sampling) would be 0,95.

---

ANNEX 18

MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SAMPLING BY AN INSPECTOR

1.   GENERAL

1.1.   The conformity requirements shall be considered satisfied from a mechanical and a geometric standpoint, in accordance with the requirements of this Regulation, if any, if the differences do not exceed inevitable manufacturing deviations.

1.2.   With respect to photometric performance, the conformity of mass-produced retro-reflectors shall not be contested if, when testing photometric performances of any retro-reflector chosen at random:

| 1.2.1. | no measured value deviates unfavourably by more than 20 per cent from the minimum values prescribed in this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.1.

no measured value deviates unfavourably by more than 20 per cent from the minimum values prescribed in this Regulation.

| 1.2.2. | Retro-reflectors with apparent defects are disregarded. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.2.

Retro-reflectors with apparent defects are disregarded.

1.3.   The chromaticity coordinates shall be complied with.

2.   FIRST SAMPLING

In the first sampling four retro-reflectors are selected at random. The first sample of two is marked A, the second sample of two is marked B.

2.1.   The conformity is not contested

| 2.1.1. | Following the sampling procedure shown in the Figure of this Annex the conformity of mass-produced retro-reflectors shall not be contested if the deviation of the measured values of the retro-reflectors in the unfavourable directions are:






  2.1.1.1. | sample A







  A1: | one retro-reflector | 0 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| one retro-reflector not more than | 20 per cent |
| A2: | both retro-reflectors more than | 0 per cent |
| but not more than | 20 per cent |
| go to sample B | |

2.1.1.

2.1.1.1.

sample A

A1:

one retro-reflector

0 per cent

one retro-reflector not more than

20 per cent

A2:

both retro-reflectors more than

0 per cent

but not more than

20 per cent

go to sample B

| 2.1.1.2. | sample B







  B1: | both retro-reflectors | 0 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

2.1.1.2.

sample B

B1:

both retro-reflectors

0 per cent

2.2.   The conformity is contested

| 2.2.1. | Following the sampling procedure shown in the Figure of this Annex the conformity of mass-produced retro-reflectors shall be contested and the manufacturer requested to make his production meet the requirements (alignment) if the deviations of the measured values of the retro-reflectors are:






  2.2.1.1. | sample A







  A3: | one retro-reflector not more than | 20 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| one retro-reflector more than | 20 per cent |
| but not more than | 30 per cent |

2.2.1.

2.2.1.1.

sample A

A3:

one retro-reflector not more than

20 per cent

one retro-reflector more than

20 per cent

but not more than

30 per cent

| 2.2.1.2. | sample B







  B2: | in the case of A2 | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| one retro-reflector more than | 0 per cent |
| but not more than | 20 per cent |
| one retro-reflector not more than | 20 per cent |
| B3: | in the case of A2 | |
| one retro-reflector | 0 per cent |
| one retro-reflector more than | 20 per cent |
| but not more than | 30 per cent |

2.2.1.2.

sample B

B2:

in the case of A2

one retro-reflector more than

0 per cent

but not more than

20 per cent

one retro-reflector not more than

20 per cent

B3:

in the case of A2

one retro-reflector

0 per cent

one retro-reflector more than

20 per cent

but not more than

30 per cent

2.3.   Approval withdrawn

Conformity shall be contested and paragraph 9 applied if, following the sampling procedure in the Figure of this Annex, the deviations of the measured values of the retro-reflectors are:

| 2.3.1. | sample A







  A4: | one retro-reflector not more than | 20 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| one retro-reflector more than | 30 per cent |
| A5: | both retro-reflectors more than | 20 per cent |

2.3.1.

sample A

A4:

one retro-reflector not more than

20 per cent

one retro-reflector more than

30 per cent

A5:

both retro-reflectors more than

20 per cent

| 2.3.2. | sample B







  B4: | in the case of A2 | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| one retro-reflector more than | 0 per cent |
| but not more than | 20 per cent |
| one retro-reflector more than | 20 per cent |
| B5: | in the case of A2 | |
| both retro-reflectors more than | 20 per cent |
| B6: | in the case of A2 | |
| one retro-reflector | 0 per cent |
| one retro-reflector more than | 30 per cent |

2.3.2.

sample B

B4:

in the case of A2

one retro-reflector more than

0 per cent

but not more than

20 per cent

one retro-reflector more than

20 per cent

B5:

in the case of A2

both retro-reflectors more than

20 per cent

B6:

in the case of A2

one retro-reflector

0 per cent

one retro-reflector more than

30 per cent

3.   REPEATED SAMPLING

In the cases of A3, B2, B3 a repeated sampling, third sample C of two retro-reflectors and fourth sample D of two retro-reflectors, selected from stock manufactured after alignment, is necessary within 2 months’s time after the notification.

3.1.   The conformity is not contested

| 3.1.1. | Following the sampling procedure shown in the Figure of this Annex the conformity of mass-produced retro-reflectors shall not be contested if the deviations of the measured values of the retro-reflectors are:






  3.1.1.1. | sample C







  C1: | one retro-reflector | 0 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| one retro-reflector not more than | 20 per cent |
| C2: | both retro-reflectors more than | 0 per cent |
| but not more than | 20 per cent |
| go to sample D | |

3.1.1.

3.1.1.1.

sample C

C1:

one retro-reflector

0 per cent

one retro-reflector not more than

20 per cent

C2:

both retro-reflectors more than

0 per cent

but not more than

20 per cent

go to sample D

| 3.1.1.2. | sample D







  D1: | in the case of C2 | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| both retro-reflectors | 0 per cent |

3.1.1.2.

sample D

D1:

in the case of C2

both retro-reflectors

0 per cent

3.2.   The conformity is contested

| 3.2.1. | Following the sampling procedure shown in the Figure of this Annex the conformity of mass-produced retro-reflectors shall be contested and the manufacturer requested to make his production meet the requirements (alignment) if the deviations of the measured values of the retro-reflectors are:






  3.2.1.1. | sample D







  D2: | in the case of C2 | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| one retro-reflector more than | 0 per cent |
| but not more than | 20 per cent |
| one retro-reflector not more than | 20 per cent |

3.2.1.

3.2.1.1.

sample D

D2:

in the case of C2

one retro-reflector more than

0 per cent

but not more than

20 per cent

one retro-reflector not more than

20 per cent

3.3.   Approval withdrawn

Conformity shall be contested and paragraph 9 applied if, following the sampling procedure in the Figure of this Annex, the deviations of the measured values of the retro-reflectors are:

| 3.3.1. | sample C







  C3: | one retro-reflector not more than | 20 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| one retro-reflector more than | 20 per cent |
| C4: | both retro-reflectors more than | 20 per cent |

3.3.1.

sample C

C3:

one retro-reflector not more than

20 per cent

one retro-reflector more than

20 per cent

C4:

both retro-reflectors more than

20 per cent

| 3.3.2. | sample D







  D3: | in the case of C2 | |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| one retro-reflector 0 or more than | 0 per cent |
| one retro-reflector more than | 20 per cent |

3.3.2.

sample D

D3:

in the case of C2

one retro-reflector 0 or more than

0 per cent

one retro-reflector more than

20 per cent

4.   RESISTANCE TO PENETRATION OF WATER

With respect to the verification of the resistance to penetration of water, the following procedure shall be applied:

One of the retro-reflectors of sample A, after sampling procedure in the Figure of this Annex, shall be tested according to the procedure described in paragraph 1 of Annex 8 respectively paragraph 3 of Annex 14 for Class IVA reflectors.

The retro-reflectors shall be considered as acceptable if the test has been passed.

However, if the test on sample A is not complied with, the two retro-reflectors of sample B shall be subjected to the same procedure and both shall pass the test.

Figure

Image 10

---

| 6.12.2011 | EN | Official Journal of the European Union | L 323/33 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

6.12.2011

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 323/33

---

Only the original UN/ECE texts have legal effect under international public law. The status and date of entry into force of this Regulation should be checked in the latest version of the UN/ECE status document TRANS/WP.29/343, available at:

http://www.unece.org/trans/main/wp29/wp29wgs/wp29gen/wp29fdocstts.html

Regulation No 28 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of audible warning devices and of motor vehicles with regard to their audible signals

Incorporating all valid text up to:

Supplement 3 to the original version of the Regulation — Date of entry into force: 28 December 2000

CONTENTS

REGULATION

| 1. | Scope |
| --- | --- |

1.

I.   AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICES

| 2. | Definitions |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Application for approval |
| --- | --- |

3.

| 4. | Markings |
| --- | --- |

4.

| 5. | Approval |
| --- | --- |

5.

| 6. | Specifications |
| --- | --- |

6.

| 7. | Modification of the type of the audible warning device and extension of approval |
| --- | --- |

7.

| 8. | Conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

8.

| 9. | Penalties for non-conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

9.

| 10. | Production discontinued |
| --- | --- |

10.

II.   AUDIBLE SIGNALS OF MOTOR VEHICLES

| 11. | Definitions |
| --- | --- |

11.

| 12. | Application for approval |
| --- | --- |

12.

| 13. | Approval |
| --- | --- |

13.

| 14. | Specifications |
| --- | --- |

14.

| 15. | Modifications of vehicle type and extension of approval |
| --- | --- |

15.

| 16. | Conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

16.

| 17. | Penalties for non-conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

17.

| 18. | Names and addresses of the technical services conducting approval tests and of administrative departments |
| --- | --- |

18.

ANNEXES

| Annex 1 — | Communication concerning the approval (or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued or extension of approval) of a type of audible warning device for motor vehicles, pursuant to Regulation No 28 |
| --- | --- |

Annex 1 —

| Annex 2 — | Communication concerning the approval (or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued or extension of approval) of a vehicle type with regard to its audible signals pursuant to Regulation No 28 |
| --- | --- |

Annex 2 —

| Annex 3 — | I. | Arrangement of the approval mark of the audible warning device |
| --- | --- | --- |

Annex 3 —

I.

Arrangement of the approval mark of the audible warning device

| II. | Arrangement of the approval mark of a vehicle with regard to its audible signals |
| --- | --- |

II.

Arrangement of the approval mark of a vehicle with regard to its audible signals

1.   SCOPE

This Regulation applies to:

| 1.1. | audible warning devices (AWD) (1), supplied with direct or alternating current or compressed air, which are intended for fitting to motor vehicles of categories L3 to 5, M and N, excluding mopeds (categories L1 and L2) (2); |
| --- | --- |

1.1.

audible warning devices (AWD) (1), supplied with direct or alternating current or compressed air, which are intended for fitting to motor vehicles of categories L3 to 5, M and N, excluding mopeds (categories L1 and L2) (2);

1

2

| 1.2. | the audible signals (3) of motor vehicles listed in 1.1. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

the audible signals (3) of motor vehicles listed in 1.1.

3

I.   AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICES

2.   DEFINITIONS

For the purposes of this Regulation, audible warning devices (AWD) of different ‘types’ shall be understood to mean devices essentially different from one another with respect to such matters as:

| 2.1. | trade name or mark; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.

trade name or mark;

| 2.2. | principles of operation; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.

principles of operation;

| 2.3 | type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current); |
| --- | --- |

2.3

type of electrical supply (direct or alternating current);

| 2.4. | outer shape of case; |
| --- | --- |

2.4.

outer shape of case;

| 2.5. | shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s); |
| --- | --- |

2.5.

shape and dimensions of diaphragm(s);

| 2.6. | shape or kind of sound outlet(s); |
| --- | --- |

2.6.

shape or kind of sound outlet(s);

| 2.7. | rated sound frequency or frequencies; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.

rated sound frequency or frequencies;

| 2.8. | rated supply voltage; |
| --- | --- |

2.8.

rated supply voltage;

| 2.9. | for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure. |
| --- | --- |

2.9.

for devices supplied directly from an external compressed air source, rated operating pressure.

| 2.10. | The AWD is principally intended for:






  2.10.1. | motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW (class I); |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.10.

The AWD is principally intended for:

2.10.1.

motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW (class I);

| 2.10.2. | vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II). |
| --- | --- |

2.10.2.

vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW (class II).

3.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL

3.1.   The application for approval of a type of audible warning device shall be submitted by the holder of the trade name or mark or by his duly accredited representative.

3.2.   It shall be accompanied by the following documents, in triplicate, giving the following particulars:

| 3.2.1. | a description of the type of audible warning device, paying particular attention to the points mentioned in paragraph 2; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.1.

a description of the type of audible warning device, paying particular attention to the points mentioned in paragraph 2;

| 3.2.2. | a drawing showing, inter alia, the warning device in cross section; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

a drawing showing, inter alia, the warning device in cross section;

| 3.2.3. | a list of the components used in manufacture, duly identified, with an indication of the materials used; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

a list of the components used in manufacture, duly identified, with an indication of the materials used;

| 3.2.4. | detailed drawings of all the components used in manufacture. The drawings shall show the place provided for the approval number in relation to the circle of the approval mark. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.

detailed drawings of all the components used in manufacture. The drawings shall show the place provided for the approval number in relation to the circle of the approval mark.

3.3.   In addition, the application for approval shall be accompanied by two samples of the type of warning device.

3.4.   The competent authority shall verify the existence of satisfactory arrangements for ensuring effective control of the conformity of production before type approval is granted.

4.   MARKINGS

4.1.   The samples of the audible warning devices submitted for approval shall bear the manufacturer's trade name or mark; this mark must be clearly legible and indelible.

4.2.   Each sample shall have a space of adequate dimensions for the approval mark; this space shall be indicated in the drawing referred to in paragraph 3.2.2.

5.   APPROVAL

5.1.   If the samples submitted for approval conform to the provisions of paragraphs 6 and 7 below, approval for this type of warning device shall be granted.

5.2.   An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 00 for the Regulation in its original form) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party may not assign this number to another type of audible warning device.

5.3.   The same approval number may be assigned to types of warning device differing only with respect to rated voltage, rated frequency or frequencies or, for the devices mentioned in paragraph 2.8 above, rated operating pressure.

5.4.   Notice of approval or refusal or extension or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a type of warning device pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to the Regulation, and of drawings of the audible warning device (supplied by the applicant for approval) with maximum format A4 (210 × 297 mm) or folded to this format and on the scale 1:1.

5.5.   On every audible warning device which conforms to a type approved under this Regulation, there shall be affixed conspicuously, in an easily accessible place indicated on the approval form, an international approval mark comprising:

| 5.5.1. | a circle containing the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country granting approval (4); |
| --- | --- |

5.5.1.

a circle containing the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country granting approval (4);

4

| 5.5.2. | an approval number; |
| --- | --- |

5.5.2.

an approval number;

| 5.5.3. | an additional symbol in the form of a figure in Roman numerals, showing the class to which the AWD belongs. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.3.

an additional symbol in the form of a figure in Roman numerals, showing the class to which the AWD belongs.

5.6.   The approval mark and the additional symbol must be clearly legible and indelible.

5.7.   Annex 3, Section I, to this Regulation gives an example of the arrangement of the approval mark.

6.   SPECIFICATIONS

6.1.   General specifications

| 6.1.1. | The audible warning device shall emit a continuous and uniform sound; its acoustic spectrum shall not vary substantially during its operation.
  For warning devices supplied with alternating current, this requirement shall apply only at constant generator speed, within the range specified in paragraph 6.2.3.2. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.1.

The audible warning device shall emit a continuous and uniform sound; its acoustic spectrum shall not vary substantially during its operation.

For warning devices supplied with alternating current, this requirement shall apply only at constant generator speed, within the range specified in paragraph 6.2.3.2.

| 6.1.2. | The warning device shall have acoustic characteristics (spectral distribution of the acoustic energy, sound pressure level) and mechanical characteristics such that it passes, in the order indicated, the following tests. |
| --- | --- |

6.1.2.

The warning device shall have acoustic characteristics (spectral distribution of the acoustic energy, sound pressure level) and mechanical characteristics such that it passes, in the order indicated, the following tests.

6.2.   Measurement of the sound characteristics

| 6.2.1. | The warning device should, preferably, be tested in an anechoic environment.
  Alternatively, it may be tested in a semi-anechoic chamber or in an open space (5). In this case, precautions shall be taken to avoid reflections from the ground within the measuring area (for instance by erecting a set of absorbing screens). Compliance with the spherical divergence to a limit of 1 dB within a hemisphere of not less than 5 m radius, up to the maximum frequency to be measured, especially in the measuring direction and at the height of the apparatus and the microphone, shall be checked.
  The ambient noise level shall be at least 10 dB lower than the sound pressure level to be measured.
  The device to be tested and the microphone shall be placed at the same height. This height shall be between 1,15 and 1,25 m. The axis of maximum sensitivity of the microphone shall coincide with the direction of the maximum sound level of the device.
  The microphone shall be so placed that its diaphragm is at a distance of 2 ± 0,01 m from the plane of the sound outlet of the device. In the case of devices with several outlets, the distance shall be determined in relation to the plane of the nearest outlet to the microphone. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.1.

The warning device should, preferably, be tested in an anechoic environment.

Alternatively, it may be tested in a semi-anechoic chamber or in an open space (5). In this case, precautions shall be taken to avoid reflections from the ground within the measuring area (for instance by erecting a set of absorbing screens). Compliance with the spherical divergence to a limit of 1 dB within a hemisphere of not less than 5 m radius, up to the maximum frequency to be measured, especially in the measuring direction and at the height of the apparatus and the microphone, shall be checked.

5

The ambient noise level shall be at least 10 dB lower than the sound pressure level to be measured.

The device to be tested and the microphone shall be placed at the same height. This height shall be between 1,15 and 1,25 m. The axis of maximum sensitivity of the microphone shall coincide with the direction of the maximum sound level of the device.

The microphone shall be so placed that its diaphragm is at a distance of 2 ± 0,01 m from the plane of the sound outlet of the device. In the case of devices with several outlets, the distance shall be determined in relation to the plane of the nearest outlet to the microphone.

| 6.2.2. | The measurements of the sound pressure levels shall be made with a class 1 precision sound level metre conforming to the specifications of IEC Publication No 651, first edition (1979). All measurements shall be made using the time constant ‘F’. The measurement of the overall sound pressure level shall be made using the weighting curve A. The spectrum of the sound emitted shall be measured according to the Fourier transform of the acoustic signal.
  Alternatively, one-third octave filters conforming to the specifications of IEC Publication No 225, first edition (1966) may be used in this case, the sound pressure level in the mid-band frequency 2 500 Hz shall be determined by adding the quadratic means of the sound pressures in the one-third mid-band frequencies 2 000, 2 500 and 3 150 Hz.
  In every case, only the Fourier transform method shall be regarded as a reference method. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.2.

The measurements of the sound pressure levels shall be made with a class 1 precision sound level metre conforming to the specifications of IEC Publication No 651, first edition (1979). All measurements shall be made using the time constant ‘F’. The measurement of the overall sound pressure level shall be made using the weighting curve A. The spectrum of the sound emitted shall be measured according to the Fourier transform of the acoustic signal.

Alternatively, one-third octave filters conforming to the specifications of IEC Publication No 225, first edition (1966) may be used in this case, the sound pressure level in the mid-band frequency 2 500 Hz shall be determined by adding the quadratic means of the sound pressures in the one-third mid-band frequencies 2 000, 2 500 and 3 150 Hz.

In every case, only the Fourier transform method shall be regarded as a reference method.

| 6.2.3. | The AWD shall be supplied with current, as appropriate, at one of the test voltages:






  6.2.3.1. | in the case of AWDs supplied with direct current, at a voltage measured at the terminal of the electric power source of 13/12 of the rated voltage. |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.2.3.

The AWD shall be supplied with current, as appropriate, at one of the test voltages:

6.2.3.1.

in the case of AWDs supplied with direct current, at a voltage measured at the terminal of the electric power source of 13/12 of the rated voltage.

| 6.2.3.2. | in the case of AWDs supplied with alternating current, the current shall be supplied by an electric generator of the type normally used with this type of AWD. The acoustic characteristics of the AWD shall be recorded for electric generator speeds corresponding to 50 %, 75 % and 100 % of the maximum speed indicated by the manufacturer of the generator for continuous operation. During this test, no other electrical load shall be imposed on the electric generator. The endurance test described in paragraph 6.3 shall be carried out at a speed indicated by the manufacturer of the equipment and selected from the above range. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.3.2.

in the case of AWDs supplied with alternating current, the current shall be supplied by an electric generator of the type normally used with this type of AWD. The acoustic characteristics of the AWD shall be recorded for electric generator speeds corresponding to 50 %, 75 % and 100 % of the maximum speed indicated by the manufacturer of the generator for continuous operation. During this test, no other electrical load shall be imposed on the electric generator. The endurance test described in paragraph 6.3 shall be carried out at a speed indicated by the manufacturer of the equipment and selected from the above range.

| 6.2.4. | If a rectified current source is used for the test of an AWD supplied with direct current, the alternating component of the voltage measured at its terminals, when the warning devices are in operation, shall not be more than 0,1 volt, peak to peak. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.4.

If a rectified current source is used for the test of an AWD supplied with direct current, the alternating component of the voltage measured at its terminals, when the warning devices are in operation, shall not be more than 0,1 volt, peak to peak.

| 6.2.5. | For AWDs supplied with direct current, the resistance of the connecting leads, expressed in ohms, including terminals and contacts, shall be as close as possible to (0,10/12) × rated voltage in volts. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.5.

For AWDs supplied with direct current, the resistance of the connecting leads, expressed in ohms, including terminals and contacts, shall be as close as possible to (0,10/12) × rated voltage in volts.

| 6.2.6. | The warning device shall be mounted rigidly, by means of the equipment indicated by the manufacturer, on a support whose mass is at least ten times that of the warning device under test and not less than 30 kg. In addition, arrangements must be made to ensure that reflexions on the sides of the support and its own vibrations have no appreciable effect on the measuring results. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.6.

The warning device shall be mounted rigidly, by means of the equipment indicated by the manufacturer, on a support whose mass is at least ten times that of the warning device under test and not less than 30 kg. In addition, arrangements must be made to ensure that reflexions on the sides of the support and its own vibrations have no appreciable effect on the measuring results.

| 6.2.7. | Under the conditions set forth above, the sound pressure weighted in accordance with curve A shall not exceed the following values:






  (a) | 115 dB(A) for AWDs intended principally for motor cycles with a power less than or equal to 7 kW; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.2.7.

Under the conditions set forth above, the sound pressure weighted in accordance with curve A shall not exceed the following values:

(a)

115 dB(A) for AWDs intended principally for motor cycles with a power less than or equal to 7 kW;

| (b) | 118 dB(A) for AWDs intended principally for vehicles of categories M and N, and motor cycles with a power greater than 7 kW. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

118 dB(A) for AWDs intended principally for vehicles of categories M and N, and motor cycles with a power greater than 7 kW.

| 6.2.7.1. | In addition, the sound-pressure level in the frequency band 1 800 to 3 550 Hz shall be greater than that of any component of a frequency above 3 550 Hz and in any event equal to or greater than:






  (a) | 95 dB(A) for AWDs intended principally for motor cycles with a power less than or equal to 7 kW; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.2.7.1.

In addition, the sound-pressure level in the frequency band 1 800 to 3 550 Hz shall be greater than that of any component of a frequency above 3 550 Hz and in any event equal to or greater than:

(a)

95 dB(A) for AWDs intended principally for motor cycles with a power less than or equal to 7 kW;

| (b) | 105 dB(A) for AWDs intended principally for vehicles of categories M and N, and motor cycles with a power greater than 7 kW. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

105 dB(A) for AWDs intended principally for vehicles of categories M and N, and motor cycles with a power greater than 7 kW.

| 6.2.7.2. | AWDs meeting the sound characteristics mentioned in (b) may be used on the vehicles mentioned in (a). |
| --- | --- |

6.2.7.2.

AWDs meeting the sound characteristics mentioned in (b) may be used on the vehicles mentioned in (a).

| 6.2.8. | The specifications indicated above shall also be met by a device subjected to the endurance test referred to in paragraph 6.3 below, with the supply voltage varying between 115 % and 95 % of its rated voltage for AWDs supplied with direct current or, for AWDs supplied with alternating current, between 50 % and 100 % of the maximum speed of the generator indicated by the manufacturer for continuous operations. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.8.

The specifications indicated above shall also be met by a device subjected to the endurance test referred to in paragraph 6.3 below, with the supply voltage varying between 115 % and 95 % of its rated voltage for AWDs supplied with direct current or, for AWDs supplied with alternating current, between 50 % and 100 % of the maximum speed of the generator indicated by the manufacturer for continuous operations.

| 6.2.9. | The time lapse between the moment when the device is actuated and the moment when the sound reaches the minimum value prescribed in paragraph 6.2.7 above shall not exceed 0,2 seconds measured at an ambient temperature of 20 + 5 °C. This provision is applicable, inter alia, to pneumatic or electro-pneumatic warning devices. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.9.

The time lapse between the moment when the device is actuated and the moment when the sound reaches the minimum value prescribed in paragraph 6.2.7 above shall not exceed 0,2 seconds measured at an ambient temperature of 20 + 5 °C. This provision is applicable, inter alia, to pneumatic or electro-pneumatic warning devices.

| 6.2.10. | Pneumatic or electro-pneumatic warning devices shall, when operating under the power supply conditions established for the devices by the manufacturers, satisfy the same acoustic requirements as are prescribed for electrically operated audible warning devices. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.10.

Pneumatic or electro-pneumatic warning devices shall, when operating under the power supply conditions established for the devices by the manufacturers, satisfy the same acoustic requirements as are prescribed for electrically operated audible warning devices.

| 6.2.11. | In the case of multiple-tone devices in which each sound-emitting unit is capable of functioning independently, the minimum values specified above shall be obtained when each of the constituent units is operated separately. The maximum value of the overall sound level shall not be exceeded when all the constituent units are operated simultaneously. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.11.

In the case of multiple-tone devices in which each sound-emitting unit is capable of functioning independently, the minimum values specified above shall be obtained when each of the constituent units is operated separately. The maximum value of the overall sound level shall not be exceeded when all the constituent units are operated simultaneously.

6.3.   Endurance test

| 6.3.1. | The AWD shall be supplied with current at the rated voltage and with the connecting lead resistances specified in paragraphs 6.2.3 to 6.2.5 above, and operated respectively:






  — | 10 000 times for AWDs intended principally for motor cycles with power less than or equal to 7 kW, |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.3.1.

The AWD shall be supplied with current at the rated voltage and with the connecting lead resistances specified in paragraphs 6.2.3 to 6.2.5 above, and operated respectively:

—

10 000 times for AWDs intended principally for motor cycles with power less than or equal to 7 kW,

| — | 50 000 times for AWDs intended principally for vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles with a power greater than 7 kW, each time for 1 second followed by an interval of 4 seconds. During the test, the AWD shall be ventilated by an air current having a speed of approximately 10 m/sec. |
| --- | --- |

—

50 000 times for AWDs intended principally for vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles with a power greater than 7 kW, each time for 1 second followed by an interval of 4 seconds. During the test, the AWD shall be ventilated by an air current having a speed of approximately 10 m/sec.

| 6.3.2. | If the test is made in an anechoic chamber, the chamber shall be large enough to ensure normal dispersal of the heat released by the warning device during the test. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.2.

If the test is made in an anechoic chamber, the chamber shall be large enough to ensure normal dispersal of the heat released by the warning device during the test.

| 6.3.3. | The ambient temperature in the testing room shall be between + 15° and + 30 °C. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.3.

The ambient temperature in the testing room shall be between + 15° and + 30 °C.

| 6.3.4. | If, after the AWD has been operated for half the number of times prescribed, the sound-level characteristics are no longer the same as before the test, the AWD may be adjusted. After being operated the prescribed number times, and after further adjustment if necessary, the AWD must pass the test described in paragraph 6.2 above. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.4.

If, after the AWD has been operated for half the number of times prescribed, the sound-level characteristics are no longer the same as before the test, the AWD may be adjusted. After being operated the prescribed number times, and after further adjustment if necessary, the AWD must pass the test described in paragraph 6.2 above.

| 6.3.5. | For warning devices of the electro-pneumatic type, the device may be lubricated with the oil recommended by the manufacturer after every 10 000 times of operation. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.5.

For warning devices of the electro-pneumatic type, the device may be lubricated with the oil recommended by the manufacturer after every 10 000 times of operation.

7.   MODIFICATION OF THE TYPE OF AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICE AND EXTENSION APPROVAL

7.1.   Any modification of the type of audible warning device shall be notified to the administrative department which granted approval to the type of audible warning device. This department may then:

| 7.1.1. | either take the view that the modifications made are not likely to have any appreciable adverse effect; |
| --- | --- |

7.1.1.

either take the view that the modifications made are not likely to have any appreciable adverse effect;

| 7.1.2. | or call for a new report from the technical service responsible for the tests. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.

or call for a new report from the technical service responsible for the tests.

7.2.   Notice of confirmation of the approval, with particulars of the modifications, or of refusal of approval shall be communicated to the Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation, in accordance with the procedure indicated in paragraph 5.4 above.

7.3.   The competent authority issuing the extension of approval shall assign a series number to each communication form drawn up for such an extension.

8.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2) with the following requirements:

| 8.1. | AWD approved under this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set forth in paragraph 6 above. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.

AWD approved under this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set forth in paragraph 6 above.

| 8.2. | The authority which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every 2 years. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.

The authority which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every 2 years.

9.   PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

9.1.   The approval granted to a type of audible warning device pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the conditions set forth in paragraph 8.1 are not complied with or if the audible warning device fails to pass the checks referred to in paragraph 8.2 above.

9.2.   Should a Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraw an approval which it has previously granted, it shall forthwith notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a copy of the approval form bearing at the end in large letters the statement, signed and dated: ‘APPROVAL WITHDRAWN’.

10.   PRODUCTION DISCONTINUED

If the holder of an approval granted pursuant to this Regulation discontinues the production of the type of audible warning device approved, he shall inform the authority which granted the approval. Upon receipt of the communication, this authority shall inform the other Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a copy of the approval form bearing at the end in large letters the statement, signed and dated: ‘PRODUCTION DISCONTINUED’.

II.   AUDIBLE SIGNALS OF MOTOR VEHICLES

11.   DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this Regulation,

| 11.1. | ‘Approval of the motor vehicle’ shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal; |
| --- | --- |

11.1.

‘Approval of the motor vehicle’ shall be understood to mean approval of vehicle type with regard to its audible signal;

| 11.2. | ‘Vehicle type’ shall be understood to mean vehicles not essentially different from another with respect to such matters as:






  11.2.1. | the number and type(s) of warning devices fitted on the vehicle; |
| --- | --- | --- |

11.2.

‘Vehicle type’ shall be understood to mean vehicles not essentially different from another with respect to such matters as:

11.2.1.

the number and type(s) of warning devices fitted on the vehicle;

| 11.2.2. | the mountings used to fit the warning devices to the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

11.2.2.

the mountings used to fit the warning devices to the vehicle;

| 11.2.3. | the position of the warning devices on the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

11.2.3.

the position of the warning devices on the vehicle;

| 11.2.4. | the rigidity of the parts of the structure on which the warning device(s) is (are) mounted; |
| --- | --- |

11.2.4.

the rigidity of the parts of the structure on which the warning device(s) is (are) mounted;

| 11.2.5. | the shape and materials of the bodywork at the front of the vehicle which might affect the level of the sound emitted by the warning device(s) and have a masking effect. |
| --- | --- |

11.2.5.

the shape and materials of the bodywork at the front of the vehicle which might affect the level of the sound emitted by the warning device(s) and have a masking effect.

12.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL

12.1.   The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to its audible signals shall be submitted by the vehicle manufacturer or by his duly accredited representative;

12.2.   It shall be accompanied by the following documents in triplicate giving the following particulars:

| 12.2.1. | a description of the vehicle type with regard to the items mentioned in paragraph 11.2 above; |
| --- | --- |

12.2.1.

a description of the vehicle type with regard to the items mentioned in paragraph 11.2 above;

| 12.2.2. | a list of the components required to identify the warning device(s) that may be mounted on the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

12.2.2.

a list of the components required to identify the warning device(s) that may be mounted on the vehicle;

| 12.2.3. | Drawings indicating the position on the vehicle of the warning device(s) and of its (their) mountings. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.3.

Drawings indicating the position on the vehicle of the warning device(s) and of its (their) mountings.

12.3.   A vehicle representative of the vehicle type to be approved shall be submitted to the technical service responsible for the approval tests.

13.   APPROVAL

13.1.   If the vehicle type submitted for approval pursuant to this Regulation meets the requirements of paragraphs 14 and 15 below, approval for this vehicle type shall be granted.

13.2.   An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 00 for the Regulation in its original form) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party may not assign this number to another vehicle type.

13.3.   Notice of approval or of refusal of approval or extension or withdrawal or production definitely discontinued of a vehicle type pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 2 to the Regulation, and of drawings (supplied by the applicant for approval) with maximum format A4 (210 × 297 mm), or folded to this format, and on an appropriate scale.

13.4.   On every vehicle which conforms to a vehicle type approved under this Regulation there shall be affixed conspicuously, in an easily accessible place indicated on the approval form, an international approval mark comprising:

| 13.4.1. | a circle containing the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country granting approval, |
| --- | --- |

13.4.1.

a circle containing the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country granting approval,

| 13.4.2. | the number of this Regulation placed to the right of the circle referred to in paragraph 13.4.1. |
| --- | --- |

13.4.2.

the number of this Regulation placed to the right of the circle referred to in paragraph 13.4.1.

13.5.   If the vehicle conforms to a vehicle type approved, under another (other) Regulation(s) annexed to the Agreement, in the same country as that which has granted the approval under this Regulation, the symbol referred to in paragraph 13.4 need not be repeated; in this case, the additional numbers and symbols of all the Regulations under which approval has been granted in the country which granted the approval under this Regulation shall be set out in vertical columns to the right of the symbol referred to in paragraph 13.4.

13.6.   The approval mark must be clearly legible and indelible.

13.7.   The approval mark shall be placed near the plate bearing the characteristics of the vehicle and may also be affixed to this plate.

13.8.   Annex 3, Section II, to this Regulation gives an example of the arrangement of the approval mark.

13.9.   The competent authority shall verify the existence of satisfactory arrangements for ensuring effective control of the conformity of production before type approval is granted.

14.   SPECIFICATIONS

The vehicle shall comply with the following specifications:

| 14.1. | The audible warning device(s) (or system) fitted on the vehicle shall be of a type approved under this Regulation;
  Audible warning devices of Class II approved under this Regulation in its original form, and therefore not bearing the symbol II in their approval mark, may continue to be fitted to vehicle types submitted for approval pursuant to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

14.1.

The audible warning device(s) (or system) fitted on the vehicle shall be of a type approved under this Regulation;

Audible warning devices of Class II approved under this Regulation in its original form, and therefore not bearing the symbol II in their approval mark, may continue to be fitted to vehicle types submitted for approval pursuant to this Regulation.

| 14.2. | The test voltage shall be as specified in paragraph 6.2.3 of the Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

14.2.

The test voltage shall be as specified in paragraph 6.2.3 of the Regulation;

| 14.3. | The sound pressure measurements shall be made in the conditions specified in paragraph 6.2.2 of this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

14.3.

The sound pressure measurements shall be made in the conditions specified in paragraph 6.2.2 of this Regulation;

| 14.4. | The A-weighted sound pressure level emitted by the device fitted on the vehicle shall be measured at a distance of 7 m in front of the vehicle, the latter being placed on an open site, on ground as smooth as possible and, in the case of devices supplied with direct current, with its engine stopped; |
| --- | --- |

14.4.

The A-weighted sound pressure level emitted by the device fitted on the vehicle shall be measured at a distance of 7 m in front of the vehicle, the latter being placed on an open site, on ground as smooth as possible and, in the case of devices supplied with direct current, with its engine stopped;

| 14.5. | The microphone of the measuring instrument shall be placed approximately in the mean longitudinal plane of the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

14.5.

The microphone of the measuring instrument shall be placed approximately in the mean longitudinal plane of the vehicle;

| 14.6. | The sound pressure level of the background noise and wind noise must be at least 10 dB (A) below the sound to be measured; |
| --- | --- |

14.6.

The sound pressure level of the background noise and wind noise must be at least 10 dB (A) below the sound to be measured;

| 14.7. | The maximum sound-pressure level shall be sought within the range of 0,5 and 1,5 m above the ground; |
| --- | --- |

14.7.

The maximum sound-pressure level shall be sought within the range of 0,5 and 1,5 m above the ground;

| 14.8. | Measured under the conditions specified in paragraphs 14.2 to 14.7, the maximum sound-pressure level (14.7) of the audible signal tested shall be at least:






  (a) | equal to 83 dB(A) and not more than 112 dB(A) for the signals of motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW; |
| --- | --- | --- |

14.8.

Measured under the conditions specified in paragraphs 14.2 to 14.7, the maximum sound-pressure level (14.7) of the audible signal tested shall be at least:

(a)

equal to 83 dB(A) and not more than 112 dB(A) for the signals of motor cycles of a power less than or equal to 7 kW;

| (b) | equal to 93 dB(A) and at most 112 dB(A) for the signals of vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

equal to 93 dB(A) and at most 112 dB(A) for the signals of vehicles of categories M and N and motor cycles of a power greater than 7 kW.

15.   MODIFICATIONS OF VEHICLE TYPE AND EXTENSION OF APPROVAL

15.1.   Any modification of the vehicle type shall be notified to the administrative department which granted approval to the vehicle type. This department may then:

| 15.1.1. | either take the view that the modifications made are not likely to have any appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the vehicle still meets the requirements; or |
| --- | --- |

15.1.1.

either take the view that the modifications made are not likely to have any appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the vehicle still meets the requirements; or

| 15.1.2. | call for a new report from the technical service responsible for the tests. |
| --- | --- |

15.1.2.

call for a new report from the technical service responsible for the tests.

15.2.   Notice of confirmation of approval with particulars of the modifications, or of refusal of approval shall be communicated to the Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation, in accordance with the procedure indicated in paragraph 13.3 above.

15.3.   The competent authority issuing the extension of approval shall assign a series number to each communication form drawn up for such an extension.

16.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2) with the following requirements:

| 16.1. | A vehicle approved under this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set forth in paragraph 14 above. |
| --- | --- |

16.1.

A vehicle approved under this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set forth in paragraph 14 above.

| 16.2. | The authority which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every 2 years. |
| --- | --- |

16.2.

The authority which has granted type approval may at any time verify the conformity control methods applied in each production facility. The normal frequency of these verifications shall be once every 2 years.

17.   PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

17.1.   The approval granted to a vehicle type pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the conditions set forth in paragraph 16.1 above are not complied with, or if the vehicle fails to pass the checks referred to in paragraph 16.2 above.

17.2.   Should a Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraw an approval which it has previously granted, it shall forthwith notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a copy of the approval form bearing at the end in large letters the statement, signed and dated: ‘APPROVAL WITHDRAWN’.

18.   NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF THE TECHNICAL SERVICES CONDUCTING APPROVAL TESTS AND OF ADMINISTRATIVE DEPARTMENTS

The Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for approval tests and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or refusal or withdrawal of approval, issued in other countries, are to be sent.

---

(1)  An AWD consisting of several sound outlets activated by a single power unit shall be regarded as an AWD.

1

(2)  As defined in the Consolidated Resolution (R.E.3).

2

(3)  An AWD consisting of several units, each emitting a sound signal and operated simultaneously by the actuation of a single control shall be regarded as an audible warning system.

3

(4)  1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 5 for Sweden, 6 for Belgium, 7 for Hungary, 8 for the Czech Republic, 9 for Spain, 10 for Yugoslavia, 11 for the United Kingdom, 12 for Austria, 13 for Luxembourg, 14 for Switzerland, 15 (vacant), 16 for Norway, 17 for Finland, 18 for Denmark, 19 for Romania, 20 for Poland, 21 for Portugal, 22 for the Russian Federation, 23 for Greece, 24 for Ireland, 25 for Croatia, 26 for Slovenia, 27 for Slovakia, 28 for Belarus, 29 for Estonia, 30 (vacant), 31 for Bosnia and Herzegovina, 32 for Latvia, 33 (vacant), 34 for Bulgaria, 35-36 (vacant), 37 for Turkey, 38-39 (vacant), 40 for The former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, 41 (vacant), 42 for the European Community (Approvals are granted by its Member States using their respective ECE symbol), 43 for Japan, 44 (vacant), 45 for Australia, 46 for Ukraine and 47 for South Africa. Subsequent numbers shall be assigned to other countries in the chronological order in which they ratify or accede to the Agreement Concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions, and the numbers thus assigned shall be communicated by the Secretary-General of the United Nations to the Contracting Parties to the Agreement.

4

(5)  The site may take the form, for instance, of an open space of 50 metres radius, the central part of which must be practically horizontal over a radius of at least 20 metres, the surface being of concrete, asphalt or a similar material, which must not be covered with powdery snow, tall weeds, or loose soil or cinders. The measurements shall be made on a clear day. No-one other than the observer reading the instrument shall remain near the audible warning device or the microphone, since the presence of spectators may affect the readings of the instrument to a considerable extent, if they are near the audible warning device or the microphone. Any peak which appears to be unrelated to the general sound level shall be disregarded in the reading.

5

---

ANNEX 1

COMMUNICATION

(Maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

Image 11

issued by:

Name of administration

concerning the approval (or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued or extension of approval) of a type of audible warning device for motor vehicles pursuant to Regulation No 28

Approval No: ...

Extension No: ...

1. Trade name or mark: ...

2. Type (electro-pneumatic, electro-magnetic with resonator disc, electromagnetic horn, etc., indicating whether it is a single-tone or multiple-tone warning device): ...

3. Manufacturer's name and address: ...

4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer’s representative: ...

5. Brief description of warning devices: ...

6. Supply voltage(s): ... volts (2)

7. Rated operating pressure(s): ... kg/cm2 (2)

8. Rated frequency (or frequencies): ... Hz (2)

9. Geometrical characteristics (internal length and diameter) of connecting line between compressor or control and the audible warning device: ...

10. Submitted for approval on: ...

11. Technical service responsible for conducting approval tests: ...

12. Date of report issued by that service: ...

13. Number of report issued by that service: ...

14. Approval granted/refused (2)

15. Place: ...

16. Date: ...

17. Signature: ...

18. A list of documents contained in the approval file transmitted to the administrative service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication.

(1) Distinguishing number of the country which has granted/extended/refused/withdrawn approval.

(2) Strike out whatever does not apply.

---

ANNEX 2

COMMUNICATION

(Maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

Image 12

issued by:

Name of administration

concerning the approval (or refusal or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued or extension of approval) of a vehicle type with regard to its audible signals pursuant to Regulation No 28

Approval No: ...

Extension No: ...

1. Trade name or mark of the vehicle: ...

2. Vehicle type: ...

3. Manufacturer's name and address: ...

4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer's representative: ...

5. Type(s) of warning device(s) (2): ...

6. Sound level values: ...

7. Submitted for approval on: ...

8. Technical service responsible for approval tests: ...

9. Date of report issued by that service: ...

10. Number of report issued by that service: ...

11. Approval granted/refused (3)

12. Place: ...

13. Date: ...

14. Signature: ...

15. A list of documents contained in the approval file transmitted to the administrative service which has granted approval is annexed to this communication.

(1) Distinguishing number of the country which has granted/extended/refused/withdrawn approval.

(2) Indicate the approval numbers.

(3) Strike out what does not apply.

---

ANNEX 3

I.   ARRANGEMENT OF THE APPROVAL MARK OF THE AUDIBLE WARNING DEVICE

(see paragraph 5.5 of this Regulation)

Image 13

The above approval mark affixed to an audible warning device shows that this AWD of Class I has been approved in the Netherlands (E 4) under approval number 002439. The first two digits of the approval number indicate that the approval was granted in accordance with the requirements of Regulation No 28 in its original form.

| Note: | The approval number must be placed close to the circle and must be in a position either above or below the letter ‘E’ or to left or right of that letter. The digits of the approval number must be on the same side of the letter ‘E’ and face in the same direction. The use of Roman numerals as approval numbers should be avoided so as to prevent any confusion with other symbols. |
| --- | --- |

Note:

II.   ARRANGEMENT OF THE APPROVAL MARK OF A VEHICLE WITH REGARD TO ITS AUDIBLE SIGNALS

(see paragraph 13.4 of this Regulation)

MODEL A

Image 14

The above approval mark affixed to a vehicle indicates that, pursuant to Regulation No 28, this vehicle type has been approved in the Netherlands (E 4), with regard to its audible signals.

MODEL B

Image 15

The above approval mark affixed to a vehicle indicates that, pursuant to Regulation Nos 24 and 28, this vehicle type has been approved in the Netherlands (E 4), with regard to its audible signals and to emissions of pollutants by the Diesel engine. In the case of the latter Regulation, the corrected value of the absorption factor is 1,30 m–1.

---

| 6.12.2011 | EN | Official Journal of the European Union | L 323/46 |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

6.12.2011

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 323/46

---

Only the original UN/ECE texts have legal effect under international public law. The status and date of entry into force of this Regulation should be checked in the latest version of the UN/ECE status document TRANS/WP.29/343, available at:

http://www.unece.org/trans/main/wp29/wp29wgs/wp29gen/wp29fdocstts.html

Regulation No 48 of the Economic Commission for Europe of the United Nations (UN/ECE) — Uniform provisions concerning the approval of vehicles with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices

Incorporating all valid text up to:

| | Supplement 6 to the 04 series of amendments — Date of entry into force: 30 January 2011 |
| --- | --- |

Supplement 6 to the 04 series of amendments — Date of entry into force: 30 January 2011

| | 05 series of amendments — Date of entry into force: 30 January 2011 |
| --- | --- |

05 series of amendments — Date of entry into force: 30 January 2011

CONTENTS

REGULATION

| 1. | Scope |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Definitions |
| --- | --- |

2.

| 3. | Application for approval |
| --- | --- |

3.

| 4. | Approval |
| --- | --- |

4.

| 5. | General specifications |
| --- | --- |

5.

| 6. | Individual specifications |
| --- | --- |

6.

| 7. | Modifications and extensions of approval of the vehicle type or of the installation of its lighting and light-signalling devices |
| --- | --- |

7.

| 8. | Conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

8.

| 9. | Penalties for non-conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

9.

| 10. | Production definitely discontinued |
| --- | --- |

10.

| 11. | Names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests, and of administrative departments |
| --- | --- |

11.

| 12. | Transitional provisions |
| --- | --- |

12.

ANNEXES

| Annex 1 — | Communication concerning the approval or refusal or extension or withdrawal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices, pursuant to Regulation No 48 |
| --- | --- |

Annex 1 —

| Annex 2 — | Arrangements of approval marks |
| --- | --- |

Annex 2 —

| Annex 3 — | Examples of lamp surfaces, axes, centres of reference, and angles of geometric visibility |
| --- | --- |

Annex 3 —

| Annex 4 — | Visibility of a red lamp to the front and visibility of a white lamp to the rear |
| --- | --- |

Annex 4 —

| Annex 5 — | States of loading to be taken into consideration in determining variations in the vertical orientation of the dipped-beam headlamp |
| --- | --- |

Annex 5 —

| Annex 6 — | Measurement of the variation of dipped-beam inclination as a function of load |
| --- | --- |

Annex 6 —

| Annex 7 — | Indication of the downward inclination of the dipped beam headlamps cut-off referred to in paragraph 6.2.6.1.1 and downward inclination of the front fog lamp cut-off referred to in paragraph 6.3.6.1.2 of this Regulation |
| --- | --- |

Annex 7 —

| Annex 8 — | The controls for the headlamp-levelling devices referred to in paragraph 6.2.6.2.2 of this Regulation |
| --- | --- |

Annex 8 —

| Annex 9 — | Control of conformity of production |
| --- | --- |

Annex 9 —

| Annex 10 — | Examples of light source options |
| --- | --- |

Annex 10 —

| Annex 11 — | Visibility of conspicuity markings to the rear, front and side of a vehicle |
| --- | --- |

Annex 11 —

| Annex 12 | |
| --- | --- |

Annex 12

1.   SCOPE

This Regulation applies to vehicles of categories M, N, and to their trailers (category O) (1) with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices.

1

2.   DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this Regulation:

2.1.   
  ‘Approval of a vehicle’ means the approval of a vehicle type with regard to the number and mode of installation of the lighting and light-signalling devices;

2.2.   
  ‘Vehicle type with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices’ means vehicles which do not differ in the essential respects mentioned in paragraphs 2.2.1 to 2.2.4.

The following are likewise considered not to be ‘vehicles of a different type’: vehicles which differ within the meaning of paragraphs 2.2.1 to 2.2.4, but not in such a way as to entail a change in the kind, number, positioning and geometric visibility of the lamps and the inclination of the dipped-beam prescribed for the vehicle type in question, and vehicles on which optional lamps are fitted or are absent:

| 2.2.1. | The dimension and the external shape of the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.1.

The dimension and the external shape of the vehicle;

| 2.2.2. | The number and positioning of the devices; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.

The number and positioning of the devices;

| 2.2.3. | The headlamp-levelling system; |
| --- | --- |

2.2.3.

The headlamp-levelling system;

| 2.2.4. | The suspension system. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.4.

The suspension system.

2.3.   
  ‘Transverse plane’ means a vertical plane perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle;

2.4.   
  ‘Unladen vehicle’ means a vehicle without driver, crew, passengers and load, but with a full supply of fuel, spare wheel and the tools normally carried;

2.5.   
  ‘Laden vehicle’ means a vehicle loaded to its technically permissible maximum mass, as stated by the manufacturer, who shall also fix the distribution of this mass between the axles in accordance with the method described in Annex 5;

2.6.   
  ‘Device’ means an element or an assembly of elements used to perform one or more functions;

2.6.1.   
  ‘Lighting function’ means the light emitted by a device to illuminate the road and objects in the direction of vehicle movement;

2.6.2.   
  ‘Light-signalling function’ means the light emitted or reflected by a device to give to other road users visual information on the presence, identification and/or the change of movement of the vehicle;

2.7.   
  ‘Lamp’ means a device designed to illuminate the road or to emit a light signal to other road users. Rear registration plate lamps and retro-reflectors are likewise to be regarded as lamps. For the purpose of this Regulation, light-emitting rear registration plates and the service-door-lighting system according to the provisions of Regulation No 107 on vehicles of categories M2 and M3 are not considered as lamps;

2

3

2.7.1.   Light source (2)

2

| 2.7.1.1. | ‘Light source’ means one or more elements for visible radiation, which may be assembled with one or more transparent envelopes and with a base for mechanical and electrical connection.
  A light source may also be constituted by the extreme outlet of a light-guide, as part of a distributed lighting or light-signalling system not having a built-in outer lens;






  2.7.1.1.1. | ‘Replaceable light source’ means a light source which is designed to be inserted in and removed from the holder of its device without tool; |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.7.1.1.

‘Light source’ means one or more elements for visible radiation, which may be assembled with one or more transparent envelopes and with a base for mechanical and electrical connection.

A light source may also be constituted by the extreme outlet of a light-guide, as part of a distributed lighting or light-signalling system not having a built-in outer lens;

2.7.1.1.1.

‘Replaceable light source’ means a light source which is designed to be inserted in and removed from the holder of its device without tool;

| 2.7.1.1.2. | ‘Non-replaceable light source’ means a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the device to which this light source is fixed;






  (a) | In case of a light source module: a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the light source module to which this light source is fixed; |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.7.1.1.2.

‘Non-replaceable light source’ means a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the device to which this light source is fixed;

(a)

In case of a light source module: a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the light source module to which this light source is fixed;

| (b) | In case of adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS): a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the lighting unit to which this light source is fixed; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

In case of adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS): a light source which can only be replaced by replacement of the lighting unit to which this light source is fixed;

| 2.7.1.1.3. | ‘Light source module’ means an optical part of a device which is specific to that device, is containing one or more non-replaceable light sources, and is only removable from its device with the use of tool(s). A light source module is so designed that regardless the use of tool(s), it is not mechanically interchangeable with any replaceable approved light source; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.1.1.3.

‘Light source module’ means an optical part of a device which is specific to that device, is containing one or more non-replaceable light sources, and is only removable from its device with the use of tool(s). A light source module is so designed that regardless the use of tool(s), it is not mechanically interchangeable with any replaceable approved light source;

| 2.7.1.1.4. | ‘Filament light source’ (filament lamp) means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more heated filaments producing thermal radiation; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.1.1.4.

‘Filament light source’ (filament lamp) means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more heated filaments producing thermal radiation;

| 2.7.1.1.5. | ‘Gas-discharge light source’ means a light source where the element for visible radiation is a discharge arc producing electro-luminescence/fluorescence; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.1.1.5.

‘Gas-discharge light source’ means a light source where the element for visible radiation is a discharge arc producing electro-luminescence/fluorescence;

| 2.7.1.1.6. | ‘Light-emitting diode (LED) light source’ means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more solid state junctions producing injection-luminescence/fluorescence; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.1.1.6.

‘Light-emitting diode (LED) light source’ means a light source where the element for visible radiation is one or more solid state junctions producing injection-luminescence/fluorescence;

| 2.7.1.1.7. | ‘LED module’ means a light source module containing as light sources only LEDs; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.1.1.7.

‘LED module’ means a light source module containing as light sources only LEDs;

| 2.7.1.2. | ‘Electronic light source control gear’ means one or more components between supply and light source to control voltage and/or electrical current of the light source;






  2.7.1.2.1. | ‘Ballast’ means an electronic light source control gear between supply and light source to stabilise the electrical current of a gas-discharge light source; |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.7.1.2.

‘Electronic light source control gear’ means one or more components between supply and light source to control voltage and/or electrical current of the light source;

2.7.1.2.1.

‘Ballast’ means an electronic light source control gear between supply and light source to stabilise the electrical current of a gas-discharge light source;

| 2.7.1.2.2. | ‘Ignitor’ means an electronic light source control gear to start the arc of a gas-discharge light source; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.1.2.2.

‘Ignitor’ means an electronic light source control gear to start the arc of a gas-discharge light source;

| 2.7.1.3. | ‘Variable intensity control’ means the device which automatically controls rear light signalling devices producing variable luminous intensities to assure the unvarying perception of their signals. The variable intensity control is part of the lamp, or part of the vehicle, or split between the said lamp and the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.1.3.

‘Variable intensity control’ means the device which automatically controls rear light signalling devices producing variable luminous intensities to assure the unvarying perception of their signals. The variable intensity control is part of the lamp, or part of the vehicle, or split between the said lamp and the vehicle;

2.7.2.   
  ‘Equivalent lamps’ means lamps having the same function and authorised in the country in which the vehicle is registered; such lamps may have different characteristics from those installed on the vehicle when it is approved on condition that they satisfy the requirements of this Regulation;

2.7.3.   
  ‘Independent lamps’ means devices having separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis (3), separate light sources and separate lamp bodies;

3

2.7.4.   
  ‘Grouped lamps’ means devices having separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis (3) and separate light sources, but a common lamp body;

3

2.7.5.   
  ‘Combined lamps’ means devices having separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis (3), but a common light source and a common lamp body;

3

2.7.6.   
  ‘Reciprocally incorporated lamps’ means devices having separate light sources or a single light source operating under different conditions (for example, optical, mechanical, electrical differences), totally or partially common apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis (3) and a common lamp body (4);

3

4

2.7.7.   
  ‘Single-function lamp’ means a part of a device which performs a single lighting or light-signalling function;

2.7.8.   
  ‘Concealable lamp’ means a lamp capable of being partly or completely hidden when not in use. This result may be achieved by means of a movable cover, by displacement of the lamp or by any other suitable means. The term ‘retractable’ is used more particularly to describe a concealable lamp the displacement of which enables it to be inserted within the bodywork;

2.7.9.   
  ‘Driving beam (main-beam) headlamp’ means the lamp used to illuminate the road over a long distance ahead of the vehicle;

2.7.10.   
  ‘Passing beam (dipped-beam) headlamp’ means the lamp used to illuminate the road ahead of the vehicle without causing undue dazzle or discomfort to oncoming drivers and other road-users;

| 2.7.10.1. | ‘Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)’ means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitter and/or additional light sources for bend lighting; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.10.1.

‘Principal passing beam (principal dipped beam)’ means the dipped beam produced without the contribution of infrared (IR) emitter and/or additional light sources for bend lighting;

2.7.11.   
  ‘Direction-indicator lamp’ means the lamp used to indicate to other road-users that the driver intends to change direction to the right or to the left;

A direction-indicator lamp or lamps may also be used according to the provisions of Regulation No 97;

2.7.12.   
  ‘Stop lamp’ means a lamp used to indicate to other road users to the rear of the vehicle that the longitudinal movement of the vehicle is intentionally retarded;

2.7.13.   
  ‘Rear-registration plate illuminating device’ means the device used to illuminate the space reserved for the rear registration plate; such a device may consist of several optical components;

2.7.14.   
  ‘Front position lamp’ means the lamp used to indicate the presence and the width of the vehicle when viewed from the front;

2.7.15.   
  ‘Rear position lamp’ means the lamp used to indicate the presence and width of the vehicle when viewed from the rear;

2.7.16.   
  ‘Retro-reflector’ means a device used to indicate the presence of a vehicle by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source.

For the purposes of this Regulation the following are not considered as retro-reflectors:

| 2.7.16.1. | Retro-reflecting number plates; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.16.1.

Retro-reflecting number plates;

| 2.7.16.2. | The retro-reflecting signals mentioned in the ADR (European Agreement concerning the international carriage of dangerous goods by road); |
| --- | --- |

2.7.16.2.

The retro-reflecting signals mentioned in the ADR (European Agreement concerning the international carriage of dangerous goods by road);

| 2.7.16.3. | Other retro-reflective plates and signals which shall be used to comply with national requirements for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.16.3.

Other retro-reflective plates and signals which shall be used to comply with national requirements for use as regards certain categories of vehicles or certain methods of operation;

| 2.7.16.4. | Retro-Reflecting materials approved as Class D or E according to Regulation No 104 and used for other purposes in compliance with national requirements, e.g. advertising; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.16.4.

Retro-Reflecting materials approved as Class D or E according to Regulation No 104 and used for other purposes in compliance with national requirements, e.g. advertising;

2.7.17.   
  ‘Conspicuity marking’ means a device intended to increase the conspicuity of a vehicle, when viewed from the side or rear (or in the case of trailers, additionally from the front), by the reflection of light emanating from a light source not connected to the vehicle, the observer being situated near the source;

| 2.7.17.1. | ‘Contour marking’ means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal and vertical dimensions (length, width and height) of a vehicle;






  2.7.17.1.1. | ‘Full contour marking’ means a contour marking that indicates the outline of the vehicle by a continuous line; |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.7.17.1.

‘Contour marking’ means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal and vertical dimensions (length, width and height) of a vehicle;

2.7.17.1.1.

‘Full contour marking’ means a contour marking that indicates the outline of the vehicle by a continuous line;

| 2.7.17.1.2. | ‘Partial contour marking’ means a contour marking that indicates the horizontal dimension of the vehicle by a continuous line, and the vertical dimension by marking the upper corners; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.17.1.2.

‘Partial contour marking’ means a contour marking that indicates the horizontal dimension of the vehicle by a continuous line, and the vertical dimension by marking the upper corners;

| 2.7.17.2. | ‘Line marking’ means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal dimensions (length and width) of a vehicle by a continuous line; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.17.2.

‘Line marking’ means a conspicuity marking intended to indicate the horizontal dimensions (length and width) of a vehicle by a continuous line;

2.7.18.   
  ‘Hazard warning signal’ means the simultaneous operation of all of a vehicle's direction-indicator lamps to show that the vehicle temporarily constitutes a special danger to other road-users;

2.7.19.   
  ‘Front fog lamp’ means a lamp used to improve the illumination of the road ahead of the vehicle in case of fog or any similar condition of reduced visibility;

2.7.20.   
  ‘Rear fog lamp’ means a lamp used to make the vehicle more easily visible from the rear in dense fog;

2.7.21.   
  ‘Reversing lamp’ means the lamp used to illuminate the road to the rear of the vehicle and to warn other road-users that the vehicle is reversing or about to reverse;

2.7.22.   
  ‘Parking lamp’ means a lamp which is used to draw attention to the presence of a stationary vehicle in a built-up area. In such circumstances it replaces the front and rear position lamps;

2.7.23.   
  ‘End-outline marker lamp’ means the lamp fitted near to the extreme outer edge and as close as possible to the top of the vehicle and intended to indicate clearly the vehicle's overall width. This lamp is intended, for certain vehicles and trailers, to complement the vehicle's front and rear position lamps by drawing particular attention to its bulk;

2.7.24.   
  ‘Side marker lamp’ means a lamp used to indicate the presence of the vehicle when viewed from the side;

2.7.25.   
  ‘Daytime running lamp’ means a lamp facing in a forward direction used to make the vehicle more easily visible when driving during daytime;

2.7.26.   
  ‘Cornering lamp’ means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination of that part of the road which is located near the forward corner of the vehicle at the side towards which the vehicle is going to turn;

2.7.27.   
  ‘Objective luminous flux’ means a design value of the luminous flux of a replaceable light source or light source module. It shall be achieved, within the specified tolerances, when the replaceable light source or light source module is energised by the power supply at the specified test voltage, as indicated in the data sheet of the light source or the technical specification as submitted with the light source module;

2.7.28.   
  ‘Adaptive front lighting system’ (or ‘AFS’) means a lighting device type-approved according to Regulation No 123, providing beams with differing characteristics for automatic adaptation to varying conditions of use of the dipped-beam (passing beam) and, if it applies, the main-beam (driving-beam);

| 2.7.28.1. | ‘Lighting unit’ means a light-emitting component designed to provide or contribute to one or more front lighting function(s) provided by the AFS; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.28.1.

‘Lighting unit’ means a light-emitting component designed to provide or contribute to one or more front lighting function(s) provided by the AFS;

| 2.7.28.2. | ‘Installation unit’ means an indivisible housing (lamp body) which contains one or more lighting unit(s); |
| --- | --- |

2.7.28.2.

‘Installation unit’ means an indivisible housing (lamp body) which contains one or more lighting unit(s);

| 2.7.28.3. | ‘Lighting mode’ or ‘mode’ means a state of a front lighting function provided by the AFS, as specified by the manufacturer and intended for adaptation to specific vehicle and ambient conditions; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.28.3.

‘Lighting mode’ or ‘mode’ means a state of a front lighting function provided by the AFS, as specified by the manufacturer and intended for adaptation to specific vehicle and ambient conditions;

| 2.7.28.4. | ‘System control’ means that part(s) of the AFS receiving the AFS control signals from the vehicle and controlling the operation of the lighting units automatically; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.28.4.

‘System control’ means that part(s) of the AFS receiving the AFS control signals from the vehicle and controlling the operation of the lighting units automatically;

| 2.7.28.5. | ‘AFS control signal’ (V, E, W, T) means the input to the AFS in accordance with the paragraph 6.22.7.4 of this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.28.5.

‘AFS control signal’ (V, E, W, T) means the input to the AFS in accordance with the paragraph 6.22.7.4 of this Regulation;

| 2.7.28.6. | ‘Neutral state’ means the state of the AFS when a defined mode of the class C passing beam (‘basic passing beam’) or of the main beam, if any, is produced, and no AFS control signal applies; |
| --- | --- |

2.7.28.6.

‘Neutral state’ means the state of the AFS when a defined mode of the class C passing beam (‘basic passing beam’) or of the main beam, if any, is produced, and no AFS control signal applies;

2.7.29.   
  ‘Exterior Courtesy lamp’ means a lamp used to provide supplementary illumination to assist the entry and exit of the vehicle driver and passenger or in loading operations;

2.7.30.   
  ‘Interdependent lamp system’ means an assembly of two or three interdependent lamps providing the same function;

| 2.7.30.1. | ‘Interdependent lamp’ means a device operating as part of an interdependent lamp system. Interdependent lamps operate together when activated, have separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis and separate lamp bodies, and may have separate light source(s); |
| --- | --- |

2.7.30.1.

‘Interdependent lamp’ means a device operating as part of an interdependent lamp system. Interdependent lamps operate together when activated, have separate apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis and separate lamp bodies, and may have separate light source(s);

2.8.   
  ‘Light-emitting surface’ of a ‘lighting device’, ‘light-signalling device’ or a retro-reflector means the surface as declared in the request for approval by the manufacturer of the device on the drawing, see Annex 3 (see, e.g. Parts 1 and 4);

This shall be declared according to one of the following conditions:

| (a) | in the case where the outer lens is textured, the declared light-emitting surface shall be all or part of the exterior surface of the outer lens; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

in the case where the outer lens is textured, the declared light-emitting surface shall be all or part of the exterior surface of the outer lens;

| (b) | in the case where the outer lens is non-textured the outer lens may be disregarded and the light-emitting surface shall be as declared on the drawing, Annex 3 (see, e.g. Part 5); |
| --- | --- |

(b)

in the case where the outer lens is non-textured the outer lens may be disregarded and the light-emitting surface shall be as declared on the drawing, Annex 3 (see, e.g. Part 5);

2.8.1.   
  ‘Textured outer lens’ or ‘Textured outer lens area’ means all or part of an outer lens, designed to modify or influence the propagation of light from the light source(s), such that the light rays are significantly diverted from their original direction;

2.9.   
  ‘Illuminating surface’ (see Annex 3);

2.9.1.   
  ‘Illuminating surface of a lighting device’ (paragraphs 2.7.9, 2.7.10, 2.7.19, 2.7.21 and 2.7.26) means the orthogonal projection of the full aperture of the reflector, or in the case of headlamps with an ellipsoidal reflector of the ‘projection lens’, on a transverse plane. If the lighting device has no reflector, the definition of paragraph 2.9.2 shall be applied. If the light-emitting surface of the lamp extends over part only of the full aperture of the reflector, then the projection of that part only is taken into account.

In the case of a dipped-beam headlamp, the illuminating surface is limited by the apparent trace of the cut-off on to the lens. If the reflector and lens are adjustable relative to one another, the mean adjustment should be used;

In the case of AFS being installed: where a lighting function is produced by two or more simultaneously operated lighting units on a given side of the vehicle, the individual illuminating surfaces, taken together, constitute the illuminating surface to be considered (for example, in the figure of paragraph 6.22.4 below, the individual illuminating surfaces of the lighting units 8, 9 and 11, regarded together and taking into account their respective location, constitute the illuminating surface to be considered for the right hand side of the vehicle);

2.9.2.   
  ‘Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector’ (paragraphs 2.7.11 to 2.7.15, 2.7.18, 2.7.20 and 2.7.22 to 2.7.25) means the orthogonal projection of the lamp in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and in contact with the exterior light-emitting surface of the lamp, this projection being bounded by the edges of screens situated in this plane, each allowing only 98 per cent of the total luminous intensity of the light to persist in the direction of the axis of reference.

To determine the lower, upper and lateral limits of the illuminating surface only screens with horizontal or vertical edges shall be used to verify the distance to the extreme edges of the vehicle and the height above the ground.

For other applications of the illuminating surface, e.g. distance between two lamps or functions, the shape of the periphery of this illuminating surface shall be used. The screens shall remain parallel, but other orientations are allowed to be used.

In the case of a light-signalling device whose illuminating surface encloses either totally or partially the illuminating surface of another function or encloses a non-lighted surface, the illuminating surface may be considered to be the light-emitting surface itself (see, e.g. Annex 3, Parts 2, 3, 5 and 6);

2.9.3.   
  ‘Illuminating surface of a retro-reflector’ (paragraph 2.7.16) means, as declared by the applicant during the component approval procedure for the retro-reflectors, the orthogonal projection of a retro-reflector in a plane perpendicular to its axis of reference and delimited by planes contiguous to the declared outermost parts of the retro-reflectors’ optical system and parallel to that axis. For the purposes of determining the lower, upper and lateral edges of the device, only horizontal and vertical planes shall be considered;

2.10.   The ‘apparent surface’ for a defined direction of observation means, at the request of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, the orthogonal projection of:

| | either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens; |
| --- | --- |

either the boundary of the illuminating surface projected on the exterior surface of the lens;

| | or the light-emitting surface; |
| --- | --- |

or the light-emitting surface;

| | in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens. Different examples of the application of apparent surface can be found in Annex 3 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

in a plane perpendicular to the direction of observation and tangential to the most exterior point of the lens. Different examples of the application of apparent surface can be found in Annex 3 to this Regulation.

Only in the case of a light-signalling device producing variable luminous intensities, its apparent surface that may be variable as specified in paragraph 2.7.1.3 shall be considered under all conditions permitted by the variable intensity control, if applicable;

2.11.   
  ‘Axis of reference’ (or ‘reference axis’) means the characteristic axis of the lamp determined by the manufacturer (of the lamp) for use as the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = 0°) for angles of field for photometric measurements and for installing the lamp on the vehicle;

2.12.   
  ‘Centre of reference’ means the intersection of the axis of reference with the exterior light-emitting surface; it is specified by the manufacturer of the lamp;

2.13.   
  ‘Angles of geometric visibility’ means the angles which determine the field of the minimum solid angle in which the apparent surface of the lamp is visible. That field of the solid angle is determined by the segments of the sphere of which the centre coincides with the centre of reference of the lamp and the equator is parallel with the ground. These segments are determined in relation to the axis of reference. The horizontal angles ß correspond to the longitude and the vertical angles α to the latitude.

If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation shall be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.

On the inside of the angles of geometric visibility no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type-approved.

If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device as an optical unit (see Annex 3 to this Regulation). Nevertheless, when the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal;

2.14.   
  ‘Extreme outer edge’ on either side of the vehicle, means the plane parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching its lateral outer edge, disregarding the projection:

| 2.14.1. | Of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and of connections for tyre-pressure gauges; |
| --- | --- |

2.14.1.

Of tyres near their point of contact with the ground, and of connections for tyre-pressure gauges;

| 2.14.2. | Of any anti-skid devices mounted on the wheels; |
| --- | --- |

2.14.2.

Of any anti-skid devices mounted on the wheels;

| 2.14.3. | Of devices for indirect vision; |
| --- | --- |

2.14.3.

Of devices for indirect vision;

| 2.14.4. | Of side direction-indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position lamps, parking lamps, retro-reflectors and side-marker lamps. |
| --- | --- |

2.14.4.

Of side direction-indicator lamps, end-outline marker lamps, front and rear position lamps, parking lamps, retro-reflectors and side-marker lamps.

| 2.14.5. | Of customs seals affixed to the vehicle, and of devices for securing and protecting such seals. |
| --- | --- |

2.14.5.

Of customs seals affixed to the vehicle, and of devices for securing and protecting such seals.

| 2.14.6. | Of service-door lighting systems on vehicles of categories M2 and M3 as specified in paragraph 2.7; |
| --- | --- |

2.14.6.

Of service-door lighting systems on vehicles of categories M2 and M3 as specified in paragraph 2.7;

2

3

2.15.   
  ‘Overall dimensions’ means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.14 above;

2.15.1.   
  ‘Overall width’ means the distance between the two vertical planes defined in paragraph 2.14 above;

2.15.2.   
  ‘Overall length’ means the distance between the two vertical planes perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle and touching its front and rear outer edge, disregarding the projection:

| (a) | of devices for indirect vision; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

of devices for indirect vision;

| (b) | of end-outline marker lamps; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

of end-outline marker lamps;

| (c) | of coupling devices, in the case of motor vehicles. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

of coupling devices, in the case of motor vehicles.

For trailers in the ‘overall length’ and in any measurement in length the drawbar shall be included, except when specifically excluded;

2.16.   ‘Single and multiple lamps’

2.16.1.   
  ‘A single lamp’ means:

| (a) | a device or part of a device having one lighting or light-signalling function, one or more light source(s) and one apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis, which may be a continuous surface or composed of two or more distinct parts; or |
| --- | --- |

(a)

a device or part of a device having one lighting or light-signalling function, one or more light source(s) and one apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis, which may be a continuous surface or composed of two or more distinct parts; or

| (b) | any assembly of two independent lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function, both approved as type ‘D’ lamp and installed so that:






  (i) | the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less than 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis; or |
| --- | --- | --- |

(b)

any assembly of two independent lamps, whether identical or not, having the same function, both approved as type ‘D’ lamp and installed so that:

(i)

the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less than 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis; or

| (ii) | the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts does not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis; or |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts does not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis; or

| (c) | any assembly of two independent retro-reflectors, whether identical or not, that have been approved separately and are installed in such a way that:






  (i) | the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis; or |
| --- | --- | --- |

(c)

any assembly of two independent retro-reflectors, whether identical or not, that have been approved separately and are installed in such a way that:

(i)

the projection of their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis occupies not less 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the projections of the said apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis; or

| (ii) | the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts does not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis; or |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts does not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis; or

| (d) | any interdependent lamp system composed of two or three interdependent lamps providing the same function, approved together as type ‘Y’ and installed so that the distance between adjacent apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis does not exceed 75 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis; |
| --- | --- |

(d)

any interdependent lamp system composed of two or three interdependent lamps providing the same function, approved together as type ‘Y’ and installed so that the distance between adjacent apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis does not exceed 75 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis;

2.16.2.   
  ‘Two lamps’ or ‘an even number of lamps’, means a single light-emitting surface in the shape of a band or strip if such band or strip is placed symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle, extends on both sides to within at least 0,4 m of the extreme outer edge of the vehicle, and is not less than 0,8 m long; the illumination of such surface shall be provided by not less than two light sources placed as close as possible to its ends; the light-emitting surface may be constituted by a number of juxtaposed elements on condition that the projections of the several individual light-emitting surfaces on a transverse plane occupy not less than 60 per cent of the area of the smallest rectangle circumscribing the projections of the said individual light-emitting surfaces;

2.17.   
  ‘Distance between two lamps’ which face in the same direction means the shortest distance between the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis. Where the distance between the lamps clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of apparent surfaces need not be determined;

2.18.   
  ‘Operating tell-tale’ means a visual or auditory signal (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on and is operating correctly or not;

2.19.   
  ‘Closed-circuit tell-tale’ means a visual (or any equivalent signal) indicating that a device has been switched on, but not indicating whether it is operating correctly or not;

2.20.   
  ‘Optional lamp’ means a lamp, the installation of which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer;

2.21.   
  ‘Ground’ means the surface on which the vehicle stands which should be substantially horizontal;

2.22.   
  ‘Movable components’ of the vehicle mean those body panels or other vehicle parts the position(s) of which can be changed by tilting, rotating or sliding without the use of tools. They do not include tiltable driver cabs of trucks;

2.23.   
  ‘Normal position of use of a movable component’ means the position(s) of a movable component specified by the vehicle manufacturer for the normal condition of use and the park condition of the vehicle;

2.24.   
  ‘Normal condition of use of a vehicle’ means:

| 2.24.1. | For a motor vehicle, when the vehicle is ready to move with its propulsion engine running and its movable components in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23; |
| --- | --- |

2.24.1.

For a motor vehicle, when the vehicle is ready to move with its propulsion engine running and its movable components in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23;

| 2.24.2. | And for a trailer, when the trailer is connected to a drawing motor vehicle in the conditions as prescribed in paragraph 2.24.1 and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23. |
| --- | --- |

2.24.2.

And for a trailer, when the trailer is connected to a drawing motor vehicle in the conditions as prescribed in paragraph 2.24.1 and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23.

2.25.   
  ‘Park condition of a vehicle’ means:

| 2.25.1. | For a motor vehicle, when the vehicle is at standstill and its propulsion engine is not running and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23; |
| --- | --- |

2.25.1.

For a motor vehicle, when the vehicle is at standstill and its propulsion engine is not running and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23;

| 2.25.2. | And for a trailer, when the trailer is connected to a drawing motor vehicle in the condition as described in paragraph 2.25.1 and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23; |
| --- | --- |

2.25.2.

And for a trailer, when the trailer is connected to a drawing motor vehicle in the condition as described in paragraph 2.25.1 and its movable components are in the normal position(s) as defined in paragraph 2.23;

2.26.   
  ‘Bend lighting’ means a lighting function to provide enhanced illumination in bends;

2.27.   
  ‘Pair’ means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle;

2.27.1.   
  ‘Matched pair’ means the set of lamps of the same function on the left- and right-hand side of the vehicle, which, as a pair, complies with the photometric requirements.

2.28.   
  ‘Emergency stop signal’ means a signal to indicate to other road users to the rear of the vehicle that a high retardation force has been applied to the vehicle relative to the prevailing road conditions.

2.29.   Colour of the light emitted from a device

2.29.1.   
  ‘White’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| W12 | green boundary: | y = 0,150 + 0,640 x |
| --- | --- | --- |
| W23 | yellowish green boundary: | y = 0,440 |
| W34 | yellow boundary: | x = 0,500 |
| W45 | reddish purple boundary: | y = 0,382 |
| W56 | purple boundary: | y = 0,050 + 0,750 x |
| W61 | blue boundary: | x = 0,310 |

W12

12

green boundary:

y = 0,150 + 0,640 x

W23

23

yellowish green boundary:

y = 0,440

W34

34

yellow boundary:

x = 0,500

W45

45

reddish purple boundary:

y = 0,382

W56

56

purple boundary:

y = 0,050 + 0,750 x

W61

61

blue boundary:

x = 0,310

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| W1 | 0,310 | 0,348 |
| W2 | 0,453 | 0,440 |
| W3 | 0,500 | 0,440 |
| W4 | 0,500 | 0,382 |
| W5 | 0,443 | 0,382 |
| W6 | 0,310 | 0,283 |

x

y

W1

1

0,310

0,348

W2

2

0,453

0,440

W3

3

0,500

0,440

W4

4

0,500

0,382

W5

5

0,443

0,382

W6

6

0,310

0,283

2.29.2.   
  ‘Selective-yellow’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| SY12 | green boundary: | y = 1,290 x – 0,100 |
| --- | --- | --- |
| SY23 | the spectral locus | |
| SY34 | red boundary: | y = 0,138 + 0,580 x |
| SY45 | yellowish white boundary: | y = 0,440 |
| SY51 | white boundary: | y = 0,940 – x |

SY12

12

green boundary:

y = 1,290 x – 0,100

SY23

23

the spectral locus

SY34

34

red boundary:

y = 0,138 + 0,580 x

SY45

45

yellowish white boundary:

y = 0,440

SY51

51

white boundary:

y = 0,940 – x

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| SY1 | 0,454 | 0,486 |
| SY2 | 0,480 | 0,519 |
| SY3 | 0,545 | 0,454 |
| SY4 | 0,521 | 0,440 |
| SY5 | 0,500 | 0,440 |

x

y

SY1

1

0,454

0,486

SY2

2

0,480

0,519

SY3

3

0,545

0,454

SY4

4

0,521

0,440

SY5

5

0,500

0,440

2.29.3.   
  ‘Amber’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| A12 | green boundary: | y = x – 0,120 |
| --- | --- | --- |
| A23 | the spectral locus | |
| A34 | red boundary: | y = 0,390 |
| A41 | white boundary: | y = 0,790 – 0,670 x |

A12

12

green boundary:

y = x – 0,120

A23

23

the spectral locus

A34

34

red boundary:

y = 0,390

A41

41

white boundary:

y = 0,790 – 0,670 x

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| A1 | 0,545 | 0,425 |
| A2 | 0,560 | 0,440 |
| A3 | 0,609 | 0,390 |
| A4 | 0,597 | 0,390 |

x

y

A1

1

0,545

0,425

A2

2

0,560

0,440

A3

3

0,609

0,390

A4

4

0,597

0,390

2.29.4.   
  ‘Red’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light emitted that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| R12 | yellow boundary: | y = 0,335 |
| --- | --- | --- |
| R23 | the spectral locus | |
| R34 | the purple line: | (its linear extension across the purple range of colours between the red and the blue extremities of the spectral locus) |
| R41 | purple boundary: | y = 0,980 – x |

R12

12

yellow boundary:

y = 0,335

R23

23

the spectral locus

R34

34

the purple line:

(its linear extension across the purple range of colours between the red and the blue extremities of the spectral locus)

R41

41

purple boundary:

y = 0,980 – x

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| R1 | 0,645 | 0,335 |
| R2 | 0,665 | 0,335 |
| R3 | 0,735 | 0,265 |
| R4 | 0,721 | 0,259 |

x

y

R1

1

0,645

0,335

R2

2

0,665

0,335

R3

3

0,735

0,265

R4

4

0,721

0,259

2.30.   Night-time Colour of the light retro-reflected from a device excluding retro-reflective tires according to Regulation No 88

2.30.1.   
  ‘White’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| W12 | blue boundary: | y = 0,843 – 1,182 x |
| --- | --- | --- |
| W23 | violet boundary: | y = 0,489 x + 0,146 |
| W34 | yellow boundary: | y = 0,968 – 1,010 x |
| W41 | green boundary: | y = 1,442 x – 0,136 |

W12

12

blue boundary:

y = 0,843 – 1,182 x

W23

23

violet boundary:

y = 0,489 x + 0,146

W34

34

yellow boundary:

y = 0,968 – 1,010 x

W41

41

green boundary:

y = 1,442 x – 0,136

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| W1 | 0,373 | 0,402 |
| W2 | 0,417 | 0,350 |
| W3 | 0,548 | 0,414 |
| W4 | 0,450 | 0,513 |

x

y

W1

1

0,373

0,402

W2

2

0,417

0,350

W3

3

0,548

0,414

W4

4

0,450

0,513

2.30.2.   
  ‘Yellow’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| Y12 | green boundary: | y = x – 0,040 |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Y23 | the spectral locus | |
| Y34 | red boundary: | y = 0,200 x + 0,268 |
| Y41 | white boundary: | y = 0,970 – x |

Y12

12

green boundary:

y = x – 0,040

Y23

23

the spectral locus

Y34

34

red boundary:

y = 0,200 x + 0,268

Y41

41

white boundary:

y = 0,970 – x

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Y1 | 0,505 | 0,465 |
| Y2 | 0,520 | 0,480 |
| Y3 | 0,610 | 0,390 |
| Y4 | 0,585 | 0,385 |

x

y

Y1

1

0,505

0,465

Y2

2

0,520

0,480

Y3

3

0,610

0,390

Y4

4

0,585

0,385

2.30.3.   
  ‘Amber’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| A12 | green boundary: | y = 1,417 x – 0,347 |
| --- | --- | --- |
| A23 | the spectral locus | |
| A34 | red boundary: | y = 0,390 |
| A41 | white boundary: | y = 0,790 – 0,670 x |

A12

12

green boundary:

y = 1,417 x – 0,347

A23

23

the spectral locus

A34

34

red boundary:

y = 0,390

A41

41

white boundary:

y = 0,790 – 0,670 x

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| A1 | 0,545 | 0,425 |
| A2 | 0,557 | 0,442 |
| A3 | 0,609 | 0,390 |
| A4 | 0,597 | 0,390 |

x

y

A1

1

0,545

0,425

A2

2

0,557

0,442

A3

3

0,609

0,390

A4

4

0,597

0,390

2.30.4.   
  ‘Red’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| R12 | yellow boundary: | y = 0,335 |
| --- | --- | --- |
| R23 | the spectral locus | |
| R34 | the purple line | |
| R41 | purple boundary: | y = 0,978 – x |

R12

12

yellow boundary:

y = 0,335

R23

23

the spectral locus

R34

34

the purple line

R41

41

purple boundary:

y = 0,978 – x

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| R1 | 0,643 | 0,335 |
| R2 | 0,665 | 0,335 |
| R3 | 0,735 | 0,265 |
| R4 | 0,720 | 0,258 |

x

y

R1

1

0,643

0,335

R2

2

0,665

0,335

R3

3

0,735

0,265

R4

4

0,720

0,258

2.31.   Daytime colour of the light reflected from a device

2.31.1.   
  ‘White’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| W12 | violet boundary | y = x – 0,030 |
| --- | --- | --- |
| W23 | yellow boundary | y = 0,740 – x |
| W34 | green boundary | y = x + 0,050 |
| W41 | blue boundary | y = 0,570 – x |

W12

12

violet boundary

y = x – 0,030

W23

23

yellow boundary

y = 0,740 – x

W34

34

green boundary

y = x + 0,050

W41

41

blue boundary

y = 0,570 – x

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| W1 | 0,300 | 0,270 |
| W2 | 0,385 | 0,355 |
| W3 | 0,345 | 0,395 |
| W4 | 0,260 | 0,310 |

x

y

W1

1

0,300

0,270

W2

2

0,385

0,355

W3

3

0,345

0,395

W4

4

0,260

0,310

2.31.2.   
  ‘Yellow’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| Y12 | red boundary | y = 0,534 x + 0,163 |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Y23 | white boundary | y = 0,910 – x |
| Y34 | green boundary | y =1,342 x – 0,090 |
| Y41 | the spectral locus | |

Y12

12

red boundary

y = 0,534 x + 0,163

Y23

23

white boundary

y = 0,910 – x

Y34

34

green boundary

y =1,342 x – 0,090

Y41

41

the spectral locus

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Y1 | 0,545 | 0,454 |
| Y2 | 0,487 | 0,423 |
| Y3 | 0,427 | 0,483 |
| Y4 | 0,465 | 0,534 |

x

y

Y1

1

0,545

0,454

Y2

2

0,487

0,423

Y3

3

0,427

0,483

Y4

4

0,465

0,534

2.31.3.   
  ‘Red’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| R12 | red boundary | y = 0,346 – 0,053 x |
| --- | --- | --- |
| R23 | purple boundary | y = 0,910 – x |
| R34 | yellow boundary | y = 0,350 |
| R41 | the spectral locus | |

R12

12

red boundary

y = 0,346 – 0,053 x

R23

23

purple boundary

y = 0,910 – x

R34

34

yellow boundary

y = 0,350

R41

41

the spectral locus

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| R1 | 0,690 | 0,310 |
| R2 | 0,595 | 0,315 |
| R3 | 0,560 | 0,350 |
| R4 | 0,650 | 0,350 |

x

y

R1

1

0,690

0,310

R2

2

0,595

0,315

R3

3

0,560

0,350

R4

4

0,650

0,350

2.32.   Daytime colour of the fluorescent a device

2.32.1.   
  ‘Red’ means the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) (5) of the light reflected that lie inside the chromaticity areas defined by the boundaries:

5

| FR12 | red boundary | y = 0,346 – 0,053 x |
| --- | --- | --- |
| FR23 | purple boundary | y = 0,910 – x |
| FR34 | yellow boundary | y = 0,315 + 0,047 x |
| FR41 | the spectral locus | |

FR12

12

red boundary

y = 0,346 – 0,053 x

FR23

23

purple boundary

y = 0,910 – x

FR34

34

yellow boundary

y = 0,315 + 0,047 x

FR41

41

the spectral locus

With intersection points:

| | x | y |
| --- | --- | --- |
| FR1 | 0,690 | 0,310 |
| FR2 | 0,595 | 0,315 |
| FR3 | 0,569 | 0,341 |
| FR4 | 0,655 | 0,345 |

x

y

FR1

1

0,690

0,310

FR2

2

0,595

0,315

FR3

3

0,569

0,341

FR4

4

0,655

0,345

2.33.   
  ‘Rear-end collision alert signal (RECAS)’ means an automatic signal given by the leading vehicle to the following vehicle. It warns that the following vehicle needs to take emergency action to avoid a collision.

3.   APPLICATION FOR APPROVAL

| 3.1. | The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of its lighting and light-signalling devices shall be submitted by the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative. |
| --- | --- |

3.1.

The application for approval of a vehicle type with regard to the installation of its lighting and light-signalling devices shall be submitted by the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative.

| 3.2. | It shall be accompanied by the following documents and particulars in triplicate:






  3.2.1. | A description of the vehicle type with regard to the items mentioned in paragraphs 2.2.1 to 2.2.4 above, together with the restrictions on loading, particularly the maximum permissible load in the boot; |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.2.

It shall be accompanied by the following documents and particulars in triplicate:

3.2.1.

A description of the vehicle type with regard to the items mentioned in paragraphs 2.2.1 to 2.2.4 above, together with the restrictions on loading, particularly the maximum permissible load in the boot;

| 3.2.2. | A list of the devices prescribed by the manufacturer for the lighting and light-signalling assembly. The list may include several types of device for each operation. Each type shall be duly identified (component, type-approval mark, name of manufacturer, etc.), in addition the list may include in respect of each function the additional annotation ‘or equivalent devices’; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.2.

A list of the devices prescribed by the manufacturer for the lighting and light-signalling assembly. The list may include several types of device for each operation. Each type shall be duly identified (component, type-approval mark, name of manufacturer, etc.), in addition the list may include in respect of each function the additional annotation ‘or equivalent devices’;

| 3.2.3. | A layout drawing of the lighting and light-signalling equipment as a whole, showing the position of the various devices on the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.3.

A layout drawing of the lighting and light-signalling equipment as a whole, showing the position of the various devices on the vehicle;

| 3.2.4. | If necessary, in order to verify the conformity to the prescriptions of the present Regulation, layout drawing(s) for each individual lamp showing the illuminating surface as defined in paragraph 2.9, the light-emitting surface as defined in paragraph 2.8, the axis of reference as defined in paragraph 2.11 and the centre of reference as defined in paragraph 2.12. This information is not necessary in the case of the rear registration plate lamp (paragraph 2.7.13); |
| --- | --- |

3.2.4.

If necessary, in order to verify the conformity to the prescriptions of the present Regulation, layout drawing(s) for each individual lamp showing the illuminating surface as defined in paragraph 2.9, the light-emitting surface as defined in paragraph 2.8, the axis of reference as defined in paragraph 2.11 and the centre of reference as defined in paragraph 2.12. This information is not necessary in the case of the rear registration plate lamp (paragraph 2.7.13);

| 3.2.5. | The application shall include a statement of the method used for the definition of the apparent surface (see paragraph 2.10). |
| --- | --- |

3.2.5.

The application shall include a statement of the method used for the definition of the apparent surface (see paragraph 2.10).

| 3.2.6. | Where an AFS is fitted on the vehicle, the applicant shall submit a detailed description providing the following information:






  3.2.6.1. | The lighting functions and modes for which the AFS has been approved; |
| --- | --- | --- |

3.2.6.

Where an AFS is fitted on the vehicle, the applicant shall submit a detailed description providing the following information:

3.2.6.1.

The lighting functions and modes for which the AFS has been approved;

| 3.2.6.2. | The related AFS control signals and their technical characteristics as defined according to Annex 10 to Regulation No 123; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6.2.

The related AFS control signals and their technical characteristics as defined according to Annex 10 to Regulation No 123;

| 3.2.6.3. | The provisions being applied to adapt automatically the front lighting functions and modes according to paragraph 6.22.7.4 of this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6.3.

The provisions being applied to adapt automatically the front lighting functions and modes according to paragraph 6.22.7.4 of this Regulation;

| 3.2.6.4. | Special instruction, if any, for the inspection of the light sources and the visual observation of the beam; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6.4.

Special instruction, if any, for the inspection of the light sources and the visual observation of the beam;

| 3.2.6.5. | The documents according to paragraph 6.22.9.2 of this Regulation; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6.5.

The documents according to paragraph 6.22.9.2 of this Regulation;

| 3.2.6.6. | The lamps that are grouped or combined with or reciprocally incorporated in the AFS; |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6.6.

The lamps that are grouped or combined with or reciprocally incorporated in the AFS;

| 3.2.6.7. | Lighting units which are designed to comply with the requirements of paragraph 6.22.5 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.6.7.

Lighting units which are designed to comply with the requirements of paragraph 6.22.5 of this Regulation.

| 3.2.7. | For vehicles of M and N categories a description of the electric power supply conditions for the devices indicated in paragraphs 2.7.9, 2.7.10, 2.7.12, 2.7.14 and 2.7.15 above, including, if applicable, information on a special power supply/electronic light source control gear, or variable intensity control. |
| --- | --- |

3.2.7.

For vehicles of M and N categories a description of the electric power supply conditions for the devices indicated in paragraphs 2.7.9, 2.7.10, 2.7.12, 2.7.14 and 2.7.15 above, including, if applicable, information on a special power supply/electronic light source control gear, or variable intensity control.

| 3.3. | An unladen vehicle fitted with a complete set of lighting and light-signalling equipment, as prescribed in paragraph 3.2.2 above, and representative of the vehicle type to be approved shall be submitted to the technical service responsible for conducting approval tests. |
| --- | --- |

3.3.

An unladen vehicle fitted with a complete set of lighting and light-signalling equipment, as prescribed in paragraph 3.2.2 above, and representative of the vehicle type to be approved shall be submitted to the technical service responsible for conducting approval tests.

| 3.4. | The document provided in Annex 1 to this Regulation shall be attached to the type-approval documentation. |
| --- | --- |

3.4.

The document provided in Annex 1 to this Regulation shall be attached to the type-approval documentation.

4.   APPROVAL

| 4.1. | If the vehicle type submitted for approval pursuant to this Regulation meets the requirements of the Regulation in respect of all the devices specified in the list, approval of that vehicle type shall be granted. |
| --- | --- |

4.1.

If the vehicle type submitted for approval pursuant to this Regulation meets the requirements of the Regulation in respect of all the devices specified in the list, approval of that vehicle type shall be granted.

| 4.2. | An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 05, corresponding to the 05 series of amendments) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party shall not assign this number to another vehicle type or to the same vehicle type submitted with equipment not specified in the list referred to in paragraph 3.2.2 above, subject to the provisions of paragraph 7 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

4.2.

An approval number shall be assigned to each type approved. Its first two digits (at present 05, corresponding to the 05 series of amendments) shall indicate the series of amendments incorporating the most recent major technical amendments made to the Regulation at the time of issue of the approval. The same Contracting Party shall not assign this number to another vehicle type or to the same vehicle type submitted with equipment not specified in the list referred to in paragraph 3.2.2 above, subject to the provisions of paragraph 7 of this Regulation.

| 4.3. | Notice of approval or of extension or refusal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a vehicle type/part pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

4.3.

Notice of approval or of extension or refusal of approval or production definitely discontinued of a vehicle type/part pursuant to this Regulation shall be communicated to the Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation, by means of a form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

| 4.4. | There shall be affixed, conspicuously and in a readily accessible place specified on the approval form, to every vehicle conforming to a vehicle type approved under this Regulation, an international approval mark consisting of:






  4.4.1. | A circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (6); |
| --- | --- | --- |

4.4.

There shall be affixed, conspicuously and in a readily accessible place specified on the approval form, to every vehicle conforming to a vehicle type approved under this Regulation, an international approval mark consisting of:

4.4.1.

A circle surrounding the letter ‘E’ followed by the distinguishing number of the country which has granted approval (6);

6

| 4.4.2. | The number of this Regulation, followed by the letter ‘R’, a dash and the approval number to the right of the circle prescribed in paragraph 4.4.1. |
| --- | --- |

4.4.2.

The number of this Regulation, followed by the letter ‘R’, a dash and the approval number to the right of the circle prescribed in paragraph 4.4.1.

| 4.5. | If the vehicle conforms to a vehicle type approved, under one or more other Regulations annexed to the Agreement, in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation, the symbol prescribed in paragraph 4.4.1 need not to be repeated, in such a case the Regulation and approval numbers and the additional symbols of all the Regulations under which approval has been granted in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation shall be placed in vertical columns to the right of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 4.4.1. |
| --- | --- |

4.5.

If the vehicle conforms to a vehicle type approved, under one or more other Regulations annexed to the Agreement, in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation, the symbol prescribed in paragraph 4.4.1 need not to be repeated, in such a case the Regulation and approval numbers and the additional symbols of all the Regulations under which approval has been granted in the country which has granted approval under this Regulation shall be placed in vertical columns to the right of the symbol prescribed in paragraph 4.4.1.

| 4.6. | The approval mark shall be clearly legible and be indelible. |
| --- | --- |

4.6.

The approval mark shall be clearly legible and be indelible.

| 4.7. | The approval mark shall be placed close to or on the vehicle data plate affixed by the manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

4.7.

The approval mark shall be placed close to or on the vehicle data plate affixed by the manufacturer.

| 4.8. | Annex 2 to this Regulation gives examples of arrangements of approval marks. |
| --- | --- |

4.8.

Annex 2 to this Regulation gives examples of arrangements of approval marks.

5.   GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

5.1.   The lighting and light-signalling devices shall be so fitted that under normal conditions of use as defined in paragraphs 2.24, 2.24.1 and 2.24.2 and notwithstanding any vibrations to which they may be subjected, they retain the characteristics prescribed by this Regulation and enable the vehicle to comply with the requirements of this Regulation. In particular, it shall not be possible for the lamps to be inadvertently maladjusted.

5.2.   The illuminating lamps described in paragraphs 2.7.9, 2.7.10 and 2.7.19 shall be so installed that correct adjustment of their orientation can easily be carried out.

| 5.2.1. | In the case of headlamps fitted with measures to prevent discomfort to other road-users in a country where traffic operates on the side of the road opposite to that of the country for which the headlamp was designed, such measures shall be achieved automatically or by the vehicle user with the vehicle in the park condition without the need for special tools (other than those provided with the vehicle (7)). Detailed instructions shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer with the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

5.2.1.

In the case of headlamps fitted with measures to prevent discomfort to other road-users in a country where traffic operates on the side of the road opposite to that of the country for which the headlamp was designed, such measures shall be achieved automatically or by the vehicle user with the vehicle in the park condition without the need for special tools (other than those provided with the vehicle (7)). Detailed instructions shall be provided by the vehicle manufacturer with the vehicle.

7

5.3.   For all light-signalling devices, including those mounted on the side panels, the reference axis of the lamp when fitted to the vehicle shall be parallel to the bearing plane of the vehicle on the road; in addition it shall be perpendicular to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle in the case of side retro-reflectors and of side-marker lamps and parallel to that plane in the case of all other signalling devices. In each direction a tolerance of ± 3° shall be allowed. In addition, any specific instructions as regards fitting laid down by the manufacturer shall be complied with.

5.4.   In the absence of specific instructions, the height and orientation of the lamps shall be verified with the vehicle unladen and placed on a flat, horizontal surface, in the condition defined in paragraphs 2.24, 2.24.1 and 2.24.2 and, in the case where an AFS is installed, with the system in its neutral state.

5.5.   In the absence of specific instructions lamps constituting a pair shall:

| 5.5.1. | Be fitted to the vehicle symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane (this estimate to be based on the exterior geometrical form of the lamp and not on the edge of its illuminating surface referred to in paragraph 2.9); |
| --- | --- |

5.5.1.

Be fitted to the vehicle symmetrically in relation to the median longitudinal plane (this estimate to be based on the exterior geometrical form of the lamp and not on the edge of its illuminating surface referred to in paragraph 2.9);

| 5.5.2. | Be symmetrical to one another in relation to the median longitudinal plane, this requirement is not valid with regard to the interior structure of the lamp; |
| --- | --- |

5.5.2.

Be symmetrical to one another in relation to the median longitudinal plane, this requirement is not valid with regard to the interior structure of the lamp;

| 5.5.3. | Satisfy the same colorimetric requirements and have substantially identical photometric characteristics. This shall not apply to a matched pair of Class F3 front fog lamps; |
| --- | --- |

5.5.3.

Satisfy the same colorimetric requirements and have substantially identical photometric characteristics. This shall not apply to a matched pair of Class F3 front fog lamps;

| 5.5.4. | Have substantially identical photometric characteristics. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.4.

Have substantially identical photometric characteristics.

5.6.   On vehicles whose external shape is asymmetrical the above requirements shall be satisfied so far as is possible.

5.7.   Grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated lamps

| 5.7.1. | Lamps may be grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated with one another provided that all requirements regarding colour, position, orientation, geometric visibility, electrical connections and other requirements, if any, are fulfilled.






  5.7.1.1. | The photometric and colorimetric requirements of a lamp shall be fulfilled when all other functions with which this lamp is grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated are switched OFF.
  However, when a front or rear position lamp is reciprocally incorporated with one or more other function(s) which can be activated together with them, the requirements regarding colour of each of these other functions shall be fulfilled when the reciprocally incorporated function(s) and the front or rear position lamps are switched ON. |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.7.1.

Lamps may be grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated with one another provided that all requirements regarding colour, position, orientation, geometric visibility, electrical connections and other requirements, if any, are fulfilled.

5.7.1.1.

The photometric and colorimetric requirements of a lamp shall be fulfilled when all other functions with which this lamp is grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated are switched OFF.

However, when a front or rear position lamp is reciprocally incorporated with one or more other function(s) which can be activated together with them, the requirements regarding colour of each of these other functions shall be fulfilled when the reciprocally incorporated function(s) and the front or rear position lamps are switched ON.

| 5.7.1.2. | Stop lamps and direction-indicator lamps are not permitted to be reciprocally incorporated. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.1.2.

Stop lamps and direction-indicator lamps are not permitted to be reciprocally incorporated.

| 5.7.1.3. | Where stop lamps and direction-indicator lamps are grouped, the following conditions shall be met:






  5.7.1.3.1. | Any horizontal or vertical straight line passing through the projections of the apparent surfaces of these functions on a plane perpendicular to the reference axis, shall not intersect more than two borderlines separating adjacent areas of different colour; |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.7.1.3.

Where stop lamps and direction-indicator lamps are grouped, the following conditions shall be met:

5.7.1.3.1.

Any horizontal or vertical straight line passing through the projections of the apparent surfaces of these functions on a plane perpendicular to the reference axis, shall not intersect more than two borderlines separating adjacent areas of different colour;

| 5.7.1.3.2. | Their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis, based upon the areas bounded by the outline of their light-emitting surfaces, do not overlap. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.1.3.2.

Their apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis, based upon the areas bounded by the outline of their light-emitting surfaces, do not overlap.

| 5.7.2. | Where the apparent surface of a single lamp is composed of two or more distinct parts, it shall satisfy the following requirements:






  5.7.2.1. | Either the total area of the projection of the distinct parts on a plane tangent to the exterior surface of the outer lens and perpendicular to the reference axis shall occupy not less than 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the said projection, or the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts shall not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis. This requirement shall not apply to a retro-reflector. |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.7.2.

Where the apparent surface of a single lamp is composed of two or more distinct parts, it shall satisfy the following requirements:

5.7.2.1.

Either the total area of the projection of the distinct parts on a plane tangent to the exterior surface of the outer lens and perpendicular to the reference axis shall occupy not less than 60 per cent of the smallest quadrilateral circumscribing the said projection, or the distance between two adjacent/tangential distinct parts shall not exceed 15 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis. This requirement shall not apply to a retro-reflector.

| 5.7.2.2. | Or, in the case of interdependent lamps, the distance between adjacent apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis does not exceed 75 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis. |
| --- | --- |

5.7.2.2.

Or, in the case of interdependent lamps, the distance between adjacent apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axis does not exceed 75 mm when measured perpendicularly to the reference axis.

5.8.   The maximum height above the ground shall be measured from the highest point and the minimum height from the lowest point of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis.

In the case of dipped-beam headlamp, the minimum height in relation to the ground is measured from the lowest point of the effective outlet of the optical system (e.g. reflector, lens, projection lens) independent of its utilisation.

Where the (maximum and minimum) height above the ground clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of any surface need not be determined.

| 5.8.1. | The position, as regards width, will be determined from that edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is the furthest from the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle when referred to the overall width, and from the inner edges of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis when referred to the distance between lamps.
  Where the position, as regards width, clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of any surface need not be determined. |
| --- | --- |

5.8.1.

The position, as regards width, will be determined from that edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is the furthest from the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle when referred to the overall width, and from the inner edges of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis when referred to the distance between lamps.

Where the position, as regards width, clearly meets the requirements of the Regulation, the exact edges of any surface need not be determined.

5.9.   In the absence of specific instructions, the photometric characteristics (e.g. intensity, colour, apparent surface, etc.) of a lamp shall not be intentionally varied during the period of activation of the lamp.

| 5.9.1. | Direction-indicator lamps, the vehicle-hazard warning signal, amber side-marker lamps complying with paragraph 6.18.7 below, and the emergency stop signal shall be flashing lamps. |
| --- | --- |

5.9.1.

Direction-indicator lamps, the vehicle-hazard warning signal, amber side-marker lamps complying with paragraph 6.18.7 below, and the emergency stop signal shall be flashing lamps.

| 5.9.2. | The photometric characteristics of any lamp may vary:






  (a) | in relation to the ambient light; |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.9.2.

The photometric characteristics of any lamp may vary:

(a)

in relation to the ambient light;

| (b) | as a consequence of the activation of other lamps; or |
| --- | --- |

(b)

as a consequence of the activation of other lamps; or

| (c) | when the lamps is being used to provide another lighting function; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

when the lamps is being used to provide another lighting function;

provided that any variation in the photometric characteristics is in compliance with the technical provisions for the lamp concerned.

5.10.   No red light which could give rise to confusion shall be emitted from a lamp as defined in paragraph 2.7 in a forward direction and no white light which could give rise to confusion, shall be emitted from a lamp as defined in paragraph 2.7 in a rearward direction. No account shall be taken of lighting devices fitted for the interior lighting of the vehicle. In case of doubt, this requirement shall be verified as follows:

| 5.10.1. | For the visibility of red light towards the front of a vehicle, with the exception of a red rearmost side-marker lamp, there must be no direct visibility of the apparent surface of a red lamp if viewed by an observer moving within Zone 1 as specified in Annex 4. |
| --- | --- |

5.10.1.

For the visibility of red light towards the front of a vehicle, with the exception of a red rearmost side-marker lamp, there must be no direct visibility of the apparent surface of a red lamp if viewed by an observer moving within Zone 1 as specified in Annex 4.

| 5.10.2. | For the visibility of white light towards the rear, with the exception of reversing lamps and white side conspicuity markings fitted to the vehicle, there must be no direct visibility of the apparent surface of a white lamp if viewed by an observer moving within Zone 2 in a transverse plane situated 25 m behind the vehicle (see Annex 4). |
| --- | --- |

5.10.2.

For the visibility of white light towards the rear, with the exception of reversing lamps and white side conspicuity markings fitted to the vehicle, there must be no direct visibility of the apparent surface of a white lamp if viewed by an observer moving within Zone 2 in a transverse plane situated 25 m behind the vehicle (see Annex 4).

| 5.10.3. | In their respective planes, the zones 1 and 2 explored by the eye of the observer are bounded:






  5.10.3.1. | In height, by two horizontal planes 1 m and 2,2 m respectively above the ground; |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.10.3.

In their respective planes, the zones 1 and 2 explored by the eye of the observer are bounded:

5.10.3.1.

In height, by two horizontal planes 1 m and 2,2 m respectively above the ground;

| 5.10.3.2. | In width, by two vertical planes which, forming to the front and to the rear respectively an angle of 15° outwards from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane, pass through the point or points of contact of vertical planes parallel to the vehicle's median longitudinal plane delimiting the vehicle's overall width; if there are several points of contact, the foremost shall correspond to the forward plane and the rearmost to the rearward plane. |
| --- | --- |

5.10.3.2.

In width, by two vertical planes which, forming to the front and to the rear respectively an angle of 15° outwards from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane, pass through the point or points of contact of vertical planes parallel to the vehicle's median longitudinal plane delimiting the vehicle's overall width; if there are several points of contact, the foremost shall correspond to the forward plane and the rearmost to the rearward plane.

5.11.   The electrical connections shall be such that the front and rear position lamps, the end-outline marker lamps, if they exist, the side-marker lamps, if they exist, and the rear registration plate lamp can only be switched ON and OFF simultaneously.

| 5.11.1. | This condition does not apply:






  5.11.1.1. | when front and rear position lamps are switched ON, as well as side-marker lamps when combined or reciprocally incorporated with said lamps, as parking lamps; or |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.11.1.

This condition does not apply:

5.11.1.1.

when front and rear position lamps are switched ON, as well as side-marker lamps when combined or reciprocally incorporated with said lamps, as parking lamps; or

| 5.11.1.2. | when side-marker lamps flash in conjunction with direction indicators; or |
| --- | --- |

5.11.1.2.

when side-marker lamps flash in conjunction with direction indicators; or

| 5.11.1.3. | when light signalling system operates according to 6.2.7.6.2; or |
| --- | --- |

5.11.1.3.

when light signalling system operates according to 6.2.7.6.2; or

| 5.11.2. | to front position lamps when their function is substituted under the provisions of paragraph 5.12.1 below. |
| --- | --- |

5.11.2.

to front position lamps when their function is substituted under the provisions of paragraph 5.12.1 below.

| 5.11.3. | In the case of an interdependent lamp system, all light sources shall be switched ON and OFF simultaneously. |
| --- | --- |

5.11.3.

In the case of an interdependent lamp system, all light sources shall be switched ON and OFF simultaneously.

5.12.   The electrical connections shall be such that the main-beam and dipped-beam headlamps and the front fog lamps cannot be switched on unless the lamps referred to in paragraph 5.11 are also switched on. This requirement shall not apply, however, to main-beam or dipped-beam headlamps when their luminous warnings consist of the intermittent lighting up at short intervals of the main-beam headlamp or the intermittent lighting up at short intervals of the dipped-beam headlamp or the alternate lighting up at short intervals of the main-beam and dipped-beam headlamps.

| 5.12.1. | The dipped-beam headlamps and/or the main-beam headlamps and/or the front fog lamps may substitute the function of the front position lamps, provided that:






  5.12.1.1. | Their electrical connections are such that in case of failure of any of these lighting devices the front position lamps are automatically re-activated; and |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.12.1.

The dipped-beam headlamps and/or the main-beam headlamps and/or the front fog lamps may substitute the function of the front position lamps, provided that:

5.12.1.1.

Their electrical connections are such that in case of failure of any of these lighting devices the front position lamps are automatically re-activated; and

| 5.12.1.2. | The substituting lamp/function meets, for the respective position lamp, the requirements concerning:






  (a) | the geometric visibility prescribed for the front position lamps in 6.9.5; and |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.12.1.2.

The substituting lamp/function meets, for the respective position lamp, the requirements concerning:

(a)

the geometric visibility prescribed for the front position lamps in 6.9.5; and

| (b) | the minimum photometric values according to the angles of light distribution; and |
| --- | --- |

(b)

the minimum photometric values according to the angles of light distribution; and

| 5.12.1.3. | Appropriate evidence demonstrating compliance with the requirements indicated in paragraph 5.12.1.2 above is provided in the test reports of the substituting lamp. |
| --- | --- |

5.12.1.3.

Appropriate evidence demonstrating compliance with the requirements indicated in paragraph 5.12.1.2 above is provided in the test reports of the substituting lamp.

5.13.   Tell-tale

Where a closed-circuit tell-tale is prescribed by this Regulation it may be replaced by an ‘operating’ tell-tale.

5.14.   Concealable lamps

| 5.14.1. | The concealment of lamps shall be prohibited, with the exception of the main-beam headlamps, the dipped-beam headlamps and the front fog lamps, which may be concealed when they are not in use. |
| --- | --- |

5.14.1.

The concealment of lamps shall be prohibited, with the exception of the main-beam headlamps, the dipped-beam headlamps and the front fog lamps, which may be concealed when they are not in use.

| 5.14.2. | In the event of any failure affecting the operation of the concealment device(s) the lamps shall remain in the position of use, if already in use, or shall be capable of being moved into the position of use without the aid of tools. |
| --- | --- |

5.14.2.

In the event of any failure affecting the operation of the concealment device(s) the lamps shall remain in the position of use, if already in use, or shall be capable of being moved into the position of use without the aid of tools.

| 5.14.3. | It shall be possible to move the lamps into the position of use and to switch them on by means of a single control, without excluding the possibility of moving them into the position of use without switching them on. However, in the case of grouped main-beam and dipped-beam headlamps, the control referred to above is required only to activate the dipped-beam headlamps. |
| --- | --- |

5.14.3.

It shall be possible to move the lamps into the position of use and to switch them on by means of a single control, without excluding the possibility of moving them into the position of use without switching them on. However, in the case of grouped main-beam and dipped-beam headlamps, the control referred to above is required only to activate the dipped-beam headlamps.

| 5.14.4. | It shall not be possible deliberately, from the driver's seat, to stop the movement of switched-on lamps before they reach the position of use. If there is a danger of dazzling other road users by the movement of the lamps, they may light up only when they have reached their position of use. |
| --- | --- |

5.14.4.

It shall not be possible deliberately, from the driver's seat, to stop the movement of switched-on lamps before they reach the position of use. If there is a danger of dazzling other road users by the movement of the lamps, they may light up only when they have reached their position of use.

| 5.14.5. | When the concealment device has a temperature of – 30 °C to + 50 °C the headlamps shall be capable of reaching the position of use within 3 seconds of initial operation of the control. |
| --- | --- |

5.14.5.

When the concealment device has a temperature of – 30 °C to + 50 °C the headlamps shall be capable of reaching the position of use within 3 seconds of initial operation of the control.

5.15.   The colours of the light emitted by the lamps (8) are the following:

8

| Main-beam headlamp: | White |
| --- | --- |
| Dipped-beam headlamp: | White |
| Front fog lamp: | White or selective yellow |
| Reversing lamp: | White |
| Direction-indicator lamp: | Amber |
| Hazard warning signal: | Amber |
| Stop lamp: | Red |
| Emergency stop signal: | Amber or red |
| Rear-end collision alert signal: | Amber |
| Rear registration plate lamp: | White |
| Front position lamp: | White |
| Rear position lamp: | Red |
| Front fog lamp | White or selective yellow |
| Rear fog lamp: | Red |
| Parking lamp: | White in front, red at the rear, amber if reciprocally incorporated in the side direction-indicator lamps or in the side-marker lamps. |
| Side-marker lamp: | Amber; however the rearmost side- marker lamp can be red if it is grouped or combined or reciprocally incorporated with the rear position lamp, the rear end-outline marker lamp, the rear fog lamp, the stop lamp or is grouped or has part of the light-emitting surface in common with the rear retro-reflector. |
| End-outline marker lamp: | White in front, red at the rear |
| Daytime running lamp: | White |
| Rear retro-reflector, non-triangular: | Red |
| Rear retro-reflector, triangular: | Red |
| Front retro-reflector, non-triangular: | Identical to incident light (9) |
| Side retro-reflector, non-triangular: | Amber; however the rearmost side retro-reflector can be red if it is grouped or has part of the light-emitting surface in common with the rear position lamp, the rear end outline marker lamp, the rear fog lamp, the stop lamp, the red rearmost side-marker lamp or the rear retro-reflector, non-triangular. |
| Cornering lamp: | White |
| Conspicuity marking: | White to the front |
| | White or yellow to the side; |
| | Red or yellow to the rear (10) |
| Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS): | White |
| Exterior courtesy lamp: | White |

Main-beam headlamp:

White

Dipped-beam headlamp:

White

Front fog lamp:

White or selective yellow

Reversing lamp:

White

Direction-indicator lamp:

Amber

Hazard warning signal:

Amber

Stop lamp:

Red

Emergency stop signal:

Amber or red

Rear-end collision alert signal:

Amber

Rear registration plate lamp:

White

Front position lamp:

White

Rear position lamp:

Red

Front fog lamp

White or selective yellow

Rear fog lamp:

Red

Parking lamp:

White in front, red at the rear, amber if reciprocally incorporated in the side direction-indicator lamps or in the side-marker lamps.

Side-marker lamp:

Amber; however the rearmost side- marker lamp can be red if it is grouped or combined or reciprocally incorporated with the rear position lamp, the rear end-outline marker lamp, the rear fog lamp, the stop lamp or is grouped or has part of the light-emitting surface in common with the rear retro-reflector.

End-outline marker lamp:

White in front, red at the rear

Daytime running lamp:

White

Rear retro-reflector, non-triangular:

Red

Rear retro-reflector, triangular:

Red

Front retro-reflector, non-triangular:

Identical to incident light (9)

9

Side retro-reflector, non-triangular:

Amber; however the rearmost side retro-reflector can be red if it is grouped or has part of the light-emitting surface in common with the rear position lamp, the rear end outline marker lamp, the rear fog lamp, the stop lamp, the red rearmost side-marker lamp or the rear retro-reflector, non-triangular.

Cornering lamp:

White

Conspicuity marking:

White to the front

White or yellow to the side;

Red or yellow to the rear (10)

10

Adaptive front-lighting systems (AFS):

White

Exterior courtesy lamp:

White

5.16.   Number of lamps

| 5.16.1. | The number of lamps mounted on the vehicle shall be equal to the number indicated in the individual specifications of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

5.16.1.

The number of lamps mounted on the vehicle shall be equal to the number indicated in the individual specifications of this Regulation.

5.17.   Any lamp may be installed on movable components provided that the conditions specified in paragraphs 5.18, 5.19 and 5.20 are fulfilled.

5.18.   Rear position lamps, rear direction-indicators and rear retro-reflectors, triangular as well as non-triangular, may be installed on movable components only:

| 5.18.1. | If at all fixed positions of the movable components the lamps on the movable components meet all the position, geometric visibility and photometric requirements for those lamps. |
| --- | --- |

5.18.1.

If at all fixed positions of the movable components the lamps on the movable components meet all the position, geometric visibility and photometric requirements for those lamps.

| 5.18.2. | In the case where the functions referred to in paragraph 5.18 are obtained by an assembly of two lamps marked ‘D’ (see paragraph 2.16.1), only one of the lamps needs to meet the position, geometric visibility and photometric requirements for those lamps at all fixed positions of the movable components; or |
| --- | --- |

5.18.2.

In the case where the functions referred to in paragraph 5.18 are obtained by an assembly of two lamps marked ‘D’ (see paragraph 2.16.1), only one of the lamps needs to meet the position, geometric visibility and photometric requirements for those lamps at all fixed positions of the movable components; or

| 5.18.3. | Where additional lamps for the above functions are fitted and are activated, when the movable component is in any fixed open position, provided that these additional lamps satisfy all the position, geometric visibility and photometric requirements applicable to the lamps installed on the movable component. |
| --- | --- |

5.18.3.

Where additional lamps for the above functions are fitted and are activated, when the movable component is in any fixed open position, provided that these additional lamps satisfy all the position, geometric visibility and photometric requirements applicable to the lamps installed on the movable component.

| 5.18.4. | In the case where the functions referred to in paragraph 5.18 are obtained by an interdependent lamp system either of the following conditions shall apply:






  (a) | should the complete interdependent lamp system be mounted on the moving component(s), the requirements of paragraph 5.18.1 shall be satisfied. However, additional lamps for the above functions may be activated, when the movable component is in any fixed open position, provided that these additional lamps satisfy all the position, geometric visibility and photometric requirements applicable to the lamps installed on the movable component; or |
| --- | --- | --- |

5.18.4.

In the case where the functions referred to in paragraph 5.18 are obtained by an interdependent lamp system either of the following conditions shall apply:

(a)

should the complete interdependent lamp system be mounted on the moving component(s), the requirements of paragraph 5.18.1 shall be satisfied. However, additional lamps for the above functions may be activated, when the movable component is in any fixed open position, provided that these additional lamps satisfy all the position, geometric visibility and photometric requirements applicable to the lamps installed on the movable component; or

| (b) | should the interdependent lamp system be partly mounted on the fixed component and partly mounted on a movable component, the interdependent lamp(s) specified by the Applicant during the device approval procedure shall meet all the position, outwards geometric visibility and photometric requirements for those lamps, at all fixed positions of the movable component(s). The inwards geometric visibility requirement(s) is(are) deemed to be satisfied if this(these) interdependent lamp(s) still conform(s) to the photometric values prescribed in the field of light distribution for the approval of the device, at all fixed positions of the movable component(s). |
| --- | --- |

(b)

should the interdependent lamp system be partly mounted on the fixed component and partly mounted on a movable component, the interdependent lamp(s) specified by the Applicant during the device approval procedure shall meet all the position, outwards geometric visibility and photometric requirements for those lamps, at all fixed positions of the movable component(s). The inwards geometric visibility requirement(s) is(are) deemed to be satisfied if this(these) interdependent lamp(s) still conform(s) to the photometric values prescribed in the field of light distribution for the approval of the device, at all fixed positions of the movable component(s).

5.19.   When the movable components are in a position other than a ‘normal position of use’, the devices installed on them shall not cause undue discomfort to road users.

5.20.   When a lamp is installed on a movable component and the movable component is in the ‘normal position(s) of use’, the lamp shall always return to the position(s) specified by the manufacturer in accordance with this Regulation. In the case of dipped-beam headlamps and front fog lamps, this requirement shall be considered satisfied if, when the movable components are moved and returned to the normal position 10 times, no value of the angular inclination of these lamps, relative to its support, measured after each operation of the movable component, differs by more than 0,15 per cent from the average of the 10 measured values. If this value is exceeded each limit specified in paragraph 6.2.6.1.1 shall then be modified by this excess to decrease the allowed range of inclinations when checking the vehicle according to Annex 6.

5.21.   The apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of front and rear position lamps, front and rear direction-indicator lamps and retro-reflectors shall not be hidden more than 50 per cent by any movable component, with or without a light-signalling device installed on it, in any fixed position different from the ‘normal position of use’.

If the above requirement is not practicable:

| 5.21.1. | Additional lamps satisfying all the position, geometric visibility and photometric requirements for the above indicated lamps shall be activated when the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of these lamps is more than 50 per cent hidden by the movable component; or |
| --- | --- |

5.21.1.

Additional lamps satisfying all the position, geometric visibility and photometric requirements for the above indicated lamps shall be activated when the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of these lamps is more than 50 per cent hidden by the movable component; or

| 5.21.2. | A remark in the communication form (item 10.1 of Annex 1) shall inform other Administrations that more than 50 per cent of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis can be hidden by the movable components; and
  A notice in the vehicle shall inform the user that in certain position(s) of the movable components other road users shall be warned of the presence of the vehicle on the road; for example by means of a warning triangle or other devices according to national requirements for use on the road. |
| --- | --- |

5.21.2.

A remark in the communication form (item 10.1 of Annex 1) shall inform other Administrations that more than 50 per cent of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis can be hidden by the movable components; and

A notice in the vehicle shall inform the user that in certain position(s) of the movable components other road users shall be warned of the presence of the vehicle on the road; for example by means of a warning triangle or other devices according to national requirements for use on the road.

| 5.21.3. | Paragraph 5.21.2 does not apply to retro-reflectors. |
| --- | --- |

5.21.3.

Paragraph 5.21.2 does not apply to retro-reflectors.

5.22.   With the exception of retro-reflectors, a lamp even bearing an approval mark is deemed not to be present when it cannot be made to operate by the sole installation of a light source and/or a fuse.

5.23.   Lamps shall be fitted in a vehicle in such a way that the light source can be correctly replaced without the need for expert assistance and without the need for special tools, other than those provided with the vehicle by the manufacturer. The vehicle manufacturer shall provide with the vehicle a detailed description of the procedure for replacement. This paragraph is not applicable to:

| (a) | devices approved with a non-replaceable light source; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

devices approved with a non-replaceable light source;

| (b) | devices approved with light sources according to Regulation No 99. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

devices approved with light sources according to Regulation No 99.

5.24.   Any temporary fail-safe replacement of the light-signalling function of a rear position lamp is allowed, provided that the replacement function in case of a failure is similar in colour, main intensity and position to the function that has ceased to operate and provided that the replacement device remains operational in its original safety function. During replacement, a tell-tale on the dashboard (paragraph 2.18 of this Regulation) shall indicate occurrence of a temporary replacement and need for repair.

5.25.   Where an AFS is fitted, it shall be considered equivalent to a pair of dipped-beam headlamps and, if it provides main-beam function(s), it shall be considered equivalent to a pair of main-beam headlamps.

5.26.   Rear direction-indicator lamps, rear position lamps, stop lamps (except stop lamps of category S4) and rear fog lamps with variable luminous intensity control are allowed, which respond simultaneously to at least one of the following external influences: ambient lighting, fog, snowfall, rain, spray, dust clouds, contamination of the light-emitting surface, provided that their prescribed intensity relationship is maintained throughout variation transitions. No sharp variation of intensity shall be observed during transition. Stop lamps of category S4 may produce variable luminous intensity independent from the other lamps. It may be possible for the driver to set the functions above to luminous intensities corresponding to their steady category and to return them to their automatic variable category.

5.27.   For vehicles of M and N categories the applicant shall demonstrate to the technical service responsible for type approval testing that the electric power supply conditions for the devices indicated in 2.7.9, 2.7.10, 2.7.12, 2.7.14 and 2.7.15 above comply, when the electrical system of the vehicle is in a constant voltage operating condition, representative for the relevant category of powered vehicle as specified by the applicant, with the following provisions:

| 5.27.1. | The voltage supplied at the terminals of devices which, according to their type approval documentation, have been tested by the application of a special power supply/electronic light source control gear, or in a secondary operating mode or at a voltage requested by the applicant, shall not exceed the voltage specified for the relevant devices or functions as they have been approved. |
| --- | --- |

5.27.1.

The voltage supplied at the terminals of devices which, according to their type approval documentation, have been tested by the application of a special power supply/electronic light source control gear, or in a secondary operating mode or at a voltage requested by the applicant, shall not exceed the voltage specified for the relevant devices or functions as they have been approved.

| 5.27.2. | In all cases of electric power supply conditions not covered by paragraph 5.27.1, the voltage at the terminals of the device(s) or function(s) shall not exceed 6,75 V (6 Volt-Systems), 13,5 V (12 Volt-Systems) or 28 V (24 Volt-Systems) by more than 3 per cent. |
| --- | --- |

5.27.2.

In all cases of electric power supply conditions not covered by paragraph 5.27.1, the voltage at the terminals of the device(s) or function(s) shall not exceed 6,75 V (6 Volt-Systems), 13,5 V (12 Volt-Systems) or 28 V (24 Volt-Systems) by more than 3 per cent.

| 5.27.3. | The provisions of paragraphs 5.27.1 and 5.27.2 shall not apply to devices which include an electronic light source control gear or a variable intensity control being part of the device. |
| --- | --- |

5.27.3.

The provisions of paragraphs 5.27.1 and 5.27.2 shall not apply to devices which include an electronic light source control gear or a variable intensity control being part of the device.

| 5.27.4. | A report shall be attached to the approval documentation describing the methods used to demonstrate compliance and the results obtained. |
| --- | --- |

5.27.4.

A report shall be attached to the approval documentation describing the methods used to demonstrate compliance and the results obtained.

5.28.   General provisions relating to Geometric Visibility

| 5.28.1. | There shall be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. However, no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type approved. |
| --- | --- |

5.28.1.

There shall be no obstacle on the inside of the angles of geometric visibility to the propagation of light from any part of the apparent surface of the lamp observed from infinity. However, no account is taken of obstacles, if they were already presented when the lamp was type approved.

| 5.28.2. | If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation shall be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy. |
| --- | --- |

5.28.2.

If measurements are taken closer to the lamp, the direction of observation shall be shifted parallel to achieve the same accuracy.

| 5.28.3. | If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device. |
| --- | --- |

5.28.3.

If, when the lamp is installed, any part of the apparent surface of the lamp is hidden by any further parts of the vehicle, proof shall be furnished that the part of the lamp not hidden by obstacles still conforms to the photometric values prescribed for the approval of the device.

| 5.28.4. | When the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal. |
| --- | --- |

5.28.4.

When the vertical angle of geometric visibility below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° (lamp at less than 750 mm above the ground) the photometric field of measurements of the installed optical unit may be reduced to 5° below the horizontal.

| 5.28.5. | In the case of an interdependent lamp system the geometric visibility requirements shall be fulfilled when all its interdependent lamps are operated together. |
| --- | --- |

5.28.5.

In the case of an interdependent lamp system the geometric visibility requirements shall be fulfilled when all its interdependent lamps are operated together.

6.   INDIVIDUAL SPECIFICATIONS

6.1.   Main-beam headlamp (Regulation Nos 98 and 112)

Main-beam headlamp

6.1.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory on motor vehicles. Prohibited on trailers.

6.1.2.   Number

Number

Two or four, type approved according to Regulation Nos 31, 98, or 112, excluding Class A headlamp.

For vehicles of the category N3: Two extra main-beam headlamps may be installed.

3

Where a vehicle is fitted with four concealable headlamps the installation of two additional headlamps shall only be authorised for the purpose of light-signalling, consisting of intermittent illumination, at short intervals (see paragraph 5.12) in daylight.

6.1.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No individual specifications.

6.1.4.   Position

Position

6.1.4.1.   In width: No individual specifications.

6.1.4.2.   In height: No individual specifications.

6.1.4.3.   In length: At the front of the vehicle. This requirement shall be deemed to be satisfied if the light emitted does not cause discomfort to the driver either directly or indirectly through the devices for indirect vision and/or other reflecting surfaces of the vehicle.

6.1.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

The visibility of the illuminating surface, including its visibility in areas which do not appear to be illuminated in the direction of observation considered, shall be ensured within a divergent space defined by generating lines based on the perimeter of the illuminating surface and forming an angle of not less than 5° with the axis of reference of the headlamp. The origin of the angles of geometric visibility is the perimeter of the projection of the illuminating surface on a transverse plane tangent to the foremost part of the lens of the headlamp.

6.1.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Towards the front.

Not more than one main-beam headlamp on each side of the vehicle may swivel to produce bend lighting.

6.1.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

6.1.7.1.   Except when they are used to give intermittent luminous warnings at short intervals the main-beam headlamps may be switched ON, only when the master light switch is in headlamps ON position or in ‘AUTO’ (automatic) position and the conditions for automatic activation of dipped beam exist. In the latter case, the main beam headlamps shall be switched off automatically when the conditions for automatic activation of dipped beam ceased to exist.

6.1.7.2.   The main-beam headlamps may be switched on either simultaneously or in pairs. In case the extra two main-beam headlamps are installed, as permitted under paragraph 6.1.2 for vehicles of the category N3 only, no more than two pairs may be simultaneously lit. For changing over from the dipped to the main beam at least one pair of main-beam headlamps shall be switched on. For changing over from the main-beam to the dipped-beam all main-beam headlamps shall be switched off simultaneously.

3

6.1.7.3.   The dipped-beams may remain switched on at the same time as the main beams.

6.1.7.4.   Where four concealable headlamps are fitted their raised position shall prevent the simultaneous operation of any additional headlamps fitted, if these are intended to provide light signals consisting of intermittent illumination at short intervals (paragraph 5.12) in daylight.

6.1.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Circuit-closed tell-tale mandatory

6.1.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

6.1.9.1.   The aggregate maximum intensity of the main-beam headlamps which can be switched on simultaneously shall not exceed 430 000 cd, which corresponds to a reference value of 100.

6.1.9.2.   This maximum intensity shall be obtained by adding together the individual reference marks which are indicated on the several. The reference mark ‘10’ shall be given to each of the headlamps marked ‘R’ or ‘CR’.

6.2.   Dipped-beam headlamp (Regulation Nos 98 and 112)

Dipped-beam headlamp

6.2.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory on motor vehicles. Prohibited on trailers

6.2.2.   Number

Number

Two, type approved according to Regulation Nos 31, 98, or 112, excluding Class A headlamp.

6.2.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement.

6.2.4.   Position

Position

6.2.4.1.   In width: that edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall be not more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

The inner edges of the apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall be not less than 600 mm apart. This does not apply, however, for M1 and N1 category vehicles; for all other categories of motor vehicles this distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm.

1

1

6.2.4.2.   In height: not less than 500 mm and not more than 1 200 mm above the ground. For category N3G (off-road) vehicles (11) the maximum height may be increased to 1 500 mm.

3

11

6.2.4.3.   In length: at the front of the vehicle. This requirement shall be deemed to be satisfied if the light emitted does not cause discomfort to the driver either directly, or indirectly through the devices for indirect vision and/or other reflecting surfaces of the vehicle.

6.2.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Defined by angles α and ß as specified in paragraph 2.13:

| α | = | 15° upwards and 10° downwards, |
| --- | --- | --- |
| ß | = | 45° outwards and 10° inwards. |

α

=

15° upwards and 10° downwards,

ß

=

45° outwards and 10° inwards.

Since the photometric values required for dipped-beam headlamps do not cover the full geometric field of vision, a minimum value of 1 cd in the space remaining is required for type-approval purposes. The presence of partitions or other items of equipment near the headlamp shall not give rise to secondary effects causing discomfort to other road users.

6.2.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Towards the front

6.2.6.1.   Vertical orientation

6.2.6.1.1.   The initial downward inclination of the cut-off of the dipped-beam to be set in the unladen vehicle state with one person in the driver's seat shall be specified within an accuracy of 0,1 per cent by the manufacturer and indicated in a clearly legible and indelible manner on each vehicle close to either headlamp or the manufacturer's plate by the symbol shown in Annex 7.

The value of this indicated downward inclination shall be defined in accordance with paragraph 6.2.6.1.2.

6.2.6.1.2.   Depending on the mounting height in metres (h) of the lower edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the dipped-beam headlamp, measured on the unladen vehicles, the vertical inclination of the cut-off of the dipped- beam shall, under all the static conditions of Annex 5, remain between the following limits and the initial aiming shall have the following values:

| | h < 0,8







  limits | : | between – 0,5 per cent and – 2,5 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| initial aiming | : | between – 1 per cent and – 1,5 per cent |

h < 0,8

limits

:

between – 0,5 per cent and – 2,5 per cent

initial aiming

:

between – 1 per cent and – 1,5 per cent

| | 0,8 ≤ h ≤ 1







  limits | : | between – 0,5 per cent and – 2,5 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| initial aiming | : | between – 1 per cent and – 1,5 per cent |

0,8 ≤ h ≤ 1

limits

:

between – 0,5 per cent and – 2,5 per cent

initial aiming

:

between – 1 per cent and – 1,5 per cent

Or, at the discretion of the manufacturer,

| limits | : | between – 1 per cent and – 3 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- |
| initial aiming | : | between – 1,5 per cent and – 2 per cent |

limits

:

between – 1 per cent and – 3 per cent

initial aiming

:

between – 1,5 per cent and – 2 per cent

The application for the vehicle type-approval shall, in this case, contain information as to which of the two alternatives is to be used.

| | h > 1







  limits | : | between – 1 per cent and – 3 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| initial aiming | : | between – 1,5 per cent and – 2 per cent |

h > 1

limits

:

between – 1 per cent and – 3 per cent

initial aiming

:

between – 1,5 per cent and – 2 per cent

The above limits and the initial aiming values are summarised in the diagram below.

For category N3G (off-road) vehicles where the headlamps exceed a height of 1 200 mm, the limits for the vertical inclination of the cut-off shall be between: – 1,5 per cent and – 3,5 per cent.

3

The initial aim shall be set between: – 2 per cent and – 2,5 per cent.

6.2.6.2.   Headlamp levelling device

6.2.6.2.1.   In the case where a headlamp levelling device is necessary to satisfy the requirements of paragraphs 6.2.6.1.1 and 6.2.6.1.2, the device shall be automatic.

6.2.6.2.2.   However, devices which are adjusted manually, either continuously or non-continuously, shall be permitted, provided they have a stop position at which the lamps can be returned to the initial inclination defined in paragraph 6.2.6.1.1 by means of the usual adjusting screws or similar means.

These manually adjustable devices shall be operable from the driver's seat.

Continually adjustable devices shall have reference marks indicating the loading conditions that require adjustment of the dipped-beam.

The number of positions on devices which are not continuously adjustable shall be such as to ensure compliance with the range of values prescribed in paragraph 6.2.6.1.2 in all the loading conditions defined in Annex 5.

For these devices also, the loading conditions of Annex 5 that require adjustment of the dipped-beam shall be clearly marked near the control of the device (Annex 8).

6.2.6.2.3.   In the event of a failure of devices described in paragraphs 6.2.6.2.1 and 6.2.6.2.2, the dipped-beam shall not assume a position in which the dip is less than it was at the time when the failure of the device occurred.

6.2.6.3.   Measuring procedure

6.2.6.3.1.   After adjustment of the initial inclination, the vertical inclination of the dipped-beam, expressed in percent, shall be measured in static conditions under all the loading conditions defined in Annex 5.

6.2.6.3.2.   The measurement of the variation of dipped-beam inclination as a function of load shall be carried out in accordance with the test procedure set out in Annex 6.

6.2.6.4.   Horizontal orientation

The horizontal orientation of one or both dipped-beam headlamps may be varied to produce bend lighting, provided that if the whole beam or the kink of the elbow of the cut-off is moved, the kink of the elbow of the cut-off shall not intersect the line of the trajectory of the centre of gravity of the vehicle at distances from the front of the vehicle which are larger than 100 times the mounting height of the respective dipped-beam headlamps.

6.2.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

6.2.7.1.   The control for changing over to the dipped-beam shall switch off all main-beam headlamps simultaneously.

6.2.7.2.   The dipped beam may remain switched on at the same time as the main beams.

6.2.7.3.   In the case of dipped-beam headlamps according to Regulation No 98, the gas-discharge light sources shall remain switched on during the main-beam operation.

6.2.7.4.   One additional light source or one or more LED module(s), located inside the dipped-beam headlamps or in a lamp (except the main-beam headlamp) grouped or reciprocally incorporated with the respective dipped-beam headlamps, may be activated to produce bend lighting, provided that the horizontal radius of curvature of the trajectory of the centre of gravity of the vehicle is 500 m or less. This may be demonstrated by the manufacturer by calculation or by other means accepted by the authority responsible for type approval.

6.2.7.5.   Dipped-beam headlamps may be switched ON or OFF automatically. However, it shall be always possible to switch these dipped-beam headlamps ON and OFF manually.

6.2.7.6.   If daytime running lamps are present and operate according to paragraph 6.19, either

| 6.2.7.6.1. | The dipped-beam headlamps shall be switched ON and OFF automatically relative to the ambient light conditions (e.g. switch ON during nighttime driving conditions, tunnels, etc.) according to the requirements of Annex 12; or |
| --- | --- |

6.2.7.6.1.

The dipped-beam headlamps shall be switched ON and OFF automatically relative to the ambient light conditions (e.g. switch ON during nighttime driving conditions, tunnels, etc.) according to the requirements of Annex 12; or

| 6.2.7.6.2. | Daytime running lamps operate in conjunction with the lamps listed in paragraph 5.11 where, as a minimum requirement, at least the rear position lamps shall be activated; or |
| --- | --- |

6.2.7.6.2.

Daytime running lamps operate in conjunction with the lamps listed in paragraph 5.11 where, as a minimum requirement, at least the rear position lamps shall be activated; or

| 6.2.7.6.3. | Distinctive means are provided to inform the driver that the headlamps, position lamps and if so equipped end outline marker lamps and side marker lamps are not illuminated. Such means are:






  6.2.7.6.3.1. | Two distinctly different levels of instrument panel illumination intensity are provided during night and day, indicating to the driver that the dipped beam headlamps shall be switched ON; or |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.2.7.6.3.

Distinctive means are provided to inform the driver that the headlamps, position lamps and if so equipped end outline marker lamps and side marker lamps are not illuminated. Such means are:

6.2.7.6.3.1.

Two distinctly different levels of instrument panel illumination intensity are provided during night and day, indicating to the driver that the dipped beam headlamps shall be switched ON; or

| 6.2.7.6.3.2. | Non-illuminated indicators and identification of hand controls that are required by Regulation No 121 to be illuminated when the headlamps are activated; or |
| --- | --- |

6.2.7.6.3.2.

Non-illuminated indicators and identification of hand controls that are required by Regulation No 121 to be illuminated when the headlamps are activated; or

| 6.2.7.6.3.3. | A tell-tale visual, auditory or both, shall be activated only in reduced ambient lighting conditions as defined in Annex 12 to inform the driver that the dipped beam headlamps should be switched ON. Once the tell-tale is activated, it shall only be extinguished when the dipped beam headlamps have been switched on or the device which starts and/or stops the engine (propulsion system) is set in a position which makes it impossible for the engine (propulsion system) to operate. |
| --- | --- |

6.2.7.6.3.3.

A tell-tale visual, auditory or both, shall be activated only in reduced ambient lighting conditions as defined in Annex 12 to inform the driver that the dipped beam headlamps should be switched ON. Once the tell-tale is activated, it shall only be extinguished when the dipped beam headlamps have been switched on or the device which starts and/or stops the engine (propulsion system) is set in a position which makes it impossible for the engine (propulsion system) to operate.

6.2.7.7.   Without prejudice to paragraph 6.2.7.6.1, the dipped-beam headlamps may switch ON and OFF automatically relative to other factors such as time or ambient conditions (e.g. time of the day, vehicle location, rain, fog, etc.).

6.2.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

6.2.8.1.   Tell-tale optional.

6.2.8.2.   A visual tell-tale whether flashing or not is mandatory:

| (a) | in the case where the whole beam or the kink of the elbow of the cut-off is moved to produce bend lighting; or |
| --- | --- |

(a)

in the case where the whole beam or the kink of the elbow of the cut-off is moved to produce bend lighting; or

| (b) | if one or more LED modules are used to produce the principal dipped-beam. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

if one or more LED modules are used to produce the principal dipped-beam.

It shall be activated:

| (a) | In the event of a malfunction of the displacement of the kink of the elbow of the cut-off; or |
| --- | --- |

(a)

In the event of a malfunction of the displacement of the kink of the elbow of the cut-off; or

| (b) | In case of a failure of any one of the LED module(s) producing the principal dipped-beam. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

In case of a failure of any one of the LED module(s) producing the principal dipped-beam.

It shall remain activated while the failure is present. It may be cancelled temporarily, but shall be repeated whenever the device, which starts and stops the engine, is switched on and off.

6.2.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

The requirements of paragraph 5.5.2 shall not apply to dipped-beam headlamps.

Dipped-beam headlamps with a light source or LED module(s) producing the principal dipped beam and having a total objective luminous flux which exceeds 2 000 lumen shall only be installed in conjunction with the installation of headlamp cleaning device(s) according to Regulation No 45 (12).

12

With respect to vertical inclination the provisions of paragraph 6.2.6.2.2 above shall not be applied for dipped-beam headlamps:

| (a) | with LED module(s) producing the principal dipped beam; or |
| --- | --- |

(a)

with LED module(s) producing the principal dipped beam; or

| (b) | with a light source producing the principal dipped beam and having an objective luminous flux which exceeds 2 000 lumen. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

with a light source producing the principal dipped beam and having an objective luminous flux which exceeds 2 000 lumen.

Only dipped-beam headlamps according to Regulation No 98 or 112 may be used to produce bend lighting.

If bend lighting is produced by a horizontal movement of the whole beam or the kink of the elbow of the cut-off, it shall be activated only if the vehicle is in forward motion; this shall not apply if bend lighting is produced for a right turn in right hand traffic (left turn in left hand traffic).

6.3.   Front fog lamp (Regulation No 19)

Front fog lamp

6.3.1.   Presence

Presence

Optional on motor vehicles. Prohibited on trailers

6.3.2.   Number

Number

Two

6.3.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.3.4.   Position

Position

6.3.4.1.   In width: that point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

6.3.4.2.   In height:

| Minimum | : | Not less than 250 mm above the ground. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Maximum | : | For M1 and N1 category vehicles: not more than 800 mm above the ground.
  For all other categories except N3G (off-road) (13) vehicles: not more than 1 200 mm above the ground.
  For category N3G vehicles: the maximum height may be increased to 1 500 mm. |

Minimum

:

Not less than 250 mm above the ground.

Maximum

:

For M1 and N1 category vehicles: not more than 800 mm above the ground.

1

1

For all other categories except N3G (off-road) (13) vehicles: not more than 1 200 mm above the ground.

3

13

For category N3G vehicles: the maximum height may be increased to 1 500 mm.

3

No point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis must be higher than the highest point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the dipped-beam headlamp.

6.3.4.3.   In length: at the front of the vehicle. This requirement shall be deemed to be satisfied if the light emitted does not cause discomfort to the driver either directly, or indirectly through the devices for indirect vision and/or other reflecting surfaces of the vehicle.

6.3.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Defined by angles α and ß as specified in paragraph 2.13,

| α | = | 5° upwards and downwards, |
| --- | --- | --- |
| ß | = | 45° outwards and 10° inwards. |

α

=

5° upwards and downwards,

ß

=

45° outwards and 10° inwards.

Since the photometric values required for front fog lamps do not cover the full geometric field of vision, a minimum value of one cd in the space remaining is required for type-approval purposes. The presence of partitions or other items of equipment near the front fog lamp shall not give rise to secondary effects causing discomfort to other road users (14).

14

6.3.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Toward the front

6.3.6.1.   Vertical orientation.

6.3.6.1.1.   In the case of class ‘B’ front fog lamps the vertical inclination of the cut-off to be set in the unladen vehicle state with one person in the driver's seat shall be – 1,5 per cent or lower (14).

14

6.3.6.1.2.   In the case of class ‘F3’ front fog lamps:

| 6.3.6.1.2.1. | The initial downward inclination of the cut-off to be set in the unladen vehicle state with one person in the driver's seat shall be specified within an accuracy of one decimal place by the manufacturer and indicated in a clearly legible and indelible manner on each vehicle close to either the front fog lamp or the manufacturer's plate or in combination with the indication referred to in paragraph 6.2.6.1.1 by the symbol shown in Annex 7 to this Regulation. The value of this indicated downward inclination shall be defined in accordance with paragraph 6.3.6.1.2.2. |
| --- | --- |

6.3.6.1.2.1.

The initial downward inclination of the cut-off to be set in the unladen vehicle state with one person in the driver's seat shall be specified within an accuracy of one decimal place by the manufacturer and indicated in a clearly legible and indelible manner on each vehicle close to either the front fog lamp or the manufacturer's plate or in combination with the indication referred to in paragraph 6.2.6.1.1 by the symbol shown in Annex 7 to this Regulation. The value of this indicated downward inclination shall be defined in accordance with paragraph 6.3.6.1.2.2.

| 6.3.6.1.2.2. | Depending on the mounting height in metre (h) of the lower edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the front fog lamp, measured on the unladen vehicles, the vertical inclination of the cut-off to be set in the unladen vehicle state with one person in the driver's seat shall have the following value(s): | h ≤ 0,8







  Limits | : | between – 1 per cent and – 3 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Initial aiming | : | between – 1,5 per cent and – 2 per cent |

6.3.6.1.2.2.

Depending on the mounting height in metre (h) of the lower edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the front fog lamp, measured on the unladen vehicles, the vertical inclination of the cut-off to be set in the unladen vehicle state with one person in the driver's seat shall have the following value(s):

h ≤ 0,8

Limits

:

between – 1 per cent and – 3 per cent

Initial aiming

:

between – 1,5 per cent and – 2 per cent

| | h > 0,8







  Limits | : | between – 1,5 per cent and – 3,5 per cent |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |
| Initial aiming | : | between – 2 per cent and – 2,5 per cent |

h > 0,8

Limits

:

between – 1,5 per cent and – 3,5 per cent

Initial aiming

:

between – 2 per cent and – 2,5 per cent

6.3.6.2.   Front fog lamp levelling device

6.3.6.2.1.   In the case of a front fog lamp with (a) light source(s) having a total objective luminous flux, which exceeds 2 000 lumen, the requirements of paragraph 6.3.6.1.2.2 shall be automatically satisfied under all the loading conditions of Annex 5 to this Regulation.

6.3.6.2.2.   Where a levelling device is fitted for a front fog lamp, independent or grouped with other front lighting and light signalling functions, it shall be such that the vertical inclination, under all the static loading conditions of Annex 5 to this Regulation, shall remain between the limits prescribed in paragraph 6.3.6.1.2.2.

6.3.6.2.3.   In the case where the front fog lamp of category ‘F3’ is part of the dipped beam headlamp or is part of an AFS system, the requirements of paragraph 6.2.6 shall be applied during the use of the front fog beam as part of the dipped beam.

In this case the levelling limits defined in paragraph 6.2.6 may be applied also when this front fog lamp is used as such.

6.3.6.2.4.   The levelling device may also be used to automatically adapt the inclination of the front fog beam in relation to the prevailing ambient conditions, provided that the limits for the downward inclination specified in paragraph 6.3.6.1.2.2 are not exceeded.

6.3.6.2.5.   In the case of a failure of the levelling device, the front fog beam shall not assume a position in which the cut off is less inclined than it was at the time when the failure of the device occurred.

6.3.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

It shall be possible to switch the front fog lamps ON and OFF independently of the main-beam headlamps, the dipped-beam headlamps or any combination of main- and dipped-beam headlamps, unless the front fog lamps are used as part of another lighting function in an AFS; however, the switching ON of the front fog lamps function shall have the priority over the function for which the front fog lamps are used as a part.

6.3.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Circuit-closed tell-tale mandatory. An independent non-flashing warning light.

6.3.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

In the case where there is a positive indication in the communication form in item 10.9 of Annex 1 to Regulation No 19 the alignment and the luminous intensities of the class ‘F3’ front fog beam may be automatically adapted in relation to the prevailing ambient conditions. Any variations of the luminous intensities or alignment shall be performed automatically and in such a way that no discomfort, neither for the driver nor to other road users, is caused.

6.4.   Reversing lamp (Regulation No 23)

Reversing lamp

6.4.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory on motor vehicles and on trailers of categories O2, O3 and O4. Optional on trailers of category O1

2

3

4

1

6.4.2.   Number

Number

6.4.2.1.   One device mandatory and a second device optional on motor vehicles of category M1 and on all other vehicles with a length not exceeding 6 000 mm.

1

6.4.2.2.   Two devices mandatory and two devices optional on all vehicles with a length exceeding 6 000 mm, except vehicles of category M1.

1

6.4.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.4.4.   Position

Position

6.4.4.1.   In width: no special requirement

6.4.4.2.   In height: not less than 250 mm and not more than 1 200 mm above the ground

6.4.4.3.   In length: at the rear of the vehicle

However, if installed, the two optional devices mentioned in paragraph 6.4.2.2 shall be fitted on the side or rear of the vehicle, in conformity with the requirements of paragraphs 6.4.5 and 6.4.6.

6.4.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Defined by angles α and β, as specified in paragraph 2.13:

| α | = | 15° upwards and 5° downwards, |
| --- | --- | --- |
| β | = | 45° to right and to left if there is only one device,
  45° outwards and 30° inwards if there are two. |

α

=

15° upwards and 5° downwards,

β

=

45° to right and to left if there is only one device,

45° outwards and 30° inwards if there are two.

The reference axis of the two optional devices mentioned in paragraph 6.4.2.2, if fitted on the side of the vehicle shall be orientated sideward horizontally with an inclination of 10° ± 5° in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle.

6.4.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Rearwards

In the case of the two optional devices mentioned in paragraph 6.4.2.2, if fitted on the side of the vehicle, the abovementioned requirements of paragraph 6.4.5 shall not be applied. However, the reference axis of these devices shall be orientated outwards not more than 15° horizontally towards the rear in relation to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle.

6.4.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

| 6.4.7.1. | They shall be such that the lamp can light up only if the reverse gear is engaged and if the device which controls the starting and stopping of the engine is in such a position that operation of the engine is possible. It shall not light up or remain lit if either of the above conditions is not satisfied. |
| --- | --- |

6.4.7.1.

They shall be such that the lamp can light up only if the reverse gear is engaged and if the device which controls the starting and stopping of the engine is in such a position that operation of the engine is possible. It shall not light up or remain lit if either of the above conditions is not satisfied.

| 6.4.7.2. | Moreover, the electrical connections of the two optional devices mentioned in paragraph 6.4.2.2 shall be such that these devices cannot illuminate unless the lamps referred to in paragraph 5.11 are switched on.
  The devices fitted on the side of the vehicle may be switched on for slow manoeuvres in forward motion of the vehicle up to a maximum speed of 10 km/h, provided that the following conditions are fulfilled:






  (a) | the devices shall be activated and deactivated manually by a separate switch; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.4.7.2.

Moreover, the electrical connections of the two optional devices mentioned in paragraph 6.4.2.2 shall be such that these devices cannot illuminate unless the lamps referred to in paragraph 5.11 are switched on.

The devices fitted on the side of the vehicle may be switched on for slow manoeuvres in forward motion of the vehicle up to a maximum speed of 10 km/h, provided that the following conditions are fulfilled:

(a)

the devices shall be activated and deactivated manually by a separate switch;

| (b) | if so activated, they may remain illuminated after reverse gear is disengaged; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

if so activated, they may remain illuminated after reverse gear is disengaged;

| (c) | they shall be automatically switched off if the forward speed of the vehicle exceeds 10 km/h, regardless of the position of the separate switch; in this case they shall remain switched off until deliberately being switched on again. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

they shall be automatically switched off if the forward speed of the vehicle exceeds 10 km/h, regardless of the position of the separate switch; in this case they shall remain switched off until deliberately being switched on again.

6.4.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Tell-tale optional

6.4.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

None

6.5.   Direction-indicator lamp (Regulation No 6)

Direction-indicator lamp

6.5.1.   Presence (see figure below)

Presence

Mandatory. Types of direction-indicator lamps fall into categories (1, 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b, 5 and 6) the assembly of which on one vehicle constitutes an arrangement (‘A’ and ‘B’).

Arrangement ‘A’ shall apply to all motor vehicles.

Arrangement ‘B’ shall apply to trailers only.

6.5.2.   Number

Number

According to the arrangement

6.5.3.   Arrangements (see figure below)

Arrangements

A: two front direction-indicator lamps of the following categories:

A

| | 1 or 1a or 1b
  If the distance between the edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of this lamp and that of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the dipped-beam headlamp and/or the front fog lamp, if there is one, is at least 40 mm; |
| --- | --- |

1 or 1a or 1b

If the distance between the edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of this lamp and that of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the dipped-beam headlamp and/or the front fog lamp, if there is one, is at least 40 mm;

| | 1a or 1b
  If the distance between the edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of this lamp and that of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the dipped-beam headlamp and/or the front fog lamp, if there is one, is greater than 20 mm and less than 40 mm; |
| --- | --- |

1a or 1b

If the distance between the edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of this lamp and that of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the dipped-beam headlamp and/or the front fog lamp, if there is one, is greater than 20 mm and less than 40 mm;

| | 1b
  If the distance between the edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of this lamp and that of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the dipped-beam headlamp and/or the front fog lamp, if there is one, is less than or equal to 20 mm; |
| --- | --- |

1b

If the distance between the edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of this lamp and that of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the dipped-beam headlamp and/or the front fog lamp, if there is one, is less than or equal to 20 mm;

Two rear direction-indicator lamps (category 2a or 2b);

Two optional lamps (category 2a or 2b) on all vehicles in categories M2, M3, N2, N3;

2

3

2

3

Two side direction-indicator lamps of the categories 5 or 6 (minimum requirements):

| | 5
  for all M1 vehicles;
  for N1, M2 and M3 vehicles not exceeding 6 metres in length. |
| --- | --- |

5

for all M1 vehicles;

1

for N1, M2 and M3 vehicles not exceeding 6 metres in length.

1

2

3

| | 6
  for all N2 and N3 vehicles;
  for N1, M2 and M3 vehicles exceeding 6 metres in length. |
| --- | --- |

6

for all N2 and N3 vehicles;

2

3

for N1, M2 and M3 vehicles exceeding 6 metres in length.

1

2

3

It is permitted to replace category 5 side direction-indicator lamps by category 6 side direction-indicator lamps in all instances.

A maximum of three optional category 5 or one optional category 6 device per side on vehicles of type M2, M3, N2 and N3 exceeding 9 m in length.

2

3

2

3

Where lamps combining the functions of front direction-indicator lamps (categories 1, 1a, 1b) and side direction-indicator lamps (categories 5 or 6) are fitted, two additional side direction- indicator lamps (categories 5 or 6) may be fitted to meet the visibility requirements of paragraph 6.5.5.

B: two rear direction-indicator lamps (category 2a or 2b)

B

Two optional lamps (category 2a or 2b) on all vehicles in categories O2, O3 and O4.

2

3

4

A maximum of three optional category 5 or one optional category 6 device per side on vehicles of type O2, O3 and O4 exceeding 9 m in length

2

3

4

Where an AFS is fitted, the distance to be considered for the choice of the category is the distance between the front direction-indicator lamp and the closest lighting unit in its closest position contributing to or performing a passing beam mode.

6.5.4.   Position

Position

6.5.4.1.   In width the edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis farthest from the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle. This condition shall not apply to the optional rear lamps.

The distance between the inner edges of the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall not be less than 600 mm.

This distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm.

6.5.4.2.   In height above the ground.

6.5.4.2.1.   The height of the light-emitting surface of the side direction-indicator lamps of categories 5 or 6 shall not be:

| Less than | : | 350 mm for M1 and N1 category of vehicles, and 500 mm for all other categories of vehicles, both measured from the lowest point; and |
| --- | --- | --- |
| More than | : | 1 500 mm, measured from the highest point. |

Less than

:

350 mm for M1 and N1 category of vehicles, and 500 mm for all other categories of vehicles, both measured from the lowest point; and

1

1

More than

:

1 500 mm, measured from the highest point.

6.5.4.2.2.   The height of the direction-indicator lamps of categories 1, 1a, 1b, 2a and 2b, measured in accordance with paragraph 5.8, shall not be less than 350 mm or more than 1 500 mm.

6.5.4.2.3.   If the structure of the vehicle does not permit these upper limits, measured as specified above, to be respected, and if the optional rear lamps are not installed, they may be increased to 2 300 mm for side direction-indicator lamps of categories 5 and 6, and to 2 100 mm for the direction-indicator lamps of categories 1, 1a, 1b, 2a and 2b.

6.5.4.2.4.   If optional rear lamps are installed, they shall be placed at a height compatible with the applicable requirements of paragraph 6.5.4.1, the symmetry of the lamps, and at a vertical distance as large as the shape of the bodywork makes it possible, but not less than 600 mm above the mandatory lamps.

6.5.4.3.   In length (see figure below)

The distance between the light-emitting surface of the side direction-indicator lamp (categories 5 and 6) and the transverse plane which marks the forward boundary of the vehicle's overall length, shall not exceed 1 800 mm.

However, this distance shall not exceed 2 500 mm:

| (a) | for M1 and N1 category vehicles; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

for M1 and N1 category vehicles;

1

1

| (b) | for all other categories of vehicles if the structure of the vehicle makes it impossible to comply with the minimum angles of visibility. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

for all other categories of vehicles if the structure of the vehicle makes it impossible to comply with the minimum angles of visibility.

Optional category 5 side direction indicator lamps, shall be fitted, spaced evenly, along the length of the vehicle.

Optional category 6 side direction indicator lamp shall be fitted in the area between the first and last quartiles of the length of a trailer.

6.5.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

6.5.5.1.   Horizontal angles (see figure below)

Vertical angles: 15° above and below the horizontal for direction-indicator lamps of categories 1, 1a, 1b, 2a, 2b and 5. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the lamps are less than 750 mm above the ground; 30° above and 5° below the horizontal for direction-indicator lamps of category 6. The vertical angle above the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the optional rear lamps are not less than 2 100 mm above the ground.

Figure

Figure

(see paragraph 6.5)

Image 17

(15) The value of 5° given for dead angle of visibility to the rear of the side-direction-indicator is an upper limit. d ≤ 1,80 m (for M1 and N1 category vehicles d ≤ 2,50 m).

For M1 and N1 category vehicles, the value of 45° inward for the direction-indicator lamps of categories 1, 1a or 1b, whose lower edge of the apparent surface is less then 750 mm above the ground, may be reduced to 20° under the horizontal plane containing the reference axis of this lamp.

1

1

Image 18

80o

Arrangement B

45o

6.5.5.2.   Or, at the discretion of the manufacturer, for M1 and N1 category vehicles (15):

1

1

15

Front and rear direction-indicator lamps, as well as side-marker lamps

Horizontal angles see figure below:

Image 19

The value of 45° inward for the direction-indicator lamps of categories 1, 1a or 1b, whose lower edge of the apparent surface is less then 750 mm above the ground, may be reduced to 20° under the horizontal plane containing the reference axis of this lamp.

Vertical angles: 15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the lamps are less than 750 mm above the ground.

To be considered visible, the lamp must provide an unobstructed view of the apparent surface of at least 12,5 square centimetres, except for side direction-indicators of categories 5 and 6. The illuminating surface area of any retro-reflector that does not transmit light shall be excluded.

6.5.6.   Orientation

Orientation

According to the specifications for installation by the manufacturer, if any

6.5.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

Direction-indicator lamps shall switch on independently of the other lamps. All direction-indicator lamps on one side of a vehicle shall be switched on and off by means of one control and shall flash in phase.

On M1 and N1 vehicles less than 6 m in length, with an arrangement complying with paragraph 6.5.5.2 above, the amber side-marker lamps, when mounted, shall also flash at the same frequency (in phase) with the direction-indicator lamps.

1

1

6.5.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Operating tell-tale mandatory for direction-indicator lamps of categories 1, 1a, 1b, 2a and 2b. It may be visual or auditory or both. If it is visual it shall be a flashing light which, at least in the event of the malfunction of any of these direction-indicator lamps, is either extinguished, or remains alight without flashing, or shows a marked change of frequency. If it is entirely auditory it shall be clearly audible and shall show a marked change of frequency, at least in the event of the malfunction of any of these direction-indicator lamps.

It shall be activated by the signal produced according to paragraph 6.4.2 of Regulation No 6 or another suitable way (16).

16

If a motor vehicle is equipped to draw a trailer, it shall be fitted with a special visual operational tell-tale for the direction-indicator lamps on the trailer unless the tell-tale of the drawing vehicle allows the failure of any one of the direction-indicator lamps on the vehicle combination thus formed to be detected.

For the optional direction-indicator lamps on motor vehicles and trailers, operating tell-tale shall not be mandatory.

6.5.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

The light shall be a flashing light flashing 90 ± 30 times per minute.

Operation of the light-signal control shall be followed within not more than 1 second by the emission of light and within not more than 1 and 1,5 seconds by its first extinction. If a motor vehicle is equipped to draw a trailer, the control of the direction-indicator lamps on the drawing vehicle shall also operate the indicator lamps of the trailer. In the event of failure, other than short-circuit, of one direction-indicator lamp, the others shall continue to flash, but the frequency in this condition may be different from that prescribed.

6.6.   Hazard warning signal

Hazard warning signal

6.6.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory

The signal shall be given by simultaneous operation of the direction-indicator lamps in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 6.5 above.

6.6.2.   Number

Number

As specified in paragraph 6.5.2.

6.6.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

As specified in paragraph 6.5.3.

6.6.4.   Position

Position

6.6.4.1.   Width: As specified in paragraph 6.5.4.1.

6.6.4.2.   Height: As specified in paragraph 6.5.4.2.

6.6.4.3.   Length: As specified in paragraph 6.5.4.3.

6.6.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

As specified in paragraph 6.5.5.

6.6.6.   Orientation

Orientation

As specified in paragraph 6.5.6.

6.6.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

6.6.7.1.   The signal shall be operated by means of a separate manual control enabling all the direction-indicator lamps to flash in phase.

6.6.7.2.   The hazard warning signal may be activated automatically in the event of a vehicle being involved in a collision or after the de-activation of the emergency stop signal, as specified in paragraph 6.22. In such cases, it may be turned ‘OFF’ manually.

6.6.7.3.   On M1 and N1 vehicles less than 6 m in length, with an arrangement complying with paragraph 6.5.5.2 above, the amber side-marker lamps, when mounted, shall also flash at the same frequency (in phase) with the direction-indicator lamps.

1

1

6.6.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Circuit-closed tell-tale mandatory. Flashing warning light, which can operate in conjunction with the tell-tale(s) specified in paragraph 6.5.8.

6.6.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

As specified in paragraph 6.5.9. If a power-driven vehicle is equipped to draw a trailer the hazard warning signal control shall also be capable of bringing the direction-indicator lamps on the trailer into action. The hazard warning signal shall be able to function even if the device which starts or stops the engine is in a position which makes it impossible to start the engine.

6.7.   Stop lamp (Regulation No 7)

Stop lamp

6.7.1.   Presence

Presence

| Devices of S1 or S2 categories | : | mandatory on all categories of vehicles. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Devices of S3 or S4 category | : | mandatory on M1 and N1 categories of vehicles, except for chassis-cabs and those N1 category vehicles with open cargo space; optional on other categories of vehicles. |

Devices of S1 or S2 categories

:

mandatory on all categories of vehicles.

Devices of S3 or S4 category

:

mandatory on M1 and N1 categories of vehicles, except for chassis-cabs and those N1 category vehicles with open cargo space; optional on other categories of vehicles.

1

1

1

6.7.2.   Number

Number

Two S1 or S2 category devices and one S3 or S4 category device on all categories of vehicles

6.7.2.1.   Except in the case where a category S3 or S4 device is installed, two optional category S1 or S2 devices may be installed on vehicles in categories M2, M3, N2, N3, O2, O3, and O4.

2

3

2

3

2

3

4

6.7.2.2.   Only, when the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle is not located on a fixed body panel but separates one or two movable parts of the vehicle (e.g. doors), and lacks sufficient space to install a single device of the S3 or S4 category on the median longitudinal plane above such movable parts, either:

two devices of the S3 or S4 category type ‘D’ may be installed; or

one device of the S3 or S4 category may be installed offset to the left or to the right of the median longitudinal plane; or

an interdependent lamp system of category S3 or S4 may be installed.

6.7.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement.

6.7.4.   Position

Position

6.7.4.1.   In width:

| | For M1 and N1 category vehicles: | For S1 or S2 categories devices that point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle; |
| --- | --- | --- |

For M1 and N1 category vehicles:

1

1

For S1 or S2 categories devices that point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle;

| | For the distance in between the inner edges of the apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes there is no special requirement. |
| --- | --- |

For the distance in between the inner edges of the apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes there is no special requirement.

| | For all other categories of vehicles: | For S1 or S2 categories devices the distance in between the inner edges of the apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall be not less than 600 mm. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm if the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm. |
| --- | --- | --- |

For all other categories of vehicles:

For S1 or S2 categories devices the distance in between the inner edges of the apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall be not less than 600 mm. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm if the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm.

| | For S3 or S4 category devices: the centre of reference shall be situated on the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. However, in the case where the two devices of the S3 or S4 category are installed, according to paragraph 6.7.2, they shall be positioned as close as possible to the median longitudinal plane, one on each side of this plane. |
| --- | --- |

For S3 or S4 category devices: the centre of reference shall be situated on the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle. However, in the case where the two devices of the S3 or S4 category are installed, according to paragraph 6.7.2, they shall be positioned as close as possible to the median longitudinal plane, one on each side of this plane.

| | In the case where one S3 or S4 category lamp offset from the median longitudinal plane is permitted according to paragraph 6.7.2, this offset shall not exceed 150 mm from the median longitudinal plane to the centre of reference of the lamp. |
| --- | --- |

In the case where one S3 or S4 category lamp offset from the median longitudinal plane is permitted according to paragraph 6.7.2, this offset shall not exceed 150 mm from the median longitudinal plane to the centre of reference of the lamp.

6.7.4.2.   In height:

| 6.7.4.2.1. | For S1 or S2 categories devices: | Above the ground, not less than 350 mm nor more than 1 500 mm (2 100 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 1 500 mm and if the optional lamps are not installed). |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.7.4.2.1.

For S1 or S2 categories devices:

Above the ground, not less than 350 mm nor more than 1 500 mm (2 100 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 1 500 mm and if the optional lamps are not installed).

| | If the optional lamps are installed, they shall be positioned at a height compatible with the requirements of the width and the symmetry of the lamps, and at a vertical distance as large as the shape of the bodywork makes it possible, but not less than 600 mm above the mandatory lamps. |
| --- | --- |

If the optional lamps are installed, they shall be positioned at a height compatible with the requirements of the width and the symmetry of the lamps, and at a vertical distance as large as the shape of the bodywork makes it possible, but not less than 600 mm above the mandatory lamps.

| 6.7.4.2.2. | For S3 or S4 categories devices: | The horizontal plane tangential to the lower edge of the apparent surface shall: either not be more than 150 mm below the horizontal plane tangential to the lower edge of the exposed surface of the glass or glazing of the rear window, or not be less than 850 mm above the ground. |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.7.4.2.2.

For S3 or S4 categories devices:

The horizontal plane tangential to the lower edge of the apparent surface shall: either not be more than 150 mm below the horizontal plane tangential to the lower edge of the exposed surface of the glass or glazing of the rear window, or not be less than 850 mm above the ground.

| | However, the horizontal plane tangential to the lower edge of the apparent surface of a S3 or S4 category device shall be above the horizontal plane tangential to the upper edge of the apparent surface of S1 or S2 categories devices. |
| --- | --- |

However, the horizontal plane tangential to the lower edge of the apparent surface of a S3 or S4 category device shall be above the horizontal plane tangential to the upper edge of the apparent surface of S1 or S2 categories devices.

6.7.4.3.   In length:

6.7.4.4.   For S1 or S2 categories devices: at the rear of the vehicle.

6.7.4.5.   For S3 or S4 categories devices: no special requirement.

6.7.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle:

| | For S1 or S2 categories devices: 45° to the left and to the right of the longitudinal axis of the vehicle; |
| --- | --- |

For S1 or S2 categories devices: 45° to the left and to the right of the longitudinal axis of the vehicle;

| | For S3 or S4 categories devices: 10° to the left and to the right of the longitudinal axis of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

For S3 or S4 categories devices: 10° to the left and to the right of the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.

Vertical angle:

| | For S1 or S2 categories devices: 15° above and below the horizontal. However, the vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5°, if the height of the lamp is less than 750 mm. The vertical angle above the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of optional lamps not less than 2 100 mm above the ground; |
| --- | --- |

For S1 or S2 categories devices: 15° above and below the horizontal. However, the vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5°, if the height of the lamp is less than 750 mm. The vertical angle above the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of optional lamps not less than 2 100 mm above the ground;

| | For S3 or S4 categories devices: 10° above and 5° below the horizontal. |
| --- | --- |

For S3 or S4 categories devices: 10° above and 5° below the horizontal.

6.7.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Towards the rear of the vehicle

6.7.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

6.7.7.1.   All stop lamps shall light up simultaneously when the braking system provides the relevant signal defined in Regulation Nos 13 and 13-H.

6.7.7.2.   The stop lamps need not function if the device, which starts and/or stops the engine, is in a position that makes it impossible for the engine to operate.

6.7.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Tell-tale optional; where fitted, this tell-tale shall be an operating tell-tale consisting of a non-flashing warning light which comes on in the event of the malfunctioning of the stop lamps.

6.7.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

6.7.9.1.   The S3 or S4 category device may not be reciprocally incorporated with any other lamp.

6.7.9.2.   The S3 or S4 category device may be installed outside or inside the vehicle.

6.7.9.2.1.   In the case where it is installed inside the vehicle:

The light emitted shall not cause discomfort to the driver through the devices for indirect vision and/or other surfaces of the vehicle (i.e. rear window).

6.8.   Rear registration plate lamp (Regulation No 4)

Rear registration plate lamp

6.8.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory

6.8.2.   Number

Number

Such that the device illuminates the site of the registration plate

6.8.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

Such that the device illuminates the site of the registration plate

6.8.4.   Position

Position

6.8.4.1.   In width: such that the device illuminates the site of the registration plate.

In width

6.8.4.2.   In height: such that the device illuminates the site of the registration plate.

In height

6.8.4.3.   In length: such that the device illuminates the site of the registration plate.

In length

6.8.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Such that the device illuminates the site of the registration plate

6.8.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Such that the device illuminates the site of the registration plate

6.8.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

In accordance with paragraph 5.11

6.8.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Tell-tale optional. If it exists, its function shall be carried out by the tell-tale required for the front and rear position lamps.

6.8.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

When the rear registration plate lamp is combined with the rear position lamp, reciprocally incorporated in the stop lamp or in the rear fog lamp, the photometric characteristics of the rear registration plate lamp may be modified during the illumination of the stop lamp or the rear fog lamp.

6.9.   Front position lamp (Regulation No 7)

Front position lamp

6.9.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory on all motor vehicles

Mandatory on trailers over 1 600 mm wide

Optional on trailers which are not more than 1 600 mm wide

6.9.2.   Number

Number

Two

6.9.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement.

6.9.4.   Position

Position

6.9.4.1.   In width: that point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

In the case of a trailer, that point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is farthest from the median longitudinal plane shall not be more than 150 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

The distance between the inner edges of the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall:

| | For M1 and N1 category vehicles: No special requirement; |
| --- | --- |

For M1 and N1 category vehicles: No special requirement;

1

1

| | For all other categories of vehicles: Not less than 600 mm. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm. |
| --- | --- |

For all other categories of vehicles: Not less than 600 mm. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm.

6.9.4.2.   In height: above the ground, not less than 350 mm nor more than 1 500 mm (2 100 mm for O1 and O2 categories of vehicles, or if for any other categories of vehicles the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 1 500 mm).

1

2

6.9.4.3.   In length: no individual specification.

6.9.4.4.   Where the front position lamp and another lamp are reciprocally incorporated, the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the other lamp shall be used to verify compliance with the positioning requirements (paragraphs 6.9.4.1 to 6.9.4.3).

6.9.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

6.9.5.1.   Horizontal angle for the two position lamps:

45° inwards and 80° outwards

For M1 and N1 category vehicles where the lower edge of the apparent surface of the lamps is less then 750 mm above the ground, the value of 45° inward may be reduced to 20° under the horizontal plane containing the reference axis of this lamp.

1

1

In the case of trailers, the angle inwards may be reduced to 5°.

Vertical angle: 15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of lamps less than 750 mm above the ground.

6.9.5.2.   For M1 and N1 category vehicles, as an alternative to paragraph 6.9.5.1, at the discretion of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, and only if a front side-marker lamp is installed on the vehicle.

1

1

Horizontal angle: 45° outwards to 45° inwards.

Where the lower edge of the apparent surface of the lamps is less then 750 mm above the ground, the value of 45° inward may be reduced to 20° under the horizontal plane containing the reference axis of this lamp.

Vertical angle: 15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the lamps are less than 750 mm above the ground.

To be considered visible, the lamp shall provide an unobstructed view of the apparent surface of at least 12,5 square centimetres. The illuminating surface area of any retro-reflector that does not transmit light shall be excluded.

6.9.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Forwards

6.9.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

In accordance with paragraph 5.11

However, if a front position lamp is reciprocally incorporated with a direction-indicator the electrical connection of the front position lamp on the relevant side of the vehicle or the reciprocally incorporated part of it may be such that it is switched off during the entire period (both ON and OFF cycle) of activation of the direction-indicator lamp.

6.9.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Circuit-closed tell-tale mandatory. This tell-tale shall be non-flashing and shall not be required if the instrument panel lighting can only be turned on simultaneously with the front position lamps.

6.9.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

6.9.9.1.   If one or more infrared radiation generator(s) is (are) installed inside the front position lamp, it (they) is (are) allowed to be activated only when the headlamp on the same side of the vehicle is switched on and the vehicle is in forward motion. In the event that the front position lamp or the headlamp on the same side fails, the infrared radiation generator(s) shall be automatically switched off.

6.9.9.2.   In case an AFS providing a bending mode is installed, the front position lamp may be swivelled together with a lighting unit to which it is reciprocally incorporated.

6.10.   Rear position lamp (Regulation No 7)

Rear position lamp

6.10.1.   Presence

Presence

Devices of R or R1 or R2 categories: Mandatory

6.10.2.   Number

Number

Two

6.10.2.1.   Except the case where end-outline marker lamps are installed, two optional position lamps may be installed on all vehicles in categories M2, M3, N2, N3, O2, O3, and O4.

2

3

2

3

2

3

4

6.10.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.10.4.   Position

Position

6.10.4.1.   In width: that point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle. This condition shall not apply to the optional rear lamps.

The distance between the inner edges of the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall:

For M1 and N1 category vehicles: have no special requirement;

1

1

For all other categories of vehicles: be not less than 600 mm. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm.

6.10.4.2.   In height: above the ground, not less than 350 mm nor more than 1 500 mm (2 100 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 1 500 mm and if the optional lamps are not installed). If the optional lamps are installed, they shall be placed at a height compatible with the applicable requirements of paragraph 6.10.4.1, the symmetry of the lamps, and at a vertical distance as large as the shape of the bodywork makes it possible, but not less than 600 mm above the mandatory lamps.

6.10.4.3.   In length: The rear of the vehicle.

6.10.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

6.10.5.1.   Horizontal angle: 45° inwards and 80° outwards.

Vertical angle: 15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of lamps less than 750 mm above the ground. The vertical angle above the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of optional lamps not less than 2 100 mm above the ground.

6.10.5.2.   For M1 and N1 category vehicles, as an alternative to paragraph 6.10.5.1, at the discretion of the manufacturer or his duly accredited representative, and only if a rear side-marker lamp is installed on the vehicle.

1

1

Horizontal angle: 45° outwards to 45° inwards.

Vertical angle: 15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° if the lamps are less than 750 mm above the ground.

To be considered visible, the lamp shall provide an unobstructed view of the apparent surface of at least 12,5 square centimetres. The illuminating surface area of any retro-reflector that does not transmit light shall be excluded.

6.10.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Rearwards

6.10.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

In accordance with paragraph 5.11

However, if a rear position lamp is reciprocally incorporated with a direction-indicator, the electrical connection of the rear position lamp on the relevant side of the vehicle or the reciprocally incorporated part of it may be such that it is switched OFF during the entire period (both ON and OFF cycle) of activation of the direction-indicator lamp.

6.10.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Circuit-closed tell-tale mandatory. It shall be combined with that of the front position lamps.

6.10.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

None

6.11.   Rear fog lamp (Regulation No 38)

Rear fog lamp

6.11.1.   Presence

Presence

Devices of F or F1 or F2 categories: Mandatory

6.11.2.   Number

Number

One or two

6.11.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.11.4.   Position

Position

6.11.4.1.   In width: if there is only one rear fog lamp, it shall be on the opposite side of the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle to the direction of traffic prescribed in the country of registration, the centre of reference may also be situated on the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle.

6.11.4.2.   In height: not less than 250 mm nor more than 1 000 mm above the ground. For category N3G (off-road) vehicles, the maximum height may be increased to 1 200 mm.

3

6.11.4.3.   In length: at the rear of the vehicle.

6.11.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Defined by angles α and ß as specified in paragraph 2.13:

| α | = | 5° upwards and 5° downwards; |
| --- | --- | --- |
| ß | = | 25° to right and to left. |

α

=

5° upwards and 5° downwards;

ß

=

25° to right and to left.

6.11.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Rearwards.

6.11.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

These shall be such that:

| 6.11.7.1. | The rear fog lamp(s) cannot be switched on unless the main beams, dipped beams or front fog lamps are lit; |
| --- | --- |

6.11.7.1.

The rear fog lamp(s) cannot be switched on unless the main beams, dipped beams or front fog lamps are lit;

| 6.11.7.2. | The rear fog lamp(s) can be switched off independently of any other lamp; |
| --- | --- |

6.11.7.2.

The rear fog lamp(s) can be switched off independently of any other lamp;

| 6.11.7.3. | Either of the following applies:






  6.11.7.3.1. | The rear fog lamp(s) may continue to operate until the position lamps are switched off, and the rear fog lamp(s) shall then remain off until deliberately switched on again; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.11.7.3.

Either of the following applies:

6.11.7.3.1.

The rear fog lamp(s) may continue to operate until the position lamps are switched off, and the rear fog lamp(s) shall then remain off until deliberately switched on again;

| 6.11.7.3.2. | A warning, at least audible, additional to the mandatory tell-tale (paragraph 6.11.8) shall be given if the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn and the driver's door is opened, whether the lamps in (paragraph 6.11.7.1) are on or off, whilst the rear fog lamp switch is in the ‘ON’ position. |
| --- | --- |

6.11.7.3.2.

A warning, at least audible, additional to the mandatory tell-tale (paragraph 6.11.8) shall be given if the ignition is switched off or the ignition key is withdrawn and the driver's door is opened, whether the lamps in (paragraph 6.11.7.1) are on or off, whilst the rear fog lamp switch is in the ‘ON’ position.

| 6.11.7.4. | Except as provided in paragraphs 6.11.7.1, 6.11.7.3 and 6.11.7.5, the operation of the rear fog lamp(s) shall not be affected by switching ON or OFF any other lamps. |
| --- | --- |

6.11.7.4.

Except as provided in paragraphs 6.11.7.1, 6.11.7.3 and 6.11.7.5, the operation of the rear fog lamp(s) shall not be affected by switching ON or OFF any other lamps.

| 6.11.7.5. | The rear fog lamp(s) of a drawing motor vehicle may be automatically switched off while a trailer is connected and the rear fog lamp(s) of the trailer is (are) activated. |
| --- | --- |

6.11.7.5.

The rear fog lamp(s) of a drawing motor vehicle may be automatically switched off while a trailer is connected and the rear fog lamp(s) of the trailer is (are) activated.

6.11.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Circuit-closed tell-tale mandatory. An independent non-flashing warning light.

6.11.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

In all cases, the distance between the rear fog lamp and each stop lamp shall be greater than 100 mm.

6.12.   Parking lamp (Regulation No 77 or 7)

Parking lamp

6.12.1.   Presence

Presence

On motor vehicles not exceeding 6 m in length and not exceeding 2 m in width, optional

On all other vehicles, prohibited

6.12.2.   Number

Number

According to the arrangement

6.12.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

Either two lamps at the front and two lamps at the rear, or one lamp on each side

6.12.4.   Position

Position

6.12.4.1.   In width: that point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

Furthermore, if there are two lamps, they shall be on the sides of the vehicle.

6.12.4.2.   In height:

| | For M1 and N1 category vehicles: no special requirement; |
| --- | --- |

For M1 and N1 category vehicles: no special requirement;

1

1

| | For all other categories of vehicles: above the ground, not less than 350 mm nor more than 1 500 mm (2 100 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 1 500 mm). |
| --- | --- |

For all other categories of vehicles: above the ground, not less than 350 mm nor more than 1 500 mm (2 100 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 1 500 mm).

6.12.4.3.   In length: no special requirement.

6.12.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle: 45° outwards, forwards and rearwards.

Vertical angle: 15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5°, however, if the height of the lamp is less than 750 mm.

6.12.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Such that the lamps meet the requirements for visibility forwards and rearwards

6.12.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

The connection shall allow the parking lamp(s) on the same side of the vehicle to be lit independently of any other lamps.

The parking lamp(s) and, if applicable, the front and rear position lamps according to paragraph 6.12.9 below, shall be able to operate even if the device which starts the engine is in a position which makes it impossible for the engine to operate. A device which automatically deactivates these lamps as a function of time is prohibited.

6.12.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Circuit-closed tell-tale optional. If there is one, it shall not be possible to confuse it with the tell-tale for the front and rear position lamps.

6.12.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

The functioning of this lamp may also be performed by simultaneously switching on the front and rear position lamps on the same side of the vehicle. In this case, lamps that meet the requirements of front or rear position lamps are deemed to meet the requirements of parking lamps.

6.13.   End-outline marker lamp (Regulation No 7)

End-outline marker lamp

6.13.1.   Presence

Presence

Devices of A or AM categories (visible from the front), and devices of R, R1, R2, RM1 or RM2 categories (visible from the rear):

1

2

1

2

Mandatory on vehicles exceeding 2,10 m in width. Optional on vehicles between 1,80 and 2,10 m in width. On chassis-cabs the rear end-outline marker lamps are optional.

6.13.2.   Number

Number

Two visible from the front and two visible from the rear.

Optional: additional lamps may be fitted as follows:

| (a) | two visible from the front; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

two visible from the front;

| (b) | two visible from the rear. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

two visible from the rear.

6.13.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.13.4.   Position

Position

6.13.4.1.   In width:

Front and rear: as close as possible to the extreme outer edge of the vehicle. This condition is deemed to have been met when the point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane is not more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

6.13.4.2.   In height:

| | Front: Motor vehicles — the horizontal plane tangential to the upper edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the device shall not be lower than the horizontal plane tangential to the upper edge of the transparent zone of the wind-screen.
  Trailers and semi-trailers — at the maximum height compatible with the requirements relating to the width, design and operational requirements of the vehicle and to the symmetry of the lamps. |
| --- | --- |

Front: Motor vehicles — the horizontal plane tangential to the upper edge of the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the device shall not be lower than the horizontal plane tangential to the upper edge of the transparent zone of the wind-screen.

Trailers and semi-trailers — at the maximum height compatible with the requirements relating to the width, design and operational requirements of the vehicle and to the symmetry of the lamps.

| | Rear: At the maximum height compatible with the requirements relating to the width, design and operational requirements of the vehicle and to the symmetry of the lamps. |
| --- | --- |

Rear: At the maximum height compatible with the requirements relating to the width, design and operational requirements of the vehicle and to the symmetry of the lamps.

Both optional and mandatory (as applicable) lamps to be fitted as far separated in height as practicable and compatible with design/operational requirements of the vehicle and symmetry of the lamps.

6.13.4.3.   In length, no special requirement.

The additional lamps visible from the front, as specified in paragraph 6.13.4.2, as close as practicable to the rear. However, the distance between the additional lamps and the rear of the vehicle shall not exceed 400 mm.

6.13.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle: 80° outwards.

Vertical angle: 5° above and 20° below the horizontal.

6.13.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Such that the lamps meet the requirements for visibility forwards and rearwards

6.13.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

In accordance with paragraph 5.11

6.13.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Tell-tale optional. If it exists, its function shall be carried out by the tell-tale required for the front and rear position lamps.

6.13.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

Provided that all other requirements are met, the mandatory or optional lamps, visible from the front and the mandatory or optional lamps visible from the rear on the same side of the vehicle may be combined into one device.

Two of the lamps visible from the rear may be grouped, combined or reciprocally incorporated in accordance with paragraph 5.7.

The position of an end-outline marker lamp in relation to corresponding position lamp shall be such that the distance between the projections on a transverse vertical plane of the points nearest to one another on the apparent surfaces in the direction of the respective reference axes of the two lamps considered is not less than 200 mm.

6.14.   Rear retro-reflector, non-triangular (Regulation No 3)

Rear retro-reflector, non-triangular

6.14.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory on motor vehicles

Provided that they are grouped together with the other rear light-signalling devices, optional on trailers

6.14.2.   Number

Number

Two, the performances of which shall conform to the requirements concerning Class IA or IB retro-reflectors in Regulation No 3. Additional retro-reflecting devices and materials (including two retro-reflectors not complying with paragraph 6.14.4 below), are permitted provided they do not impair the effectiveness of the mandatory lighting and light-signalling devices.

6.14.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.14.4.   Position

Position

6.14.4.1.   In width: that point on the illuminating surface which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

The distance between the inner edges of the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall:

| | For M1 and N1 category vehicles: have no special requirement; |
| --- | --- |

For M1 and N1 category vehicles: have no special requirement;

1

1

| | For all other categories of vehicles: be not less than 600 mm. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm. |
| --- | --- |

For all other categories of vehicles: be not less than 600 mm. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm.

6.14.4.2.   In height: Above the ground, not less than 250 mm nor more than 900 mm (not more than 1 200 mm if grouped with any rear lamp(s), 1 500 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 900 mm or 1 200 mm respectively).

6.14.4.3.   In length: at the rear of the vehicle.

6.14.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle: 30° inwards and outwards.

Vertical angle: 10° above and below horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of a retro-reflector less than 750 mm above the ground.

6.14.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Rearwards

6.14.7.   Other requirements

Other requirements

The illuminating surface of the retro-reflector may have parts in common with the apparent surface of any other lamp situated at the rear.

6.15.   Rear retro-reflector, triangular (Regulation No 3)

Rear retro-reflector, triangular

6.15.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory on trailers

Prohibited on motor vehicles

6.15.2.   Number

Number

Two, the performances of which shall conform to the requirements concerning Class IIIA or Class IIIB retro-reflectors in Regulation No 3. Additional retro-reflecting devices and materials (including two retro-reflectors not complying with paragraph 6.15.4 below), are permitted provided they do not impair the effectiveness of the mandatory lighting and light-signalling devices.

6.15.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

The apex of the triangle shall be directed upwards.

6.15.4.   Position

Position

6.15.4.1.   In width: that point on the illuminating surface which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

The inner edges of the retro-reflectors shall not be less than 600 mm apart. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm if the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm.

6.15.4.2.   In height: Above the ground, not less than 250 mm nor more than 900 mm (not more than 1 200 mm if grouped with any rear lamp(s), 1 500 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 900 mm or 1 200 mm respectively).

6.15.4.3.   In length: at the rear of the vehicle.

6.15.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle: 30° inwards and outwards.

Vertical angle: 15° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of a retro-reflector less than 750 mm above the ground.

6.15.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Rearwards

6.15.7.   Other requirements

Other requirements

The illuminating surface of the retro-reflector may have parts in common with the apparent surface of any other lamp situated at the rear.

6.16.   Front retro-reflector, non-triangular (Regulation No 3)

Front retro-reflector, non-triangular

6.16.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory on trailers.

Mandatory on motor vehicles having all forward facing lamps with reflectors concealable

Optional on other motor vehicles

6.16.2.   Number

Number

Two, the performances of which shall conform to the requirements concerning Class IA or IB retro-reflectors in Regulation No 3. Additional retro-reflecting devices and materials (including two retro-reflectors not complying with paragraph 6.16.4 below), are permitted provided they do not impair the effectiveness of the mandatory lighting and light-signalling devices.

6.16.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.16.4.   Position

Position

6.16.4.1.   In width: that point on the illuminating surface which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

In the case of a trailer, the point of the illuminating surface which is farthest from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane shall not be farther than 150 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

The distance between the inner edges of the two apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall:

| | For M1 and N1 category vehicles: have no special requirement; |
| --- | --- |

For M1 and N1 category vehicles: have no special requirement;

1

1

| | For all other categories of vehicles: be not less than 600 mm. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm. |
| --- | --- |

For all other categories of vehicles: be not less than 600 mm. This distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm.

6.16.4.2.   In height: above the ground, not less than 250 mm nor more than 900 mm (1 500 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 900 mm).

6.16.4.3.   In length: at the front of the vehicle.

6.16.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle, 30° inwards and outwards. In the case of trailers, the angle inwards may be reduced to 10°. If because of the construction of the trailers this angle cannot be met by the mandatory retro-reflectors, then additional (supplementary) retro-reflectors shall be fitted, without the width limitation (paragraph 6.16.4.1), which shall, in conjunction with the mandatory retro-reflectors, give the necessary visibility angle.

Vertical angle: 10° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of a retro-reflector less than 750 mm above the ground.

6.16.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Towards the front

6.16.7.   Other requirements

Other requirements

The illuminating surface of the retro-reflector may have parts in common with the apparent surface of any other lamp situated at the front.

6.17.   Side retro-reflector, non-triangular (Regulation No 3)

Side retro-reflector, non-triangular

6.17.1.   Presence

Presence

| Mandatory | : | On all motor vehicles the length of which exceeds 6 m.
  On all trailers. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Optional | : | On motor vehicles the length of which does not exceed 6 m. |

Mandatory

:

On all motor vehicles the length of which exceeds 6 m.

On all trailers.

Optional

:

On motor vehicles the length of which does not exceed 6 m.

6.17.2.   Number

Number

Such that the requirements for longitudinal positioning are complied with. The performances of these devices shall conform to the requirements concerning Class IA or IB retro-reflectors in Regulation No 3. Additional retro-reflecting devices and materials (including two retro-reflectors not complying with paragraph 6.17.4 below), are permitted provided they do not impair the effectiveness of the mandatory lighting and light-signalling devices.

6.17.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.17.4.   Position

Position

6.17.4.1.   In width: no special requirement

6.17.4.2.   In height: Above the ground, not less than 250 mm nor more than 900 mm (not more than 1 200 mm if grouped with any lamp(s), 1 500 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 900 mm or 1 200 mm respectively or if the presence of the device is not mandatory according to paragraph 6.17.1).

6.17.4.3.   In length: at least one side retro-reflector shall be fitted to the middle third of the vehicle, the foremost side retro-reflector being not further than 3 m from the front;

The distance between two adjacent side retro-reflectors shall not exceed 3 m. This does not, however, apply to M1 and N1 category vehicles.

1

1

If the structure, design or the operational use of the vehicle makes it impossible to comply with such a requirement, this distance may be increased to 4 m. The distance between the rearmost side retro-reflector and the rear of the vehicle shall not exceed 1 m.

However, for motor vehicles the length of which does not exceed 6 m, it is sufficient to have one side retro-reflector fitted within the first third and/or one within the last third of the vehicle length. For M1 vehicles the length of which exceeds 6 m but does not exceed 7 m it is sufficient to have one side retro-reflector fitted not further than 3 m from the front and one within the last third of the vehicle length.

1

6.17.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

| Horizontal angle | : | 45° to the front and to the rear. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Vertical angle | : | 10° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of a retro-reflector less than 750 mm above the ground. |

Horizontal angle

:

45° to the front and to the rear.

Vertical angle

:

10° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of a retro-reflector less than 750 mm above the ground.

6.17.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Towards the side

6.17.7.   Other requirements

Other requirements

The illuminating surface of the side retro-reflector may have parts in common with the apparent surface of any other side lamp.

6.18.   Side-marker lamps (Regulation No 91)

Side-marker lamps

6.18.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory: On all vehicles the length of which exceeds 6 m, except for chassis-cabs.

The SM1 type of side-marker lamp shall be used on all categories of vehicles; however the SM2 type of side-marker lamps may be used on the M1 category of vehicles.

1

In addition, on M1 and N1 category vehicles less than 6 m in length, side-marker lamps shall be used, if they supplement the reduced geometric visibility requirements of front position lamps conforming to paragraph 6.9.5.2 and rear position lamps conforming to paragraph 6.10.5.2.

1

1

Optional: On all other vehicles.

The SM1 or SM2 types of side-marker lamps may be used.

6.18.2.   Minimum number per side

Minimum number per side

Such that the rules for longitudinal positioning are complied with.

6.18.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No individual specifications.

6.18.4.   Position

Position

6.18.4.1.   In width: no individual specifications.

6.18.4.2.   In height: Above the ground, not less than 250 mm nor more than 1 500 mm (2 100 mm if the shape of the bodywork makes it impossible to keep within 1 500 mm).

6.18.4.3.   In length: at least one side-marker lamp shall be fitted to the middle third of the vehicle, the foremost side-marker lamp being not further than 3 m from the front. The distance between two adjacent side-marker lamps shall not exceed 3 m. If the structure, design or the operational use of the vehicle makes it impossible to comply with such a requirement, this distance may be increased to 4 m.

The distance between the rearmost side-marker lamp and the rear of the vehicle shall not exceed 1 m.

However, for vehicles the length of which does not exceed 6 m and for chassis-cabs it is sufficient to have one side-marker lamp fitted within the first third and/or within the last third of the vehicle length. For M1 vehicles the length of which exceeds 6 m but does not exceed 7 m it is sufficient to have one side-marker lamp fitted not further than 3 m from the front and one within the last third of the vehicle length.

1

6.18.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Horizontal angle: 45° to the front and to the rear; however, for vehicles on which the installation of the side-marker lamps is optional this value can be reduced to 30°.

If the vehicle is equipped with side-marker lamps used to supplement the reduced geometric visibility of front and rear direction-indicator lamps conforming to paragraph 6.5.5.2 and/or position lamps conforming to paragraphs 6.9.5.2 and 6.10.5.2, the angles are 45° towards the front and rear ends of the vehicle and 30° towards the centre of the vehicle (see the figure in paragraph 6.5.5.2 above).

Vertical angle: 10° above and below the horizontal. The vertical angle below the horizontal may be reduced to 5° in the case of a side-marker lamp less than 750 mm above the ground.

6.18.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Towards the side

6.18.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

On M1 and N1 category vehicles less than 6 m in length amber side-marker lamps may be wired to flash, provided that this flashing is in phase and at the same frequency with the direction-indicator lamps at the same side of the vehicle.

1

1

For all other categories of vehicles: no individual specification.

6.18.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Tell-tale optional. If it exists its function shall be carried out by the tell-tale required for the front and rear position lamps.

6.18.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

When the rearmost side-marker lamp is combined with the rear position lamp reciprocally incorporated with the rear fog lamp or stop lamp, the photometric characteristics of the side-marker lamp may be modified during the illumination of the rear fog lamp or stop lamp.

Rear side-marker lamps shall be amber if they flash with the rear direction-indicator lamp.

6.19.   Daytime running lamp (Regulation No 87) (17)

Daytime running lamp

17

6.19.1.   Presence

Presence

Mandatory on motor vehicles. Prohibited on trailers.

6.19.2.   Number

Number

Two

6.19.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.19.4.   Position

Position

6.19.4.1.   In width: the distance between the inner edges of the apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall not be less than 600 mm.

This distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm.

6.19.4.2.   In height: above the ground not less than 250 mm nor more than 1 500 mm.

6.19.4.3.   In length: at the front of the vehicle. This requirement shall be deemed to be satisfied if the light emitted does not cause discomfort to the driver either directly, or indirectly through the devices for indirect vision and/or other reflecting surfaces of the vehicle.

6.19.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

| Horizontal | : | outwards 20° and inwards 20°. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Vertical | : | upwards 10° and downwards 10°. |

Horizontal

:

outwards 20° and inwards 20°.

Vertical

:

upwards 10° and downwards 10°.

6.19.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Towards the front

6.19.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

6.19.7.1.   The daytime running lamps shall be switched ON automatically when the device which starts and/or stops the engine (propulsion system) is set in a position which makes it possible for the engine (propulsion system) to operate. However, the daytime running lamps may remain OFF while the following conditions exist.

6.19.7.1.1.   The automatic transmission control is in the park position; or

6.19.7.1.2.   The parking brake is in the applied position; or

6.19.7.1.3.   Prior to the vehicle being set in motion for the first time after each manual activation of the propulsion system.

6.19.7.2.   The daytime running lamps may be switched OFF manually when the vehicle speed does not exceed 10 km/h provided they switch ON automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h or when the vehicle has travelled more than 100 m and they remain ON until deliberately switched off again.

6.19.7.3.   The daytime running lamp shall switch OFF automatically when the device which starts and/or stops the engine (propulsion system) is set in a position which makes it impossible for the engine (propulsion system) to operate or the front fog lamps or headlamps are switched ON, except when the latter are used to give intermittent luminous warnings at short intervals (18).

18

6.19.7.4.   The lamps referred to in paragraph 5.11 are not switched ON when the daytime running lamps are switched ON, except if daytime running lamps are operating according to paragraph 6.2.7.6.2.

6.19.7.5.   If the distance between the front direction-indicator lamp and the daytime running lamp is equal or less than 40 mm, the electrical connections of the daytime running lamp on the relevant side of the vehicle may be such that either:

| (a) | it is switched OFF; or |
| --- | --- |

(a)

it is switched OFF; or

| (b) | its luminous intensity is reduced during the entire period (both ON and OFF cycle) of activation of a front direction-indicator lamp. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

its luminous intensity is reduced during the entire period (both ON and OFF cycle) of activation of a front direction-indicator lamp.

6.19.7.6.   If a direction-indicator lamp is reciprocally incorporated with a daytime running lamp, the electrical connections of the daytime running lamp on the relevant side of the vehicle shall be such that the daytime running lamp is switched OFF during the entire period (both ON and OFF cycle) of activation of the direction-indicator lamp.

6.19.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Closed-circuit tell-tale optional

6.19.9.   Other prescriptions

Other prescriptions

No prescription

6.20.   Cornering lamp (Regulation No 119)

Cornering lamp

6.20.1.   Presence

Presence

Optional on motor vehicles

6.20.2.   Number

Number

Two

6.20.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.20.4.   Position

Position

6.20.4.1.   In width: one cornering lamp shall be located on each side of the vehicle's median longitudinal plane.

6.20.4.2.   In length: not further than 1 000 mm from the front.

| In height | : | minimum | : | not less than 250 mm above the ground; |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
| maximum | : | not more than 900 mm above the ground. |

In height

:

minimum

:

not less than 250 mm above the ground;

maximum

:

not more than 900 mm above the ground.

However, no point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis shall be higher than the highest point on the apparent surface in the direction of the reference axis of the dipped-beam headlamp.

6.20.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

Defined by angles α and β as specified in paragraph 2.13:

| α | = | 10° upwards and downwards, |
| --- | --- | --- |
| β | = | 30° to 60° outwards. |

α

=

10° upwards and downwards,

β

=

30° to 60° outwards.

6.20.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Such that the lamps meet the requirements for geometric visibility

6.20.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

The cornering lamps shall be so connected that they cannot be activated unless the main-beam headlamps or the dipped-beam headlamps are switched ON at the same time.

6.20.7.1.   The cornering lamp on one side of the vehicle may only be switched ON automatically when the direction-indicators on the same side of the vehicle are switched ON and/or when the steering angle is changed from the straight-ahead position towards the same side of the vehicle.

The cornering lamp shall be switched OFF automatically when the direction-indicator is switched OFF and/or the steering angle has returned in the straight-ahead position.

6.20.7.2.   When the reversing lamp is switched ON, both cornering lamps may be switched on simultaneously, independently from the steering wheel or direction-indicator position. In this case, the cornering lamps shall be switched OFF when the reversing lamp is switched OFF.

6.20.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

None

6.20.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

The cornering lamps shall not be activated at vehicle speeds above 40 km/h.

6.21.   Conspicuity markings (Regulation No 104)

Conspicuity markings

6.21.1.   Presence

Presence

6.21.1.1.   Prohibited: on vehicles of categories M1 and O1.

1

1

6.21.1.2.   Mandatory:

| 6.21.1.2.1. | To the rear:
  Full contour marking on vehicles exceeding 2 100 mm in width of the following categories:






  (a) | N2 with a maximum mass exceeding 7,5 tonnes and N3 (with the exception of chassis-cabs, incomplete vehicles and tractors for semi-trailers); |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.21.1.2.1.

To the rear:

Full contour marking on vehicles exceeding 2 100 mm in width of the following categories:

(a)

N2 with a maximum mass exceeding 7,5 tonnes and N3 (with the exception of chassis-cabs, incomplete vehicles and tractors for semi-trailers);

2

3

| (b) | O3 and O4 (with the exception of incomplete vehicles). |
| --- | --- |

(b)

O3 and O4 (with the exception of incomplete vehicles).

3

4

| 6.21.1.2.2. | To the side:






  6.21.1.2.2.1. | Partial contour marking on vehicles exceeding 6 000 mm in length (including the drawbar for trailers) of the following categories:






  (a) | N2 with a maximum mass exceeding 7,5 tonnes and N3 (with the exception of chassis-cabs, incomplete vehicles and tractors for semi-trailers); |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

6.21.1.2.2.

To the side:

6.21.1.2.2.1.

Partial contour marking on vehicles exceeding 6 000 mm in length (including the drawbar for trailers) of the following categories:

(a)

N2 with a maximum mass exceeding 7,5 tonnes and N3 (with the exception of chassis-cabs, incomplete vehicles and tractors for semi-trailers);

2

3

| (b) | O3 and O4 (with the exception of incomplete vehicles). |
| --- | --- |

(b)

O3 and O4 (with the exception of incomplete vehicles).

3

4

| 6.21.1.2.3. | A line marking may be installed instead of the mandatory contour marking if the shape, structure, design or operational requirements of the vehicle make it impossible to install the mandatory contour marking. |
| --- | --- |

6.21.1.2.3.

A line marking may be installed instead of the mandatory contour marking if the shape, structure, design or operational requirements of the vehicle make it impossible to install the mandatory contour marking.

| 6.21.1.2.4. | If the exterior surfaces of the bodywork are partially constituted of flexible material, this line marking shall be installed on (a) rigid part(s) of the vehicle. The remaining portion of conspicuity markings may be fitted on the flexible material. However, if the exterior surfaces of the bodywork are fully constituted of flexible material, requirements of paragraph 6.21 shall be met. |
| --- | --- |

6.21.1.2.4.

If the exterior surfaces of the bodywork are partially constituted of flexible material, this line marking shall be installed on (a) rigid part(s) of the vehicle. The remaining portion of conspicuity markings may be fitted on the flexible material. However, if the exterior surfaces of the bodywork are fully constituted of flexible material, requirements of paragraph 6.21 shall be met.

| 6.21.1.2.5. | In cases where the manufacturer, after verification by the technical service, can prove to the satisfaction of the authority responsible for type approval that it is impossible, due to the operational requirements which may require special shape, structure or design of the vehicle, to comply with the requirements contained in paragraphs 6.21.2 to 6.21.7.5, then partial fulfilment of some of these requirements is acceptable. This is conditional upon a portion of the requirements being met where possible, and the application of conspicuity markings that partially meet requirements maximised on the vehicle structure. This may include fitting of additional brackets or plates containing material compliant with Regulation No 104 where structure is available to ensure clear and uniform signalling compatible with the objective of conspicuity.
  Where partial fulfilment is deemed acceptable, retro-reflective devices like retro-reflectors of class IV of Regulation No 3 or brackets containing retro-reflecting material compliant with photometric requirements of Class C of Regulation No 104 may substitute part of the required conspicuity markings. In this case, at least one of these retroreflective devices shall be installed per 1 500 mm.
  The necessary information shall be indicated in the communication form. |
| --- | --- |

6.21.1.2.5.

In cases where the manufacturer, after verification by the technical service, can prove to the satisfaction of the authority responsible for type approval that it is impossible, due to the operational requirements which may require special shape, structure or design of the vehicle, to comply with the requirements contained in paragraphs 6.21.2 to 6.21.7.5, then partial fulfilment of some of these requirements is acceptable. This is conditional upon a portion of the requirements being met where possible, and the application of conspicuity markings that partially meet requirements maximised on the vehicle structure. This may include fitting of additional brackets or plates containing material compliant with Regulation No 104 where structure is available to ensure clear and uniform signalling compatible with the objective of conspicuity.

Where partial fulfilment is deemed acceptable, retro-reflective devices like retro-reflectors of class IV of Regulation No 3 or brackets containing retro-reflecting material compliant with photometric requirements of Class C of Regulation No 104 may substitute part of the required conspicuity markings. In this case, at least one of these retroreflective devices shall be installed per 1 500 mm.

The necessary information shall be indicated in the communication form.

6.21.1.3.   Optional:

| 6.21.1.3.1. | To the rear and to the side: | On all other categories of vehicles, not otherwise specified in paragraphs 6.21.1.1 and 6.21.1.2 above, including the cab of tractor units for semi-trailers and the cab of chassis-cabs. |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.21.1.3.1.

To the rear and to the side:

On all other categories of vehicles, not otherwise specified in paragraphs 6.21.1.1 and 6.21.1.2 above, including the cab of tractor units for semi-trailers and the cab of chassis-cabs.

| | Partial or full contour marking may be applied instead of mandatory line markings, and full contour marking may be applied instead of mandatory partial contour marking. |
| --- | --- |

Partial or full contour marking may be applied instead of mandatory line markings, and full contour marking may be applied instead of mandatory partial contour marking.

| 6.21.1.3.2. | To the front: | Line marking on vehicles of categories O2, O3 and O4 |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.21.1.3.2.

To the front:

Line marking on vehicles of categories O2, O3 and O4

2

3

4

| | Partial or full contour marking may not be applied to the front. |
| --- | --- |

Partial or full contour marking may not be applied to the front.

6.21.2.   Number

Number

According to the presence

6.21.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

The conspicuity markings shall be as close as practicable to horizontal and vertical, compatible with the shape, structure, design and operational requirements of the vehicle; if this is not possible, the full or partial contour markings, when fitted, shall follow as close as practicable the contour of the outer shape of the vehicle.

Furthermore, the conspicuity markings shall be spaced as evenly as possible over the horizontal dimensions of the vehicle such that the total length and/or width of the vehicle can be identified.

6.21.4.   Position

Position

6.21.4.1.   Width

6.21.4.1.1.   The conspicuity marking shall be as close as practicable to the edge of the vehicle.

6.21.4.1.2.   The cumulative horizontal length of the conspicuity marking elements, as mounted on the vehicle, shall equate to at least 80 per cent of the overall width of the vehicle, excluding any horizontal overlap of individual elements.

6.21.4.1.3.   However, if the manufacturer can prove to the satisfaction of the authority responsible for type approval that it is impossible to achieve the value referred to in paragraph 6.21.4.1.2 above, the cumulative length may be reduced to 60 per cent or, if this is not possible in case of especially difficult vehicle designs or applications, to at least 40 per cent and shall be indicated in the communication document and test report (19).

19

6.21.4.2.   Length

6.21.4.2.1.   The conspicuity marking shall be as close as practicable to the ends of the vehicle and reach to within 600 mm of each end of the vehicle (or cab in the case of tractor units for semi-trailers).

| 6.21.4.2.1.1. | For motor vehicles, each end of the vehicle, or in the case of tractors for semi-trailers the each end of the cab; |
| --- | --- |

6.21.4.2.1.1.

For motor vehicles, each end of the vehicle, or in the case of tractors for semi-trailers the each end of the cab;

| 6.21.4.2.1.2. | For trailers, each end of the vehicle (excluding the drawbar). |
| --- | --- |

6.21.4.2.1.2.

For trailers, each end of the vehicle (excluding the drawbar).

6.21.4.2.2.   The cumulative horizontal length of the conspicuity marking elements, as mounted on the vehicle, excluding any horizontal overlap of individual elements, shall equate to at least 80 per cent of:

| 6.21.4.2.2.1. | For motor vehicles, the length of the vehicle excluding the cab, or in the case of tractors for semi-trailers, if fitted, the length of the cab; |
| --- | --- |

6.21.4.2.2.1.

For motor vehicles, the length of the vehicle excluding the cab, or in the case of tractors for semi-trailers, if fitted, the length of the cab;

| 6.21.4.2.2.2. | For trailers, the length of the vehicle (excluding the drawbar). |
| --- | --- |

6.21.4.2.2.2.

For trailers, the length of the vehicle (excluding the drawbar).

6.21.4.2.3.   However, if the manufacturer can prove to the satisfaction of the authority responsible for type approval that it is impossible to achieve the value referred to in paragraph 6.21.4.2.2 above, the cumulative length may be reduced to 60 per cent or, if this is not possible in case of especially difficult vehicle designs or applications, to at least 40 per cent and shall be indicated in the communication document and test report (19).

19

6.21.4.3.   Height

6.21.4.3.1.   Line markings and contour markings lower element(s)

As low as practicable within the range:

| Minimum | : | not less than 250 mm above the ground. |
| --- | --- | --- |
| Maximum | : | not more than 1 500 mm above the ground. |

Minimum

:

not less than 250 mm above the ground.

Maximum

:

not more than 1 500 mm above the ground.

However, a maximum mounting height of 2 500 mm may be accepted where the shape, structure, design or operational conditions of the vehicle prevent compliance with the maximum value of 1 500 mm or, if necessary, to fulfil the requirements of paragraphs 6.21.4.1.2, 6.21.4.1.3, 6.21.4.2.2 and 6.21.4.2.3, or the horizontal positioning of the line marking or the lower element(s) of the contour marking.

The necessary justification for installation of conspicuity material higher than 1 500 mm shall be indicated in the communication form.

6.21.4.3.2.   Contour markings upper element(s):

As high as practicable, but within 400 mm of the upper extremity of the vehicle.

6.21.5.   Visibility

Visibility

The conspicuity marking shall be considered visible, if at least 80 per cent of the illuminating surface of the installed marking is visible when viewed by an observer positioned at any point within the observation planes defined below:

| 6.21.5.1. | for rear and front conspicuity markings (see Annex 11, Figures 1a and 1b) the observation plane is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle situated 25 m from the extreme end of the vehicle and bounded by:






  6.21.5.1.1. | In height, by two horizontal planes 1 m and 3 m respectively above the ground; |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.21.5.1.

for rear and front conspicuity markings (see Annex 11, Figures 1a and 1b) the observation plane is perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle situated 25 m from the extreme end of the vehicle and bounded by:

6.21.5.1.1.

In height, by two horizontal planes 1 m and 3 m respectively above the ground;

| 6.21.5.1.2. | In width, by two vertical planes which form an angle of 4° outwards from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane and which pass through the intersection of the vertical planes parallel to the vehicle's median longitudinal plane delimiting the vehicle's overall width, and the plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle that delimits the end of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

6.21.5.1.2.

In width, by two vertical planes which form an angle of 4° outwards from the vehicle's median longitudinal plane and which pass through the intersection of the vertical planes parallel to the vehicle's median longitudinal plane delimiting the vehicle's overall width, and the plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle that delimits the end of the vehicle.

| 6.21.5.2. | For side conspicuity markings (see Annex 11, Figure 2) the observation plane is parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicles situated 25 m from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle and bounded by:






  6.21.5.2.1. | In height, by two horizontal planes 1 m and 1,5 m respectively above the ground, |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.21.5.2.

For side conspicuity markings (see Annex 11, Figure 2) the observation plane is parallel to the longitudinal median plane of the vehicles situated 25 m from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle and bounded by:

6.21.5.2.1.

In height, by two horizontal planes 1 m and 1,5 m respectively above the ground,

| 6.21.5.2.2. | In width, by two vertical planes which form an angle of 4° outwards from a plane perpendicular to the vehicle's longitudinal axis and which pass through the intersection of the vertical planes perpendicular to the vehicle's longitudinal axis delimiting the vehicle's overall length and the extreme outer edge of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

6.21.5.2.2.

In width, by two vertical planes which form an angle of 4° outwards from a plane perpendicular to the vehicle's longitudinal axis and which pass through the intersection of the vertical planes perpendicular to the vehicle's longitudinal axis delimiting the vehicle's overall length and the extreme outer edge of the vehicle.

6.21.6.   Orientation

Orientation

6.21.6.1.   To the side:

As close as practicable to being parallel to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle, compatible with the shape, structure, design and operation requirements of the vehicle; if this is not possible, it shall follow as close as practicable the contour of the outer shape of the vehicle.

6.21.6.2.   To the rear and to the front:

As close as practicable to being parallel to the transverse plane of the vehicle, compatible with the shape, structure, design and operation requirements of the vehicle, if this is not possible, it shall follow as close as practicable the contour of the outer shape of the vehicle.

6.21.7.   Other requirements

Other requirements

6.21.7.1.   Conspicuity markings shall be considered continuous if the distance between adjacent elements are as small as possible and do not exceed 50 per cent of the shortest adjacent element length. However, if the manufacturer can prove to the satisfaction of the authority responsible for type approval that it is impossible to respect the value of 50 per cent, the distance between adjacent elements may be larger than 50 per cent of the shortest adjacent element, and it shall be as small as possible and not exceed 1 000 mm.

6.21.7.2.   In the case of a partial contour marking, each upper corner shall be described by two lines at 90°, to each other and each at least 250 mm in length; if this is not possible, the marking shall follow as close as practicable the contour of the outer shape of the vehicle.

6.21.7.3.   The distance between the conspicuity marking fitted to the rear of a vehicle and each mandatory stop lamp should be greater than 200 mm.

6.21.7.4.   Where rear marking plates conforming to the 01 series of amendments to Regulation No 70 are installed these may be considered, at the discretion of the manufacturer, as part of the conspicuity marking to the rear, for the purposes of calculating the length of the conspicuity marking and its proximity to the side of the vehicle.

6.21.7.5.   The locations on the vehicle designated for conspicuity markings shall allow for the installation of markings of at least 60 mm in width.

6.22.   Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) (Regulation No 123)

Adaptive front lighting system (AFS)

Where not otherwise specified below, the requirements for main-beam headlamps (paragraph 6.1) and for dipped-beam headlamps (paragraph 6.2) of this Regulation apply to the relevant part of the AFS.

6.22.1.   Presence

Presence

Optional on motor vehicles. Prohibited on trailers

6.22.2.   Number

Number

One

6.22.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirements

6.22.4.   Position

Position

The AFS shall, prior to the subsequent test procedures, be set to the neutral state;

6.22.4.1.   In width and height:

For a given lighting function or mode the requirements indicated in the paragraphs 6.22.4.1.1 through 6.22.4.1.4 below shall be fulfilled by those lighting units which are energised simultaneously for that lighting function or mode of a function, according to the applicant's description.

All dimensions refer to the nearest edge of the apparent surface(s) observed in the direction of the reference axis, of the lighting unit(s).

6.22.4.1.1.   Two symmetrically placed lighting units shall be positioned at a height in compliance with the requirements of the relevant paragraphs 6.1.4 and 6.2.4, where ‘Two symmetrically placed lighting units’ shall be understood to be two lighting units, one on each side of the vehicle, positioned such that the (geometric) centres of gravity of their apparent surfaces are at the same height and at the same distance from the vehicle's longitudinal median plane within a tolerance of 50 mm, each; their light-emitting surfaces, illuminating surfaces, and light outputs, however, may differ;

6.22.4.1.2.   Additional lighting units, if any, on either side of the vehicle shall be positioned at a distance not exceeding 140 mm (20) in horizontal direction (E in the figure) and 400 mm in vertical direction above or below (D in the figure) from the nearest lighting unit;

20

6.22.4.1.3.   None of the additional lighting units described in paragraph 6.22.4.1.2 above shall be positioned lower than 250 mm (F in the figure) nor higher than indicated in paragraph 6.2.4.2 of this Regulation (G in the figure) above the ground;

6.22.4.1.4.   Additionally, in width:

For each mode of the passing beam lighting:

| | the outer edge of the apparent surface of at least one lighting unit on each side of the vehicle shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle (A in the figure); and |
| --- | --- |

the outer edge of the apparent surface of at least one lighting unit on each side of the vehicle shall not be more than 400 mm from the extreme outer edge of the vehicle (A in the figure); and

| | the inner edges of the apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall be not less than 600 mm apart. This does not apply, however, for M1 and N1 category vehicles; for all other categories of motor vehicles this distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm. |
| --- | --- |

the inner edges of the apparent surfaces in the direction of the reference axes shall be not less than 600 mm apart. This does not apply, however, for M1 and N1 category vehicles; for all other categories of motor vehicles this distance may be reduced to 400 mm where the overall width of the vehicle is less than 1 300 mm.

1

1

Figure

Figure

Apparent surfaces of lighting units 1 through 11 of an AFS (example)

Apparent surfaces of lighting units 1 through 11 of an AFS (example)

Image 20

6.22.4.2.   In length:

All lighting units of an AFS shall be mounted at the front. This requirement is deemed to be satisfied if the light emitted does not cause discomfort to the driver either directly, or indirectly through the devices for indirect vision and/or other reflecting surfaces of the vehicle.

6.22.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

On each side of the vehicle, for each lighting function and mode provided:

The angles of geometric visibility prescribed for the respective lighting functions according to paragraphs 6.1.5 and 6.2.5 of this Regulation, shall be met by at least one of the lighting units that are simultaneously energised to perform said function and mode(s), according to the description of the applicant. Individual lighting units may be used to comply with the requirements for different angles.

6.22.6.   Orientation

Orientation

Towards the front

The AFS shall, prior to the subsequent test procedures, be set to the neutral state, emitting the basic passing beam.

6.22.6.1.   Vertical orientation:

| 6.22.6.1.1. | The initial downward inclination of the cut-off of the basic passing beam to be set in the unladen vehicle state with one person in the driver's seat shall be specified with a precision of 0,1 per cent by the manufacturer and indicated in clearly legible and indelible manner on each vehicle, close to either the front lighting system or the manufacturer's plate, by the symbol shown in Annex 7.
  Where differing initial downward inclinations are specified by the manufacturer for different lighting units that provide or contribute to the cut-off of the basic passing beam, these values of downward inclination shall be specified with a precision of 0,1 per cent by the manufacturer and indicated in clearly legible and indelible manner on each vehicle, close to either the relevant lighting units or on the manufacturers plate, in such a way that all the lighting units concerned can be unambiguously identified. |
| --- | --- |

6.22.6.1.1.

The initial downward inclination of the cut-off of the basic passing beam to be set in the unladen vehicle state with one person in the driver's seat shall be specified with a precision of 0,1 per cent by the manufacturer and indicated in clearly legible and indelible manner on each vehicle, close to either the front lighting system or the manufacturer's plate, by the symbol shown in Annex 7.

Where differing initial downward inclinations are specified by the manufacturer for different lighting units that provide or contribute to the cut-off of the basic passing beam, these values of downward inclination shall be specified with a precision of 0,1 per cent by the manufacturer and indicated in clearly legible and indelible manner on each vehicle, close to either the relevant lighting units or on the manufacturers plate, in such a way that all the lighting units concerned can be unambiguously identified.

| 6.22.6.1.2. | The downward inclination of the horizontal part of the ‘cut-off’ of the basic passing beam shall remain between the limits indicated in paragraph 6.2.6.1.2 of this Regulation under all the static loading conditions of the vehicle of Annex 5 to this Regulation; and the initial aiming shall be within the specified values.






  6.22.6.1.2.1. | In case the passing beam is generated by several beams from different lighting units, the provisions according to paragraph 6.22.6.1.2 above apply to each said beam's ‘cut-off’ (if any), which is designed to project into the angular zone, as indicated under item 9.4 of the communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to Regulation No 123. |
| --- | --- | --- |

6.22.6.1.2.

The downward inclination of the horizontal part of the ‘cut-off’ of the basic passing beam shall remain between the limits indicated in paragraph 6.2.6.1.2 of this Regulation under all the static loading conditions of the vehicle of Annex 5 to this Regulation; and the initial aiming shall be within the specified values.

6.22.6.1.2.1.

In case the passing beam is generated by several beams from different lighting units, the provisions according to paragraph 6.22.6.1.2 above apply to each said beam's ‘cut-off’ (if any), which is designed to project into the angular zone, as indicated under item 9.4 of the communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to Regulation No 123.

6.22.6.2.   Headlamp levelling device

6.22.6.2.1.   In the case where a headlamp levelling device is necessary to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 6.22.6.1.2, the device shall be automatic.

6.22.6.2.2.   In the event of a failure of this device, the passing beam shall not assume a position in which the dip is less than it was at the time when the failure of the device occurred.

6.22.6.3.   Horizontal orientation:

For each lighting unit the kink of the elbow of the cut-off line, if any, when projected on the screen, shall coincide with the vertical line through the reference axis of said lighting unit. A tolerance of 0,5 degrees to that side which is the side of the traffic direction shall be allowed. Other lighting units shall be adjusted according to the applicant's specification, as defined according to Annex 10 to Regulation No 123.

6.22.6.4.   Measuring procedure:

After adjustment of the initial setting of beam orientation, the vertical inclination of the passing beam or, when applicable, the vertical inclinations of all the different lighting units that provide or contribute to the cut-off(s) according to paragraph 6.22.6.1.2.1 above of the basic passing beam, shall be verified for all loading conditions of the vehicle in accordance with the specifications in paragraphs 6.2.6.3.1 and 6.2.6.3.2 of this Regulation.

6.22.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

6.22.7.1.   Main beam lighting (if provided by the AFS):

| (a) | The lighting units for the main-beam may be activated either simultaneously or in pairs. For changing over from the dipped-beam to the main-beam at least one pair of lighting units for the main-beam shall be activated. For changing over from the main-beam to the dipped-beam all lighting units for the main-beam shall be de-activated simultaneously; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

The lighting units for the main-beam may be activated either simultaneously or in pairs. For changing over from the dipped-beam to the main-beam at least one pair of lighting units for the main-beam shall be activated. For changing over from the main-beam to the dipped-beam all lighting units for the main-beam shall be de-activated simultaneously;

| (b) | The dipped-beams may remain switched on at the same time as the main-beams; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

The dipped-beams may remain switched on at the same time as the main-beams;

| (c) | Where four concealable lighting units are fitted their raised position shall prevent the simultaneous operation of any additional headlamps fitted, if these are intended to provide light signals consisting of intermittent illumination at short intervals (see paragraph 5.12) in daylight. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

Where four concealable lighting units are fitted their raised position shall prevent the simultaneous operation of any additional headlamps fitted, if these are intended to provide light signals consisting of intermittent illumination at short intervals (see paragraph 5.12) in daylight.

6.22.7.2.   Passing beam lighting:

| (a) | The control for changing over to the dipped-beam shall switch off all main-beam headlamps or de-activate all AFS lighting units for the main-beam simultaneously; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

The control for changing over to the dipped-beam shall switch off all main-beam headlamps or de-activate all AFS lighting units for the main-beam simultaneously;

| (b) | The dipped-beam may remain switched on at the same time as the main-beams; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

The dipped-beam may remain switched on at the same time as the main-beams;

| (c) | In the case of lighting units for the dipped-beam being equipped with gas discharge light sources, the gas-discharge light sources shall remain switched on during the main-beam operation. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

In the case of lighting units for the dipped-beam being equipped with gas discharge light sources, the gas-discharge light sources shall remain switched on during the main-beam operation.

6.22.7.3.   Switching ON and OFF the passing beam may be automatic, however subject to the requirements for ‘Electrical connection’ in paragraph 5.12 of this Regulation.

6.22.7.4.   Automatic operation of the AFS

The changes within and between the provided classes and their modes of the AFS lighting functions as specified below, shall be performed automatically and such that no discomfort, neither for the driver nor for other road users, is caused.

The following conditions apply for the activation of the classes and their modes of the passing beam and, where applicable, of the main-beam.

6.22.7.4.1.   The class C mode(s) of the passing beam shall be activated if no mode of another passing beam class is activated.

6.22.7.4.2.   The class V mode(s) of the passing beam shall not operate unless one or more of the following conditions is/are automatically detected (V-signal applies):

| (a) | Roads in built-up areas and the vehicle's speed not exceeding 60 km/h; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

Roads in built-up areas and the vehicle's speed not exceeding 60 km/h;

| (b) | Roads equipped with a fixed road illumination, and the vehicle's speed not exceeding 60 km/h; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

Roads equipped with a fixed road illumination, and the vehicle's speed not exceeding 60 km/h;

| (c) | A road surface luminance of 1 cd/m2 and/or a horizontal road illumination of 10 lx being exceeded continuously; |
| --- | --- |

(c)

A road surface luminance of 1 cd/m2 and/or a horizontal road illumination of 10 lx being exceeded continuously;

2

| (d) | The vehicle's speed not exceeding 50 km/h. |
| --- | --- |

(d)

The vehicle's speed not exceeding 50 km/h.

6.22.7.4.3.   The class E mode(s) of the passing beam shall not operate unless the vehicle's speed exceeds 70 km/h and one or more of the following conditions is/are automatically detected.

| (a) | The road characteristics correspond to motorway conditions (21) and/or the vehicle's speed exceeds 110 km/h (E-signal applies); |
| --- | --- |

(a)

The road characteristics correspond to motorway conditions (21) and/or the vehicle's speed exceeds 110 km/h (E-signal applies);

21

| (b) | In case of a class E mode of the passing beam which, according to the system's approval documents/communication sheet, complies with a ‘data set’ of Table 6 of Annex 3 to Regulation No 123, only. | Data set E1: the vehicle's speed exceeds 100 km/h (E1-signal applies); |
| --- | --- | --- |

(b)

In case of a class E mode of the passing beam which, according to the system's approval documents/communication sheet, complies with a ‘data set’ of Table 6 of Annex 3 to Regulation No 123, only.

Data set E1: the vehicle's speed exceeds 100 km/h (E1-signal applies);

| | Data set E2: the vehicle's speed exceeds 90 km/h (E2-signal applies); |
| --- | --- |

Data set E2: the vehicle's speed exceeds 90 km/h (E2-signal applies);

| | Data set E3: the vehicle's speed exceeds 80 km/h (E3-signal applies). |
| --- | --- |

Data set E3: the vehicle's speed exceeds 80 km/h (E3-signal applies).

6.22.7.4.4.   The class W-mode(s) of the passing beam shall not operate unless the front fog lamps, if any, are switched OFF and one or more of the following conditions is/are automatically detected (W-signal applies):

| (a) | The wetness of the road has been detected automatically; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

The wetness of the road has been detected automatically;

| (b) | The windshield wiper is switched ON and its continuous or automatically controlled operation has occurred for a period of at least 2 minutes. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

The windshield wiper is switched ON and its continuous or automatically controlled operation has occurred for a period of at least 2 minutes.

6.22.7.4.5.   A mode of a class C, V, E, or W passing beam shall not be modified to become a bending mode of said class (T-signal applies in combination with the signal of said passing beam class according to paragraphs 6.22.7.4.1 through 6.22.7.4.4 above) unless at least one of the following characteristics (or equivalent indications) are evaluated:

| (a) | The angle of lock of the steering; |
| --- | --- |

(a)

The angle of lock of the steering;

| (b) | The trajectory of the centre of gravity of the vehicle. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

The trajectory of the centre of gravity of the vehicle.

In addition the following provisions apply:

| (i) | a horizontal movement of the asymmetric cut-off side-wards from the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, if any, is allowed only when the vehicle is in forward motion (22) and shall be such that the longitudinal vertical plane through the kink of the elbow of the cut-off does not intersect the line of the trajectory of the centre of gravity of the vehicle at distances from the front of the vehicle which are larger than 100 times the mounting height of the respective lighting unit; |
| --- | --- |

(i)

a horizontal movement of the asymmetric cut-off side-wards from the longitudinal axis of the vehicle, if any, is allowed only when the vehicle is in forward motion (22) and shall be such that the longitudinal vertical plane through the kink of the elbow of the cut-off does not intersect the line of the trajectory of the centre of gravity of the vehicle at distances from the front of the vehicle which are larger than 100 times the mounting height of the respective lighting unit;

22

| (ii) | one or more lighting units may be additionally energised only when the horizontal radius of curvature of the trajectory of the centre of gravity of the vehicle is 500 m or less. |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

one or more lighting units may be additionally energised only when the horizontal radius of curvature of the trajectory of the centre of gravity of the vehicle is 500 m or less.

6.22.7.6.   It shall always be possible for the driver to set the AFS to the neutral state and to return it to its automatic operation.

6.22.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

6.22.8.1.   The provisions of paragraphs 6.1.8 (for the main-beam headlamp) and 6.2.8 (for the dipped-beam headlamp) of this Regulation apply to the respective parts of an AFS.

6.22.8.2.   A visual failure tell-tale for AFS is mandatory. It shall be non-flashing. It shall be activated whenever a failure is detected with respect to the AFS control signals or when a failure signal is received in accordance with paragraph 5.9 of Regulation No 123. It shall remain activated while the failure is present. It may be cancelled temporarily, but shall be repeated whenever the device which starts and stops the engine is switched on and off.

6.22.8.3.   A tell-tale to indicate that the driver has set the system into a state according to paragraph 5.8 of Regulation No 123 is optional.

6.22.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

6.22.9.1.   An AFS shall be permitted only in conjunction with the installation of headlamp cleaning device(s) according to Regulation No 45 (23) for at least those lighting units, which are indicated under item 9.3 of the communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to Regulation No 123, if the total objective luminous flux of the light sources of these units exceeds 2 000 lm per side, and which contribute to the class C (basic) passing beam.

23

6.22.9.2.   Verification of compliance with AFS automatic operating requirements

6.22.9.2.1.   The applicant shall demonstrate with a concise description or other means acceptable to the Authority responsible for type approval:

concise description

| (a) | the correspondence of the AFS control signals:






  (i) | to the description required in paragraph 3.2.6 of this Regulation; and |
| --- | --- | --- |

(a)

the correspondence of the AFS control signals:

(i)

to the description required in paragraph 3.2.6 of this Regulation; and

| (ii) | to the respective AFS control signals specified in the AFS type approval documents; and |
| --- | --- |

(ii)

to the respective AFS control signals specified in the AFS type approval documents; and

| (b) | compliance with the automatic operating requirements according to paragraphs 6.22.7.4.1 through 6.22.7.4.5 above. |
| --- | --- |

(b)

compliance with the automatic operating requirements according to paragraphs 6.22.7.4.1 through 6.22.7.4.5 above.

6.22.9.2.2.   To verify, whether, according to the paragraph 6.22.7.4, the AFS automatic operation does not cause any discomfort, the technical service shall perform a test drive which comprises any situation relevant to the system control on the basis of the applicants description; it shall be notified whether all modes are activated, performing and de-activated according to the applicant's description; obvious malfunctioning, if any, to be contested (e.g. excessive angular movement or flicker).

shall

test drive

shall be notified

6.22.9.3.   The aggregate maximum intensity of the lighting units that can be energised simultaneously to provide the main-beam lighting or its modes, if any, shall not exceed 430 000 cd, which corresponds to a reference value of 100.

This maximum intensity shall be obtained by adding together the individual reference marks indicated on the several installation units that are simultaneously used to provide the main-beam.

6.22.9.4.   The means according to the provisions of paragraph 5.8 of Regulation No 123, which allow the vehicle to be used temporarily in a territory with the opposite direction of driving than that for which approval is sought, shall be explained in detail in the owner’s manual.

6.23.   Emergency stop signal

Emergency stop signal

6.23.1.   Presence

Presence

Optional

The emergency stop signal shall be given by the simultaneous operation of all the stop or direction-indicator lamps fitted as described in paragraph 6.22.7.

6.23.2.   Number

Number

As specified in paragraph 6.5.2 or 6.7.2.

6.23.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

As specified in paragraph 6.5.3 or 6.7.3.

6.23.4.   Position

Position

As specified in paragraph 6.5.4 or 6.7.4.

6.23.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

As specified in paragraph 6.5.5 or 6.7.5.

6.23.6.   Orientation

Orientation

As specified in paragraph 6.5.6 or 6.7.6.

6.23.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

6.23.7.1.   All the lamps of the emergency stop signal shall flash in phase at a frequency of 4 ± 1 Hz.

6.23.7.1.1.   However, if any of the lamps of the emergency stop signal to the rear of the vehicle use filament light sources the frequency shall be 4 + 0/– 1 Hz.

6.23.7.2.   The emergency stop signal shall operate independently of other lamps.

6.23.7.3.   The emergency stop signal shall be activated and deactivated automatically.

6.23.7.3.1.   The emergency stop signal shall be activated only when the vehicle speed is above 50 km/h and the braking system is providing the emergency braking logic signal defined in Regulation Nos 13 and 13-H.

6.23.7.3.2.   The emergency stop signal shall be automatically deactivated if the emergency braking logic signal as defined in Regulation Nos 13 and 13-H is no longer provided or if the hazard warning signal is activated.

6.23.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Optional

6.23.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

6.23.9.1.   Except as provided in paragraph 6.23.9.2 below, if a motor vehicle is equipped to tow a trailer, the control of the emergency stop signal on the motor vehicle shall also be capable of operating the emergency stop signal on the trailer.

When the motor vehicle is electrically connected to a trailer, the operating frequency of the emergency stop signal for the combination shall be limited to the frequency specified in paragraph 6.23.7.1.1 However, if the motor vehicle can detect that filament light sources are not being used on the trailer for the emergency stop signal, the frequency may be that specified in paragraph 6.23.7.1.

6.23.9.2.   If a motor vehicle is equipped to tow a trailer fitted with a service braking system of either continuous or semi-continuous type, as defined in Regulation No 13, it shall be ensured that a constant power supply is provided via the electrical connector for the stop lamps to such trailers while the service brake is applied.

The emergency stop signal on any such trailer may operate independently of the towing vehicle and is not required to operate either at the same frequency as, or in phase with that on the towing vehicle.

6.24.   Exterior courtesy lamp

Exterior courtesy lamp

6.24.1.   Presence

Presence

Optional on motor vehicles

6.24.2.   Number

Number

No special requirement

6.24.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

No special requirement

6.24.4.   Position

Position

No special requirement

6.24.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

No special requirement

6.24.6.   Orientation

Orientation

No special requirement

6.24.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

No special requirement

6.24.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

No special requirement

6.24.9.   Other requirements

Other requirements

The exterior courtesy lamp shall not be activated unless the vehicle is stationary and one or more of the following conditions is satisfied:

| (a) | the engine is stopped; or |
| --- | --- |

(a)

the engine is stopped; or

| (b) | a driver or passenger door is opened; or |
| --- | --- |

(b)

a driver or passenger door is opened; or

| (c) | a load compartment door is opened. |
| --- | --- |

(c)

a load compartment door is opened.

The provisions of paragraph 5.10 shall be met in all fixed positions of use.

6.25.   Rear-end collision alert signal

Rear-end collision alert signal

6.25.1.   Presence

Presence

Optional

The rear-end collision alert signal shall be given by the simultaneous operation of all the direction indicator lamps fitted as described in paragraph 6.25.7.

6.25.2.   Number

Number

As specified in paragraph 6.5.2.

6.25.3.   Arrangement

Arrangement

As specified in paragraph 6.5.3.

6.25.4.   Position

Position

As specified in paragraph 6.5.4.

6.25.5.   Geometric visibility

Geometric visibility

As specified in paragraph 6.5.5.

6.25.6.   Orientation

Orientation

As specified in paragraph 6.5.6.

6.25.7.   Electrical connections

Electrical connections

Compliance with these requirements shall be demonstrated by the applicant, by simulation or other means of verification accepted by the technical service responsible for type approval.

6.25.7.1.   All the lamps of the rear-end collision alert signal shall flash in phase at a frequency of 4 ± 1 Hz.

6.25.7.1.1.   However, if any of the lamps of the rear end collision alert signal to the rear of the vehicle use filament light sources the frequency shall be 4 + 0/– 1 Hz.

6.25.7.2.   The rear-end collision alert signal shall operate independently of other lamps.

6.25.7.3.   The rear-end collision alert signal shall be activated and deactivated automatically.

6.25.7.4.   The rear-end collision alert signal shall not be activated if the direction indicator lamps, the hazard warning signal or the emergency stop signal is activated.

6.25.7.5.   The rear-end collision alert signal may only be activated under the following conditions:

| Vr | activation |
| --- | --- |
| Vr > 30 km/h | TTC ≤ 1,4 |
| Vr ≤ 30 km/h | TTC ≤ 1,4/30 × Vr |

Vr

activation

Vr > 30 km/h

TTC ≤ 1,4

Vr ≤ 30 km/h

TTC ≤ 1,4/30 × Vr

‘Vr (Relative Speed)’: means the difference in speed between a vehicle with rear-end collision alert signal and a following vehicle in the same lane.

‘Vr (Relative Speed)’

‘TTC (Time to collision)’: means the estimated time for a vehicle with rear-end collision alert signal and a following vehicle to collide assuming the relative speed at the time of estimation remains constant.

‘TTC (Time to collision)’

6.25.7.6.   The activation period of the rear-end collision alert signal shall be not more than 3 seconds.

6.25.8.   Tell-tale

Tell-tale

Optional

7.   MODIFICATIONS AND EXTENSIONS OF APPROVAL OF THE VEHICLE TYPE OR OF THE INSTALLATION OF ITS LIGHTING AND LIGHT-SIGNALLING DEVICES

| 7.1. | Every modification of the vehicle type, or of the installation of its lighting or light-signalling devices, or of the list referred to in paragraph 3.2.2 above, shall be notified to the administrative department which approved that vehicle type. The department may then either:






  7.1.1. | Consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the vehicle still meets the requirements; or |
| --- | --- | --- |

7.1.

Every modification of the vehicle type, or of the installation of its lighting or light-signalling devices, or of the list referred to in paragraph 3.2.2 above, shall be notified to the administrative department which approved that vehicle type. The department may then either:

7.1.1.

Consider that the modifications made are unlikely to have an appreciable adverse effect and that in any case the vehicle still meets the requirements; or

| 7.1.2. | Require a further test report from the technical services responsible for conducting the tests. |
| --- | --- |

7.1.2.

Require a further test report from the technical services responsible for conducting the tests.

| 7.2. | Confirmation of extension or refusal of approval, specifying the alteration, shall be communicated by the procedure specified in paragraph 4.3 above to the Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

7.2.

Confirmation of extension or refusal of approval, specifying the alteration, shall be communicated by the procedure specified in paragraph 4.3 above to the Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation.

| 7.3. | The competent authority issuing the extension of approval shall assign a series number for such an extension and inform thereof the other Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

7.3.

The competent authority issuing the extension of approval shall assign a series number for such an extension and inform thereof the other Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

8.   CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

The conformity of production procedures shall comply with those set out in the Agreement, Appendix 2 (E/ECE/324-E/ECE/TRANS/505/Rev.2), with the following requirements:

| 8.1. | Any vehicle approved pursuant to this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set out in paragraphs 5 and 6 above. |
| --- | --- |

8.1.

Any vehicle approved pursuant to this Regulation shall be so manufactured as to conform to the type approved by meeting the requirements set out in paragraphs 5 and 6 above.

| 8.2. | The holder of the approval shall in particular:






  8.2.1. | Ensure existence of procedures for effective quality control of the vehicle as regards all aspects relevant to compliance with the requirements set out in paragraphs 5 and 6 above; |
| --- | --- | --- |

8.2.

The holder of the approval shall in particular:

8.2.1.

Ensure existence of procedures for effective quality control of the vehicle as regards all aspects relevant to compliance with the requirements set out in paragraphs 5 and 6 above;

| 8.2.2. | Ensure that for each type of vehicle at least the tests prescribed in Annex 9 to this Regulation or physical checks from which equivalent data may be derived are carried out. |
| --- | --- |

8.2.2.

Ensure that for each type of vehicle at least the tests prescribed in Annex 9 to this Regulation or physical checks from which equivalent data may be derived are carried out.

| 8.3. | The competent authority may carry out any test prescribed in this Regulation. These tests will be on samples selected at random without causing distortion of the manufacturers delivery commitments. |
| --- | --- |

8.3.

The competent authority may carry out any test prescribed in this Regulation. These tests will be on samples selected at random without causing distortion of the manufacturers delivery commitments.

| 8.4. | The competent authority shall strive to obtain a frequency of inspection of once per year. However, this is at the discretion of the competent authority and their confidence in the arrangements for ensuring effective control of the conformity of production. In the case where negative results are recorded, the competent authority shall ensure that all necessary steps are taken to re-establish the conformity of production as rapidly as possible. |
| --- | --- |

8.4.

The competent authority shall strive to obtain a frequency of inspection of once per year. However, this is at the discretion of the competent authority and their confidence in the arrangements for ensuring effective control of the conformity of production. In the case where negative results are recorded, the competent authority shall ensure that all necessary steps are taken to re-establish the conformity of production as rapidly as possible.

9.   PENALTIES FOR NON-CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

| 9.1. | The approval granted in respect of a type of vehicle pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the requirements are not complied with or if a vehicle bearing the approval mark does not conform to the type approved. |
| --- | --- |

9.1.

The approval granted in respect of a type of vehicle pursuant to this Regulation may be withdrawn if the requirements are not complied with or if a vehicle bearing the approval mark does not conform to the type approved.

| 9.2. | If a Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

9.2.

If a Party to the Agreement applying this Regulation withdraws an approval it has previously granted, it shall forthwith so notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

10.   PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

If the holder of the approval completely ceases to manufacture a type of vehicle approved in accordance with this Regulation, he shall inform the authority which granted the approval. Upon receiving the relevant communication, that authority shall inform thereof the other Parties to the Agreement applying this Regulation by means of a communication form conforming to the model in Annex 1 to this Regulation.

11.   NAMES AND ADDRESSES OF TECHNICAL SERVICES RESPONSIBLE FOR CONDUCTING APPROVAL TESTS AND OF ADMINISTRATIVE DEPARTMENTS

The Parties to the 1958 Agreement applying this Regulation shall communicate to the United Nations Secretariat the names and addresses of the technical services responsible for conducting approval tests and of the administrative departments which grant approval and to which forms certifying approval or extension or refusal or withdrawal of approval, issued in other countries, are to be sent.

12.   TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS

| 12.1. | Notwithstanding the transitional provisions below, Contracting Parties whose application of this Regulation comes into force after the date of entry into force of the most recent series of amendments are not obliged to accept approvals which were granted in accordance with any of the preceding series of amendments to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

12.1.

Notwithstanding the transitional provisions below, Contracting Parties whose application of this Regulation comes into force after the date of entry into force of the most recent series of amendments are not obliged to accept approvals which were granted in accordance with any of the preceding series of amendments to this Regulation.

| 12.2. | Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall not refuse to grant extensions of approvals to the preceding series of amendments to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

12.2.

Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall not refuse to grant extensions of approvals to the preceding series of amendments to this Regulation.

| 12.3. | Until the United Nations Secretary-General is notified otherwise, Japan declares that in relation to the installation of lighting and light signalling devices, Japan will only be bound by the obligations of the Agreement to which this Regulation is annexed with respect to vehicles of categories M1 and N1. |
| --- | --- |

12.3.

Until the United Nations Secretary-General is notified otherwise, Japan declares that in relation to the installation of lighting and light signalling devices, Japan will only be bound by the obligations of the Agreement to which this Regulation is annexed with respect to vehicles of categories M1

1

| 12.4. | As from the official date of entry into force of the 03 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant approval under this Regulation as amended by the 03 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.4.

As from the official date of entry into force of the 03 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant approval under this Regulation as amended by the 03 series of amendments.

| 12.5. | As from 12 months after the date of entry into force of the 03 series of amendments, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approvals only if the vehicle type to be approved meets the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 03 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.5.

As from 12 months after the date of entry into force of the 03 series of amendments, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approvals only if the vehicle type to be approved meets the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 03 series of amendments.

| 12.6. | Until 36 months after the date of entry into force of the 03 series of amendments to this Regulation, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse national or regional type approval of a vehicle type approved to the preceding series of amendments to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

12.6.

Until 36 months after the date of entry into force of the 03 series of amendments to this Regulation, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse national or regional type approval of a vehicle type approved to the preceding series of amendments to this Regulation.

| 12.7. | Starting 36 months after the entry into force of the 03 series of amendments to this Regulation, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse first national or regional registration (first entry into service) of a vehicle which does not meet the requirements of the 03 series of amendments to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

12.7.

Starting 36 months after the entry into force of the 03 series of amendments to this Regulation, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation may refuse first national or regional registration (first entry into service) of a vehicle which does not meet the requirements of the 03 series of amendments to this Regulation.

| 12.8. | As from 60 months after the date of entry into force of the 03 series of amendments to this Regulation, approvals to this Regulation shall cease to be valid, except in the case of vehicle types which comply with the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 03 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.8.

As from 60 months after the date of entry into force of the 03 series of amendments to this Regulation, approvals to this Regulation shall cease to be valid, except in the case of vehicle types which comply with the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 03 series of amendments.

| 12.9. | Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 12.7 or 12.8 above, approvals of vehicle types to the preceding series of amendments to the Regulation which are not affected by the 03 series of amendments shall remain valid and Contracting Parties applying the Regulation shall continue to accept them. |
| --- | --- |

12.9.

Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 12.7 or 12.8 above, approvals of vehicle types to the preceding series of amendments to the Regulation which are not affected by the 03 series of amendments shall remain valid and Contracting Parties applying the Regulation shall continue to accept them.

| 12.10. | As from 36 months from the entry into force of Supplement 3 to the 03 series of amendments, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approvals only if the vehicle type to be approved meets the requirements of this Regulation as amended by Supplement 3 to the 03 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.10.

As from 36 months from the entry into force of Supplement 3 to the 03 series of amendments, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approvals only if the vehicle type to be approved meets the requirements of this Regulation as amended by Supplement 3 to the 03 series of amendments.

| 12.11. | As from the official date of entry into force of the 04 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant approval under this Regulation as amended by the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.11.

As from the official date of entry into force of the 04 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant approval under this Regulation as amended by the 04 series of amendments.

| 12.12. | As from 30 months for vehicles of categories M1 and N1 and 48 months for vehicles of other categories after the official date of entry into force of the 04 series of amendments, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approvals only if the vehicle type to be approved meets the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.12.

As from 30 months for vehicles of categories M1

1

| 12.13. | Until 30 months for vehicles of categories M1 and N1 and 48 months for vehicles of other categories after the official date of entry into force of the 04 series of amendments, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall continue to grant approvals to those types of vehicles which comply with the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the preceding series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.13.

Until 30 months for vehicles of categories M1

1

| 12.14. | Approvals granted under this Regulation before 30 months for vehicles of categories M1 and N1 and 48 months for vehicles of other categories after the official date of entry into force of the 04 series of amendments and all extensions of such approvals, including those to a preceding series of amendments to this Regulation granted subsequently, shall remain valid indefinitely. When the vehicle type approved to the preceding series of amendments meets the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 04 series of amendments, the Contracting Party which granted the approval shall notify the other Contracting Parties applying this Regulation thereof. |
| --- | --- |

12.14.

Approvals granted under this Regulation before 30 months for vehicles of categories M1

1

| 12.15. | No Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse national or regional type approval of a vehicle type approved to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

12.15.

No Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse national or regional type approval of a vehicle type approved to the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation.

| 12.16. | Notwithstanding the transitional provisions above, Contracting Parties whose application of Regulation No 112 comes into force after the date of entry into force of the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation are not obliged to accept approvals if the vehicle type to be approved does not meet the requirements of paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.2.2 as amended by the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation with regard to Regulation No 112. |
| --- | --- |

12.16.

Notwithstanding the transitional provisions above, Contracting Parties whose application of Regulation No 112 comes into force after the date of entry into force of the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation are not obliged to accept approvals if the vehicle type to be approved does not meet the requirements of paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.2.2 as amended by the 04 series of amendments to this Regulation with regard to Regulation No 112.

| 12.17. | Paragraph 6.19.7.3 comes into force 30 months for new types of vehicles of categories M1 and N1 and 48 months for new types of vehicles of other categories after the date of entry into force of the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.17.

Paragraph 6.19.7.3 comes into force 30 months for new types of vehicles of categories M1

1

| 12.18. | Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall continue to grant approvals to vehicle types which do not meet the requirements of paragraph 5.2.1 of Supplement 2 to the 04 Series of amendments, if they are fitted with headlamps approved to Regulation No 98 (prior to Supplement 9) or Regulation No 112 (prior to Supplement 8). |
| --- | --- |

12.18.

Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall continue to grant approvals to vehicle types which do not meet the requirements of paragraph 5.2.1 of Supplement 2 to the 04 Series of amendments, if they are fitted with headlamps approved to Regulation No 98 (prior to Supplement 9) or Regulation No 112 (prior to Supplement 8).

| 12.19. | As from 36 months from the entry into force of Supplement 3 to the 04 series of amendments, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approvals only if the vehicle type to be approved meets the requirements of the paragraphs 3.2.7 and 5.27 of this Regulation as amended by Supplement 3 to the 04 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.19.

As from 36 months from the entry into force of Supplement 3 to the 04 series of amendments, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approvals only if the vehicle type to be approved meets the requirements of the paragraphs 3.2.7 and 5.27 of this Regulation as amended by Supplement 3 to the 04 series of amendments.

| 12.20. | Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall not refuse to grant extensions of approvals to all previous versions of this Regulation which remain valid. |
| --- | --- |

12.20.

Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall not refuse to grant extensions of approvals to all previous versions of this Regulation which remain valid.

| 12.21. | As from the official date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant approval under this Regulation as amended by the 05 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.21.

As from the official date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendments, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse to grant approval under this Regulation as amended by the 05 series of amendments.

| 12.22. | As from 48 months from the official date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendments, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approvals only if the vehicle type to be approved meets the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 05 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.22.

As from 48 months from the official date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendments, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approvals only if the vehicle type to be approved meets the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 05 series of amendments.

| 12.23. | Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall continue to grant approvals to those types of vehicles which comply with the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the preceding series of amendments during the 48 months’ period which follows the date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendments. |
| --- | --- |

12.23.

Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall continue to grant approvals to those types of vehicles which comply with the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the preceding series of amendments during the 48 months’ period which follows the date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendments.

| 12.24. | No Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse national or regional type approval of a vehicle type approved to the 05 series of amendments to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

12.24.

No Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse national or regional type approval of a vehicle type approved to the 05 series of amendments to this Regulation.

| 12.25. | Until 48 months after the date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendments to this Regulation, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse national or regional type approval of a vehicle type approved to the preceding series of amendments to this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

12.25.

Until 48 months after the date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendments to this Regulation, no Contracting Party applying this Regulation shall refuse national or regional type approval of a vehicle type approved to the preceding series of amendments to this Regulation.

| 12.26. | Existing approvals under this Regulation before the date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendment to this Regulation shall remain valid indefinitely. |
| --- | --- |

12.26.

Existing approvals under this Regulation before the date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendment to this Regulation shall remain valid indefinitely.

| 12.27. | As from 66 months for new vehicles type of categories M1 and N1 and 84 months for new vehicles type of other categories after the official date of entry into force of the 05 series of amendments to this Regulation, Contracting Parties applying this Regulation shall grant approvals only if the new vehicle type to be approved meets the requirements of this Regulation as amended by the 05 series of amendments excluding paragraphs 6.2.7.6.2 and 6.2.7.6.3. Existing approvals under this Regulation before these dates will remain valid indefinitely and extension of the approvals shall be granted after. |
| --- | --- |

12.27.

As from 66 months for new vehicles type of categories M1

1

---

(1)  As defined in Annex 7 to the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2 as last amended by Amend.4).

1

(2)  For clarification see Annex 10.

2

(3)  In the case of lighting devices for the rear registration plate and direction-indicators of categories 5 and 6, the ‘light-emitting surface’ shall be used.

3

(4)  Examples to enable a decision regarding reciprocal incorporation of lamps can be found in Annex 3, Part 7.

4

(5)  CIE Publication 15.2, 1986, Colorimetry, the CIE 1931 standard colorimetric observer.

5

(6)  1 for Germany, 2 for France, 3 for Italy, 4 for the Netherlands, 5 for Sweden, 6 for Belgium, 7 for Hungary, 8 for the Czech Republic, 9 for Spain, 10 for Serbia, 11 for the United Kingdom, 12 for Austria, 13 for Luxembourg, 14 for Switzerland, 15 (vacant), 16 for Norway, 17 for Finland, 18 for Denmark, 19 for Romania, 20 for Poland, 21 for Portugal, 22 for the Russian Federation, 23 for Greece, 24 for Ireland, 25 for Croatia, 26 for Slovenia, 27 for Slovakia, 28 for Belarus, 29 for Estonia, 30 (vacant), 31 for Bosnia and Herzegovina, 32 for Latvia, 33 (vacant), 34 for Bulgaria, 35 (vacant), 36 for Lithuania, 37 for Turkey, 38 (vacant), 39 for Azerbaijan, 40 for The former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, 41 (vacant), 42 for the European Union (Approvals are granted by its Member States using their respective ECE symbol), 43 for Japan, 44 (vacant), 45 for Australia, 46 for Ukraine, 47 for South Africa, 48 for New Zealand, 49 for Cyprus, 50 for Malta, 51 for the Republic of Korea, 52 for Malaysia, 53 for Thailand, 54 and 55 (vacant), 56 for Montenegro, 57 (vacant) and 58 for Tunisia. Subsequent numbers shall be assigned to other countries in the chronological order in which they ratify or accede to the Agreement Concerning the Adoption of Uniform Technical Prescriptions for Wheeled Vehicles, Equipment and Parts which can be Fitted and/or be Used on Wheeled Vehicles and the Conditions for Reciprocal Recognition of Approvals Granted on the Basis of these Prescriptions, and the numbers thus assigned shall be communicated by the Secretary-General of the United Nations to the Contracting Parties to the Agreement.

6

(7)  This does not apply to dedicated objects that may be added to the exterior of the headlamp.

7

(8)  Measurement of the chromaticity coordinates of the light emitted by the lamps is not part of this Regulation.

8

(9)  Also known as white or colourless retro-reflector.

9

(10)  Nothing in this Regulation shall preclude the Contracting Parties applying this Regulation from allowing the use of white conspicuity markings to the rear in their territories.

10

(11)  As defined in Annex 7 to the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2 as last amended by Amend.4).

11

(12)  Contracting Parties to the respective regulations can still prohibit the use of mechanical cleaning systems when headlamps with plastic lenses, marked ‘PL’, are installed.

12

(13)  As defined in Annex 7 to the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3), (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2 as last amended by Amend.4).

13

(14)  New vehicle types which do not comply with this provision may continue to be approved until 18 months after the entry into force of Supplement 4 to the 03 series of amendments.

14

(15)  The value of 5° given for dead angle of visibility to the rear of the side-direction indicator is an upper limit. d ≤ 2,50 m.

15

(16)  See footnote 14.

16

(17)  The Contracting Parties not applying Regulation No 87 may prohibit the presence of DRL (as specified in paragraph 5.22) on the basis of national regulations.

17

(18)  New vehicle types which do not comply with this provision may continue to be approved until 18 months after the entry into force of Supplement 4 to the 03 series of amendments.

18

(19)  This provision does apply until 5 years after the official date of entry into force of the 03 series of amendments to this Regulation.

19

(20)  In case of additional ‘two symmetrically placed lighting units’ the horizontal distance may be 200 mm (C in the figure).

20

(21)  Traffic directions being separated by means of road construction, or a corresponding lateral distance of opposing traffic is identified. This implies a reduction of undue glare from vehicles headlamps in opposing traffic.

21

(22)  This provision does not apply for passing beam lighting when bend lighting is produced for a right turn in right hand traffic (left turn in left-hand traffic).

22

(23)  Contracting Parties to the respective Regulations can still prohibit the use of mechanical cleaning systems when headlamps with plastic lenses, marked ‘PL’, are installed.

23

---

ANNEX 1

COMMUNICATION

(Maximum format: A4 (210 × 297 mm))

Image 21

issued by:

Name of administration

concerning (2):

APPROVAL GRANTED,

APPROVAL EXTENDED,

APPROVAL REFUSED,

APPROVAL WITHDRAWN,

PRODUCTION DEFINITELY DISCONTINUED

of a type of vehicle with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices, pursuant to Regulation No 48.

Approval No: ...

Extension No: ...

1. Trade name or mark of the vehicle: ...

2. Manufacturer's name for the type of vehicle: ...

3. Manufacturer's name and address: ...

4. If applicable, name and address of manufacturer’s representative: ...

5. Submitted for approval on: ...

6. Technical Service responsible for conducting approval tests: ...

7. Date of test report: ...

8. Number of test report: ...

9. Concise description:

Lighting and light-signalling devices on the vehicle:

9.1. Main beam headlamps:

yes/no (2)

9.2. Dipped beam headlamps:

yes/no (2)

9.3. Front-fog lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.4. Reversing lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.5. Front direction-indicators:

yes/no (2)

9.6. Rear direction-indicators:

yes/no (2)

9.7. Side direction-indicators:

yes/no (2)

9.8. Hazard warning signal:

yes/no (2)

9.9. Stop lamps:

yes/no (2)

(1) Distinguishing number of the country which has granted/extended/refused/withdrawn approval (see approval provisions in the Regulation).

(2) Strike out what does not apply, or repeat ‘yes’ or ‘no’.

Image 22

9.10. Rear registration plate illuminating device:

yes/no (2)

9.11. Front position lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.12. Rear position lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.13. Rear fog lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.14. Parking lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.15. End outline marker lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.16. Rear retro reflectors, non triangular:

yes/no (2)

9.17. Rear retro reflectors, triangular:

yes/no (2)

9.18. Front retro reflectors, non triangular:

yes/no (2)

9.19. Side retro reflectors, non triangular:

yes/no (2)

9.20. Side marker lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.21. Daytime running lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.22. Adaptive front lighting system (AFS):

yes/no (2)

9.23. Cornering lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.24. Conspicuity markings:

Rear

Side

9.24.1. Full contour markings:

yes/no (2)

yes/no (2)

9.24.2. Partial contour markings:

yes/no (2)

yes/no (2)

9.24.3. Line markings:

yes/no (2)

yes/no (2)

9.24.4. Exemption regarding conspicuity marking according to paragraph 6.21.1.2.5.

Rear:

yes/no (2)

Comments: ...

Side:

yes/no (2)

Comments: ...

9.25. Emergency stop signal:

yes/no (2)

9.26. Equivalent lamps:

yes/no (2)

9.27. Maximum permissible load in the boot: ...

10. Comments: ...

10.1. Any comments on movable components: ...

10.2. Method used for the definition of the apparent surface:

(a) Boundary of the illuminating surface (2); or

(b) Light-emitting surface (2)

10.3. Other comments (valid for right-hand or left-hand drive vehicles): ...

10.4. Comments concerning AFS (according to paragraphs 3.2.6 and 6.22.7.4 of the Regulation): ...

10.5. Comments regarding the extent of coverage of the conspicuity marking if it is less than the minimum value of 80 per cent required by paragraphs 6.21.4.1.2 and 6.21.4.2.2 of the Regulation: ...

Image 23

10.6. For vehicles of M and N categories comments regarding the electrical supply conditions (according to paragraphs 3.2.7 and 5.27 of the Regulation): ...

10.7. Comments regarding conspicuity marking (according to paragraphs 6.21.1.2.5 and 6.21.4.3.1 of this Regulation): ...

10.8. Comments regarding conspicuity marking (incomplete vehicle or complete vehicles according to paragraphs 6.21.1.2.1 and 6.21.1.2.2.1 of this Regulation):

Incomplete vehicles:

yes/no (2)

Complete vehicles:

yes/no (2)

Completed vehicles:

yes/no (2)

11. Position of the approval mark: ...

12. Reason(s) for extension (if applicable): ...

13. Approval granted/extended/refused/withdrawn (2)

14. Place: ...

15. Date: ...

16. Signature: ...

17. The following documents, bearing the approval number shown above, are available on request: ...

---

ANNEX 2

ARRANGEMENTS OF APPROVAL MARKS

MODEL A

(See paragraph 4.4 of this Regulation)

Image 24

The above approval mark affixed to a vehicle shows that the vehicle type concerned has, with regard to the installation of lighting and light-signalling devices, been approved in the Netherlands (E4) pursuant to Regulation No 48 as amended by the 05 series of amendments. The approval number indicates that the approval was granted in accordance with the requirements of Regulation No 48 as amended by the 05 series of amendments.

MODEL B

(See paragraph 4.5 of this Regulation)

Image 25

The above approval mark affixed to a vehicle shows that the vehicle type concerned has been approved in the Netherlands (E4) pursuant to Regulation No 48 as amended by the 05 series of amendments and Regulation No 33 (1). The approval number indicates that, at the dates when the respective approvals were given, Regulation No 48 was amended by the 05 series of amendments and Regulation No 33 was still in its original form.

---

(1)  The second number is given merely as an example.

---

ANNEX 3

EXAMPLES OF LAMP SURFACES, AXES, CENTRES OF REFERENCE, AND ANGLES OF GEOMETRIC VISIBILITY

These examples show some arrangements to aid the understanding of the provisions and are not intended to be design restrictive.

KEY for all examples in this Annex:

| 1. | Illuminating surface |
| --- | --- |
| 2. | Axis of reference |
| 3. | Centre of reference |
| 4. | Angle of geometric visibility |
| 5. | Light-emitting surface |
| 6. | Apparent surface based on the illuminating surface |
| 7a. | Apparent surface based on the light-emitting surface according to paragraph 2.8.a (with outer lens) |
| 7b. | Apparent surface based on the light-emitting surface according to paragraph 2.8.b (without outer lens) |
| 8. | Direction of visibility |
| IO | Inner optical part |
| LG | Light guide |
| L | Outer lens |
| R | Reflector |
| S | Light source |
| X | Not part of this function |
| F1 | Function one |
| F2 | Function two |

1.

Illuminating surface

2.

Axis of reference

3.

Centre of reference

4.

Angle of geometric visibility

5.

Light-emitting surface

6.

Apparent surface based on the illuminating surface

7a.

Apparent surface based on the light-emitting surface according to paragraph 2.8.a (with outer lens)

7b.

Apparent surface based on the light-emitting surface according to paragraph 2.8.b (without outer lens)

8.

Direction of visibility

IO

Inner optical part

LG

Light guide

L

Outer lens

R

Reflector

S

Light source

X

Not part of this function

F1

Function one

F2

Function two

PART 1

Light-emitting surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector

Image 26

Apparent surface based on light-emitting surface

PART 2

Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector

Illuminating surface of a light-signalling device other than a retro-reflector

Image 27

Screens; other positions of the screens are possible

Illuminating surface

Resulting illuminating surface over all possible screen positions, e.g. for the determination of maximum or minimum area.

PART 3

Examples of apparent surface based on illuminating surface in different directions of geometric visibility

Examples of apparent surface based on illuminating surface in different directions of geometric visibility

Image 28

Apparent surface based on illuminating surface

Apparent surface based on illuminating surface

Image 29

Apparent surface based on illuminating surface

PART 4

Examples of apparent surface based on light-emitting surface in different directions of geometric visibility

Examples of apparent surface based on light-emitting surface in different directions of geometric visibility

Image 30

Apparent surface based on light-emitting surface

Image 31

Apparent surface based on light-emitting surface

PART 5

Example of illuminating surface in comparison with light-emitting surface in the case of a ‘single function lamp’ (see paragraphs 2.8 to 2.9 of this Regulation)

Example of illuminating surface in comparison with light-emitting surface in the case of a ‘single function lamp’ (see paragraphs 2.8 to 2.9 of this Regulation)

Examples of a light source with a reflector optic behind an outer lens:

| Example 1 | Example 2 |
| --- | --- |

Example 1

Example 1

Image 32

Example 2

Example 2

Image 33

Examples of a light source with a reflector optic with a inner lens behind an outer lens:

| Example 3 | Example 4 |
| --- | --- |

Example 3

Example 3

Image 34

Example 4

Example 4

Image 35

Examples of a light source with a reflector optic with a partial inner lens behind an outer lens:

| Example 5 | Example 6 |
| --- | --- |

Example 5

Example 5

Image 36

Example 6

Example 6

Image 37

Example of a light guide optic behind an outer lens:

Example 7

Example 7

Image 38

Section

In the case where the non textured outer lens is excluded, ‘7b’ is the apparent surface according to paragraph 2.8.b.

Example of a light guide optic or a reflector optic behind an outer lens:

Example 8

Example 8

Image 39

Section

In the case where the non textured outer lens is excluded, ‘7b’ is the apparent surface according to paragraph 2.8.b, and F1 shall not transparent to F2.

Example of a light source with a reflector optic in combination with an area which is not part of this function, behind an outer lens:

Example 9

Example 9

Image 40

In the case where the non textured outer lens is excluded, ‘7b’ is the apparent surface according to paragraph 2.8.b.

PART 6

Examples showing the determination of the light-emitting surface in comparison with illuminating surface (see paragraphs 2.8 and 2.9 of this Regulation)

Examples showing the determination of the light-emitting surface in comparison with illuminating surface (see paragraphs 2.8 and 2.9 of this Regulation)

Note: Reflected light could/may contribute to the determination of the light-emitting surface

Note

Example A

Example A

Image 41

Example B

Example B

Image 42

Example C

Example C

Example to determine the illuminating surface in combination with an area which is not part of the function:

Image 43

Example D

Example D

Example to determine a light-emitting surface according to 2.8.a in combination with an area which is not part of the function:

Image 44

Example E

Example E

Example to determine the apparent surface in combination with an area which is not part of the function and a non-textured outer lens (according to 2.8.b):

Image 45

PART 7

Examples to enable a decision regarding the reciprocal incorporation of two functions

Examples to enable a decision regarding the reciprocal incorporation of two functions

In the case with a textured outer lens and a wall in between:

Image 46

Not reciprocally incorporated

In the case with a textured outer lens:

Image 47

Reciprocally incorporated

In the case where the non-textured outer lens is excluded:

Image 48

Not reciprocally incorporated

In the case where the non-textured outer lens is excluded:

Image 49

Not reciprocally incorporated

Not reciprocally incorporated

In the case where the outer lens (textured or not) is included:

Image 50

Reciprocally incorporated

Reciprocally incorporated

In the case where the outer lens (textured or not) is included:

Image 51

Reciprocally incorporated

In the case where the non-textured outer lens is excluded, ‘7b’ is the apparent surface according to paragraph 2.8 and F1 shall not be transparent to F2:

Image 52

F1 is not reciprocally incorporated with F2

In the case where the non-textured outer lens is excluded or not:

Image 53

Reciprocally incorporated

---

ANNEX 4

VISIBILITY OF A RED LAMP TO THE FRONT AND VISIBILITY OF A WHITE LAMP TO THE REAR

(See paragraphs 5.10.1 and 5.10.2 of this Regulation)

Figure 1

Image 54

Zone 1

Visibility of a red lamp to the front

Figure 2

Figure 2

Image 55

Zone 2

Visibility of a white lamp to the rear

---

ANNEX 5

States of loading to be taken into consideration in determining variations in the vertical orientation of the dipped-beam headlamps

Loading conditions on axles referred to in paragraphs 6.2.6.1 and 6.2.6.3.1.

| 1. | For the following tests, the mass of the passengers shall be calculated on the basis of 75 kg per person. |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Loading conditions for different types of vehicles:






  2.1. | Vehicles in category M1 (1):






  2.1.1. | The angle of the light beam of the dipped-beam headlamps shall be determined under the following load conditions:






  2.1.1.1. | One person in the driver's seat; |
| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |

2.

2.1.

Vehicles in category M1 (1):

2.1.1.

The angle of the light beam of the dipped-beam headlamps shall be determined under the following load conditions:

2.1.1.1.

One person in the driver's seat;

| 2.1.1.2. | The driver, plus one passenger in the front seat farthest from the driver; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.2.

The driver, plus one passenger in the front seat farthest from the driver;

| 2.1.1.3. | The driver, one passenger in the front seat farthest from the driver, all the seats farthest to the rear occupied; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.3.

The driver, one passenger in the front seat farthest from the driver, all the seats farthest to the rear occupied;

| 2.1.1.4. | All the seats occupied; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.4.

All the seats occupied;

| 2.1.1.5. | All the seats occupied, plus an evenly distributed load in the luggage boot, in order to obtain the permissible load on the rear axle or on the front axle if the boot is at the front. If the vehicle has a front and a rear boot, the additional load shall be appropriately distributed in order to obtain the permissible axle loads. However, if the maximum permissible laden mass is obtained before the permissible load on one of the axles, the loading of the boot(s) shall be limited to the figure which enables that mass to be reached; |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.5.

All the seats occupied, plus an evenly distributed load in the luggage boot, in order to obtain the permissible load on the rear axle or on the front axle if the boot is at the front. If the vehicle has a front and a rear boot, the additional load shall be appropriately distributed in order to obtain the permissible axle loads. However, if the maximum permissible laden mass is obtained before the permissible load on one of the axles, the loading of the boot(s) shall be limited to the figure which enables that mass to be reached;

| 2.1.1.6. | Driver, plus an evenly distributed load in the boot, in order to obtain the permissible load on the corresponding axle.
  However, if the maximum permissible laden mass is obtained before the permissible load on the axle, the loading of the boot(s) shall be limited to the figure which enables that mass to be reached. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.1.6.

Driver, plus an evenly distributed load in the boot, in order to obtain the permissible load on the corresponding axle.

However, if the maximum permissible laden mass is obtained before the permissible load on the axle, the loading of the boot(s) shall be limited to the figure which enables that mass to be reached.

| 2.1.2. | In determining the above loading conditions, account shall be taken of any loading restrictions laid down by the manufacturer. |
| --- | --- |

2.1.2.

In determining the above loading conditions, account shall be taken of any loading restrictions laid down by the manufacturer.

| 2.2. | Vehicles in categories M2 and M3 (1):
  The angle of the light beam from the dipped-beam headlamps shall be determined under the following loading conditions:






  2.2.1. | Vehicle unladen and one person in the driver's seat; |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.2.

Vehicles in categories M2 and M3 (1):

The angle of the light beam from the dipped-beam headlamps shall be determined under the following loading conditions:

2.2.1.

Vehicle unladen and one person in the driver's seat;

| 2.2.2. | Vehicles laden such that each axle carries its maximum technically permissible load or until the maximum permissible mass of the vehicle is attained by loading the front and rear axles proportionally to their maximum technically permissible loads, whichever occurs first. |
| --- | --- |

2.2.2.

Vehicles laden such that each axle carries its maximum technically permissible load or until the maximum permissible mass of the vehicle is attained by loading the front and rear axles proportionally to their maximum technically permissible loads, whichever occurs first.

| 2.3. | Vehicles in category N with load surfaces:






  2.3.1. | The angle of the light beam from the dipped-beam headlamps shall be determined under the following loading conditions;






  2.3.1.1. | Vehicle unladen and one person in the driver's seat; |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

2.3.

Vehicles in category N with load surfaces:

2.3.1.

The angle of the light beam from the dipped-beam headlamps shall be determined under the following loading conditions;

2.3.1.1.

Vehicle unladen and one person in the driver's seat;

| 2.3.1.2. | Driver, plus a load so distributed as to give the maximum technically permissible load on the rear axle or axles, or the maximum permissible mass of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, without exceeding a front axle load calculated as the sum of the front axle load of the unladen vehicle plus 25 per cent of the maximum permissible payload on the front axle. Conversely, the front axle is so considered when the load platform is at the front. |
| --- | --- |

2.3.1.2.

Driver, plus a load so distributed as to give the maximum technically permissible load on the rear axle or axles, or the maximum permissible mass of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, without exceeding a front axle load calculated as the sum of the front axle load of the unladen vehicle plus 25 per cent of the maximum permissible payload on the front axle. Conversely, the front axle is so considered when the load platform is at the front.

| 2.4. | Vehicles in category N without a load surface:






  2.4.1. | Drawing vehicles for semi-trailers:






  2.4.1.1. | Unladen vehicle without a load on the coupling attachment and one person in the driver's seat; |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

2.4.

Vehicles in category N without a load surface:

2.4.1.

Drawing vehicles for semi-trailers:

2.4.1.1.

Unladen vehicle without a load on the coupling attachment and one person in the driver's seat;

| 2.4.1.2. | One person in the driver's seat: technically permissible load on the coupling attachment in the position of the attachment corresponding to the highest load on the rear axle. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.1.2.

One person in the driver's seat: technically permissible load on the coupling attachment in the position of the attachment corresponding to the highest load on the rear axle.

| 2.4.2. | Drawing vehicles for trailers:






  2.4.2.1. | Vehicle unladen and one person in the driver's seat; |
| --- | --- | --- |

2.4.2.

Drawing vehicles for trailers:

2.4.2.1.

Vehicle unladen and one person in the driver's seat;

| 2.4.2.2. | One person in the driver's seat, all the other places in the driving cabin being occupied. |
| --- | --- |

2.4.2.2.

One person in the driver's seat, all the other places in the driving cabin being occupied.

---

(1)  As defined in the Consolidated Resolution on the Construction of Vehicles (R.E.3) Annex 7, (document TRANS/WP.29/78/Rev.1/Amend.2, as last amended by Amend.4).

---

ANNEX 6

MEASUREMENT OF THE VARIATION OF DIPPED-BEAM INCLINATION AS A FUNCTION OF LOAD

1.   SCOPE

This Annex specifies a method for measuring variations in motor vehicle dipped-beam inclination, in relation to its initial inclination, caused by changes in vehicle attitude due to loading.

2.   DEFINITIONS

2.1.   Initial inclination

2.1.1.   Stated initial inclination

The value of the dipped-beam initial inclination specified by the motor vehicle manufacturer serving as a reference value for the calculation of permissible variations.

2.1.2.   Measured initial inclination

The mean value of dipped-beam inclination or vehicle inclination measured with the vehicle in condition No 1, as defined in Annex 5, for the category of vehicle under test. It serves as a reference value for the assessment of variations in beam inclination as the load varies.

2.2.   Dipped-beam inclination

It may be defined as follows:

| | Either as the angle, expressed in milliradians, between the direction of the beam towards a characteristic point on the horizontal part of the cut-off in the luminous distribution of the headlamp and the horizontal plane, |
| --- | --- |

Either as the angle, expressed in milliradians, between the direction of the beam towards a characteristic point on the horizontal part of the cut-off in the luminous distribution of the headlamp and the horizontal plane,

| | Or by the tangent of that angle, expressed in percentage inclination, since the angles are small (for these small angles, 1 per cent is equal to 10 mrad). |
| --- | --- |

Or by the tangent of that angle, expressed in percentage inclination, since the angles are small (for these small angles, 1 per cent is equal to 10 mrad).

If the inclination is expressed in percentage inclination, it can be calculated by means of the following formula:

Formula

where:

| h1 | is the height above the ground, in millimetres, of the above- mentioned characteristic point, measured on a vertical screen perpendicular to the vehicle longitudinal median plane, placed at a horizontal distance L. |
| --- | --- |
| h2 | is the height above the ground, in millimetres, of the centre of reference (which is taken to be the nominal origin of the characteristic point chosen in h1). |
| L | is the distance, in millimetres, from the screen to the centre of reference. |

h1

is the height above the ground, in millimetres, of the above- mentioned characteristic point, measured on a vertical screen perpendicular to the vehicle longitudinal median plane, placed at a horizontal distance L.

h2

is the height above the ground, in millimetres, of the centre of reference (which is taken to be the nominal origin of the characteristic point chosen in h1).

L

is the distance, in millimetres, from the screen to the centre of reference.

Negative values denote downward inclination (see Figure).

Positive values denote upward inclination.

Figure

Dipped-beam downward inclination of a category M1 vehicle

Image 56

Notes:

| 1. | This drawing represents a category M1 vehicle, but the principle shown applies equally to vehicles of other categories. |
| --- | --- |

1.

| 2. | Where the vehicle does not incorporate a headlamp levelling system, the variation in dipped-beam inclination is identical with the variation in the inclination of the vehicle itself. |
| --- | --- |

2.

3.   MEASUREMENT CONDITIONS

3.1.   If a visual inspection of the dipped-beam pattern on the screen or a photometric method is used, measurement shall be carried out in a dark environment (for example, a dark room) of sufficient area to allow the vehicle and the screen to be placed as shown in Figure. Headlamp centres of reference shall be at a distance from the screen of at least 10 m.

3.2.   The ground on which measurements are made shall be as flat and horizontal as possible, so that the reproducibility of measurements of dipped-beam inclination can be assured with an accuracy of ± 0,5 mrad (± 0,05 per cent inclination).

3.3.   If a screen is used, its marking, position and orientation in relation to the ground and to the median longitudinal plane of the vehicle, shall be such that the reproducibility of the measurement of the dipped-beam inclination can be assured with an accuracy of ± 0,5 mrad (± 0,05 per cent inclination).

3.4.   During measurements, the ambient temperature shall be between 10 and 30 °C.

4.   VEHICLE PREPARATION

4.1.   Measurements shall be carried out on a vehicle which has travelled a distance of between 1 000 km and 10 000 km, preferably 5 000 km.

4.2.   Tyres shall be inflated to the full-load pressure specified by the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle shall be fully replenished (fuel, water, oil) and equipped with all the accessories and tools specified by the manufacturer. Full fuel replenishment means that the fuel tank shall be filled to not less than 90 per cent of its capacity.

4.3.   The vehicle shall have the parking brake released and the gearbox in neutral.

4.4.   The vehicle shall be conditioned for at least 8 h at the temperature specified in paragraph 3.4 above.

4.5.   If a photometric or visual method is used, headlamps with a well- defined dipped-beam cut-off should preferably be installed on the vehicle under test in order to facilitate the measurements. Other means are allowed to obtain a more precise reading (for example, removal of the headlamp lens).

5.   TEST PROCEDURE

5.1.   General

The variations in either dipped-beam or vehicle inclination, depending on the method chosen, shall be measured separately for each side of the vehicle. The results obtained from both left and right headlamps under all the load conditions specified in Annex 5, shall be within the limits set out in paragraph 5.5 below. The load shall be applied gradually without subjecting the vehicle to excessive shocks.

5.1.1.   Where an AFS is fitted, the measurements shall be carried out with the AFS in its neutral state.

5.2.   Determination of the measured initial inclination

The vehicle shall be prepared as specified in paragraph 4 above and laden as specified in Annex 5 (first loading condition of the respective vehicle category). Before each measurement, the vehicle shall be rocked as specified in paragraph 5.4 below. Measurements shall be made three times.

5.2.1.   If none of the three measured results differ by more than 2 mrad (0,2 per cent inclination) from the arithmetic mean of the results, that mean shall constitute the final result.

5.2.2.   If any measurement differs from the arithmetic mean of the results by more than 2 mrad (0,2 per cent inclination), a further series of 10 measurements shall be made, the arithmetic mean of which shall constitute the final result.

5.3.   Measurement methods

Any method may be used to measure variations of inclination provided that the readings are accurate to within ± 0,2 mrad (± 0,02 per cent inclination).

5.4.   Treatment of vehicle in each loading condition

The vehicle suspension and any other part likely to affect dipped-beam inclination shall be activated according to the methods described below.

However, the technical authorities and manufacturers may jointly propose other methods (either experimental or based upon calculations), especially when the test poses particular problems, provided such calculations are clearly valid.

5.4.1.   M1 category vehicles with conventional suspension

With the vehicle standing on the measuring site and, if necessary, with the wheels resting on floating platforms (which shall be used if their absence would lead to restriction of the suspension movement likely to affect the results of measurements), rock the vehicle continuously for at least three complete cycles, for each cycle, first the rear and than the front end of the vehicle is pushed down.

The rocking sequence shall end with the completion of a cycle. Before making the measurements, the vehicle shall be allowed to come to rest spontaneously. Instead of using floating platforms, the same effect can be achieved by moving the vehicle backwards and forwards for at least a complete wheel revolution.

5.4.2.   M2, M3 and N category vehicles with conventional suspension

| 5.4.2.1. | If the treatment method for category M1 vehicles described in paragraph 5.4.1 is not possible, the method described in paragraph 5.4.2.2 or 5.4.2.3 may be used. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.2.1.

| 5.4.2.2. | With the vehicle standing on the measuring site and the wheels on the ground, rock the vehicle by temporarily varying the load. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.2.2.

| 5.4.2.3. | With the vehicle standing on the measuring site and the wheels on the ground, activate the vehicle suspension and all other parts which may affect the dipped-beam inclination by using a vibration rig. This can be a vibrating platform on which the wheels rest. |
| --- | --- |

5.4.2.3.

5.4.3.   Vehicles with non-conventional suspension, where the engine has to be running.

Before making any measurement wait until the vehicle has assumed its final attitude with the engine running.

5.5.   Measurements

The variation of the inclination of the dipped-beam shall be assessed for each of the different loading conditions in relation to the measured initial inclination determined in accordance with paragraph 5.2 above.

If the vehicle is fitted with a manual headlamp-levelling system, the latter shall be adjusted to the positions specified by the manufacturer for given loading conditions (according to Annex 5).

5.5.1.   To begin with, a single measurement shall be made in each loading condition. Requirements have been met if, for all the loading conditions, the variation in inclination is within the calculated limits (for example, within the difference between the stated initial inclination and the lower and upper limits specified for approval) with a safety margin of 4 mrad (0,4 per cent inclination).

5.5.2.   If the result(s) of any measurement(s) does (do) not lie within the safety margin indicated in paragraph 5.5.1 or exceed(s) the limit values, a further three measurements shall be made in the loading conditions corresponding to this (these) result(s) as specified in paragraph 5.5.3.

5.5.3.   For each of the above loading conditions:

| 5.5.3.1. | If none of the three measured results differs by more than 2 mrad (0,2 per cent inclination) from the arithmetic mean of the results, that mean shall constitute the final result. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.3.1.

| 5.5.3.2. | If any measurement differs from the arithmetic mean of the results by more than 2 mrad (0,2 per cent inclination), a further series of 10 measurements shall be made, the arithmetic mean of which shall constitute the final result. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.3.2.

| 5.5.3.3. | If a vehicle is fitted with an automatic headlamp-levelling system which has an inherent hysteresis loop, average results at the top and bottom of the hysteresis loop shall be taken as significant values.
  All these measurements shall be made in accordance with paragraphs 5.5.3.1 and 5.5.3.2. |
| --- | --- |

5.5.3.3.

All these measurements shall be made in accordance with paragraphs 5.5.3.1 and 5.5.3.2.

5.5.4.   Requirements have been met, if, under all loading conditions, the variation between the measured initial inclination determined in accordance with paragraph 5.2 and the inclination measured under each loading condition is less than the values calculated in paragraph 5.5.1 (without safety margin).

5.5.5.   If only one of the calculated upper or lower limits of variation is exceeded, the manufacturer shall be permitted to choose a different value for the stated initial inclination, within the limits specified for approval.

---

ANNEX 7

INDICATION OF THE DOWNWARD INCLINATION OF THE DIPPED BEAM HEADLAMPS CUT-OFF REFERRED TO IN PARAGRAPH 6.2.6.1.1 AND DOWNWARD INCLINATION OF THE FRONT FOG LAMP CUT-OFF REFERRED TO IN PARAGRAPH 6.3.6.1.2 OF THIS REGULATION

Example 1

Standard symbol for dipped-beam headlamp

Value of the stated initial adjustment

The size of the symbol and characters is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.

Example 2

Standard symbol for front fog lamp

Value of the downward inclination

The size of the symbol and characters is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.

---

ANNEX 8

THE CONTROLS FOR THE HEADLAMP-LEVELLING DEVICES REFERRED TO IN PARAGRAPH 6.2.6.2.2 OF THIS REGULATION

1.   SPECIFICATIONS

| 1.1. | Downward inclination of the dipped-beam shall in all cases be produced in one of the following ways:






  (a) | By moving a control downwards or to the left; |
| --- | --- | --- |

1.1.

(a)

By moving a control downwards or to the left;

| (b) | By rotating a control in a counterclockwise direction; |
| --- | --- |

(b)

By rotating a control in a counterclockwise direction;

| (c) | By depressing a button (push-pull control). |
| --- | --- |

(c)

By depressing a button (push-pull control).

If several buttons are used to adjust the beam, the button which gives the greatest downward inclination shall be installed to the left or below the button(s) for other dipped-beam positions.

A rotary control which is installed edge-on, or with only the edge visible, should follow the operating principles of control of types (a) or (c).

| 1.1.1. | This control shall carry symbols indicating clearly the movements corresponding to the downward and upward inclination of the dipped beam. |
| --- | --- |

1.1.1.

| 1.2. | The ‘0’ position corresponds to the initial inclination according to paragraph 6.2.6.1.1 of this Regulation. |
| --- | --- |

1.2.

| 1.3. | The ‘0’ position which, according to paragraph 6.2.6.2.2 of this Regulation has to be a ‘stop position’, need not necessarily be at the end of the scale. |
| --- | --- |

1.3.

| 1.4. | The marks used on control shall be explained in the owner's handbook. |
| --- | --- |

1.4.

| 1.5. | Only the following symbols may be used to identify the controls:



  or combination of
  and |
| --- | --- |

1.5.

or combination of

and

Symbols employing five lines instead of four may also be used

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

---

ANNEX 9

CONTROL OF CONFORMITY OF PRODUCTION

1.   TESTS

1.1.   Position of lamps

The position of lamps, as defined in paragraph 2.7 of this Regulation, in width, in height and in length shall be checked in accordance with the general requirements set out in paragraphs 2.8 to 2.10, 2.14 and 5.4 of this Regulation.

The values measured for the distances shall be such that the individual specifications applicable to each lamp are fulfilled.

1.2.   Visibility of lamps

1.2.1.   The angles of geometric visibility shall be checked in accordance with paragraph 2.13 of this Regulation.

The values measured for the angles shall be such that the individual specifications applicable to each lamp are fulfilled except that the limits of the angles may have an allowance corresponding to the ± 3° variation permitted in paragraph 5.3 for the mounting of the light-signalling devices.

1.2.2.   The visibility of red light towards the front and of white light towards the rear shall be checked in accordance with paragraph 5.10 of this Regulation.

1.3.   Alignment of dipped-beam headlamps and class ‘F3’ front fog lamps towards the front

1.3.1.   Initial downward inclination

The initial downward inclination of the cut-off of the dipped beam and the class ‘F3’ front fog lamps shall be set to the plated figure as required and shown in Annex 7.

Alternatively the manufacturer shall set the initial aim to a figure that is different from the plated figure where it can be shown to be representative of the type approved when tested in accordance with the procedures contained in Annex 6 and in particular paragraph 4.1.

1.3.2.   Variation of inclination with load

The variation of the dipped beam downward inclination as a function of the loading conditions specified within this section shall remain within the range:

| 0,2 per cent to 2,8 per cent | for headlamp mounting height h < 0,8; |
| --- | --- |
| 0,2 per cent to 2,8 per cent | for headlamp mounting height 0,8 ≤ h ≤ 1; or |
| 0,7 per cent to 3,3 per cent | (according to the aiming range chosen by the manufacturer at the approval); |
| 0,7 per cent to 3,3 per cent | for headlamp mounting height 1 < h ≤ 1,2 m; |
| 1,2 per cent to 3,8 per cent | for headlamp mounting height h > 1,2 m. |

0,2 per cent to 2,8 per cent

for headlamp mounting height h < 0,8;

0,2 per cent to 2,8 per cent

for headlamp mounting height 0,8 ≤ h ≤ 1; or

0,7 per cent to 3,3 per cent

(according to the aiming range chosen by the manufacturer at the approval);

0,7 per cent to 3,3 per cent

for headlamp mounting height 1 < h ≤ 1,2 m;

1,2 per cent to 3,8 per cent

for headlamp mounting height h > 1,2 m.

In the case of a class ‘F3’ front fog lamp with (a) light source(s) having a total objective luminous flux which exceeds 2 000 lumen, the variation of the downward inclination as a function of the loading conditions specified within this section shall remain within the range:

| 0,7 per cent to 3,3 per cent | for front fog lamp mounting height h ≤ 0,8 m; |
| --- | --- |
| 1,2 per cent to 3,8 per cent | for front fog lamp mounting height h > 0,8 m |

0,7 per cent to 3,3 per cent

for front fog lamp mounting height h ≤ 0,8 m;

1,2 per cent to 3,8 per cent

for front fog lamp mounting height h > 0,8 m

The states of loading to be used shall be as follows, as indicated in Annex 5 to this Regulation, for every system adjusted accordingly.

| 1.3.2.1. | Vehicles in category M1: | Paragraph 2.1.1.1. |
| --- | --- | --- |

1.3.2.1.

Vehicles in category M1:

Paragraph 2.1.1.1.

| | Paragraph 2.1.1.6 taking into account |
| --- | --- |

Paragraph 2.1.1.6 taking into account

| | Paragraph 2.1.2. |
| --- | --- |

Paragraph 2.1.2.

| 1.3.2.2. | Vehicles in category M2 and M3: | Paragraph 2.2.1. |
| --- | --- | --- |

1.3.2.2.

Vehicles in category M2 and M3:

Paragraph 2.2.1.

| | Paragraph 2.2.2. |
| --- | --- |

Paragraph 2.2.2.

| 1.3.2.3. | Vehicles in category N with load surfaces: | Paragraph 2.3.1.1. |
| --- | --- | --- |

1.3.2.3.

Vehicles in category N with load surfaces:

Paragraph 2.3.1.1.

| | Paragraph 2.3.1.2. |
| --- | --- |

Paragraph 2.3.1.2.

| 1.3.2.4. | Vehicles in category N without load surfaces:






  1.3.2.4.1. | Drawing vehicles for semi-trailers: | Paragraph 2.4.1.1. |
| --- | --- | --- | --- |

1.3.2.4.

Vehicles in category N without load surfaces:

1.3.2.4.1.

Drawing vehicles for semi-trailers:

Paragraph 2.4.1.1.

| | Paragraph 2.4.1.2. |
| --- | --- |

Paragraph 2.4.1.2.

| 1.3.2.4.2. | Drawing vehicles for trailers: | Paragraph 2.4.2.1. |
| --- | --- | --- |

1.3.2.4.2.

Drawing vehicles for trailers:

Paragraph 2.4.2.1.

| | Paragraph 2.4.2.2. |
| --- | --- |

Paragraph 2.4.2.2.

1.4.   Electrical connections and tell-tales

The electrical connections shall be checked by switching on every lamp supplied by the electrical system of the vehicle.

The lamps and tell-tales shall function in accordance with the provisions set out in paragraphs 5.11 to 5.14 of this Regulation and with the individual specifications applicable to each lamp.

1.5.   Light intensities

1.5.1.   Main-beam headlamps

The aggregate maximum intensity of the main beam headlamps shall be checked by the procedure described in paragraph 6.1.9.2 of this Regulation. The value obtained shall be such that the requirement in paragraph 6.1.9.1 of this Regulation is fulfilled.

1.6.   The presence, number, colour, arrangement and, where applicable, the category of lamps shall be checked by visual inspection of the lamps and their markings.

These shall be such that the requirements set out in paragraphs 5.15 and 5.16 as well as in the individual specifications applicable to each lamp are fulfilled.

---

ANNEX 10

EXAMPLES OF LIGHT SOURCE OPTIONS

‘Standard’

DLS

Light source:

Replaceable

Approved to Regulations

LIGHT SOURCE MODULE

Light source:

Non-replaceable

Non-approved

SEALED

Light source:

Non-replaceable

Non-approved

Light-generator

Light-guide(s)

Outer lens(es)

---

ANNEX 11

VISIBILITY OF CONSPICUITY MARKINGS TO THE REAR, FRONT AND SIDE OF A VEHICLE

(See paragraph 6.21.5 of this Regulation)

Figure 1a

Rear

Image 64

Observation plane

Figure 1b

Figure 1b

Front (trailers only)

Front (trailers only)

Image 65

Observation plane

Figure 2

Figure 2

Side

Side

Image 66

Observation plane

---

ANNEX 12

| Automatic Switching Conditions Dipped-Beam Headlamps (1) |
| --- |
| Ambient light outside the vehicle (2) | Dipped-beam headlamps | Response time |
| less than 1 000 lux | ON | no more than 2 seconds |
| between 1 000 lux and 7 000 lux | at manufacturer’s discretion | at manufacturer’s discretion |
| more than 7 000 lux | OFF | more than 5 seconds, but no more than 300 seconds |

Automatic Switching Conditions Dipped-Beam Headlamps (1)

Ambient light outside the vehicle (2)

Dipped-beam headlamps

Response time

less than 1 000 lux

ON

no more than 2 seconds

between 1 000 lux and 7 000 lux

at manufacturer’s discretion

at manufacturer’s discretion

more than 7 000 lux

OFF

more than 5 seconds, but no more than 300 seconds

---

(1)  Compliance with these conditions shall be demonstrated by the applicant, by simulation or other means of verification accepted by the authority responsible for type approval.

(2)  The illuminance shall be measured on a horizontal surface, with a cosine corrected sensor on the same height as the mounting position of the sensor on the vehicle. This may be demonstrated by the manufacturer by sufficient documentation or by other means accepted by the authority responsible for type approval.

---